MIAMI-DADE COUNTY, FLORIDA

BOARD OF COUNTY COMMISSIONERS

CARLOS A. GIMENEZ, MAYOR

JEAN MONESTIME, CHAIRPERSON

BARBARA J. JORDAN REBECA SOSA AUDREY M. EDMONSON SALLY A. HEYMAN BRUNO A. BARREIRO XAVIER L. SUAREZ

DANIELLA LEVINE CAVA DENNIS C. MOSS SEN. JAVIER D. SOUTO JUAN C. ZAPATA JOSÉ "PEPE" DIAZ ESTEBAN BOVO, Jr.

CD 4.10(2) INSTALLATION OF APPROXIMATELY 10,000 LF OF 54-INCH DI FORCE MAIN ALONG THE SOUTH RIGHT OF WAY OF BISCAYNE CANAL (C-8) FROM NW 57TH AVE. TO NW 37TH AVE.

CONTRACT No. S-902

ER No. S049334 BID DOCUMENTS PCTS No. 12348 JUNE 2016

Volume 2 of 3

MIAMI-DADE WATER AND SEWER DEPARTMENT PREPARED BY LESTER SOLA, DIRECTOR HDR, INC.

SECTION PROJECT SPECIFICATION PAGES DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 Summary of Work 01010-1 – 01010-04 01011 Site Conditions 01011-1 – 01011-04 01015 Index of Drawings 01015-1 – 01015-02 01016 Safety Requirements and Protection of Property 01016-1 – 01016-06 01018 Environmental Contamination 01018-1 – 01018-01 01025 Measurement and Payment 01025-1 – 01025-08 01031 Grades, Lines and Levels 01031-1 – 01031-02 01090 Reference Standards and Abbreviations 01090-1 – 01090-02 01100 Special Project Procedures 01100-1 – 01100-12 01120 Work Sequence of Construction 01120-1 – 01120-03 01291 Schedule of Values 01291-1 – 01291-02 01310 Project Schedule, Meetings and Reports 01310-1 – 01310-06 01311 Project Coordination 01311-1 – 01310-05 01340 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples 01340-1 – 01340-09 01451 Contractor Quality Control 01451-1 – 01451-08 01560 Environmental Protection and Special Controls 01560-1 – 01560-03 01600 Materials and Equipment Shipment, Handling, Storage, and Protection 01600-1 – 01600-03 01710 Cleaning 01710-1 – 01710-02 01720 Project Record Documents 01720-1 – 01720-06 01730 Operating and Maintenance Manuals 01730-1 – 01730-10 01740 Permits 01740-1 – 01740-02 01750 Maintenance of Traffic and Public Streets 01750-1 – 01750-02 DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK 02230 Clearing and Grubbing 02230-1 – 02230-02 02260 Steel Sheet Piling 02260-1 – 02260-01 02314 Excavation, Backfill and Fill for Structural

Facility and Utility Systems 02314-1 – 02314-05 02315 Trenching and Backfilling for Piping Systems 02315-1 – 02315-11 02505 Cleaning and Testing 02505-1 – 02505-03 02536 Precast Manholes and Covers 02536-1 – 02536-06 02741 Prime and Tack Coats 02741-1 – 02741-03 02745 Pavement Removal and Replacement 02745-1 – 02745-07 02822 Chain-link Fence 02822-1 – 02822-01 02900 Landscaping 02900-1 – 02900-01

ER No. S049334 TOC - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE 03300 Cast in Place Concrete, Reinforcing and Formwork 03300-1 – 03300-17 03375 Flowable Fill 03375-1 – 03375-03 03400 Precast Pre-stressed Concrete 03400-1 – 03400-05 03600 Grout 03600-1 – 03600-02 DIVISION 4 –MASONRY 04100 Mortar for Masonry 04100-1 – 04100-03 DIVISION 5 – METALS 05120 Miscellaneous and Structural Steel 05120-1 – 05120-05 05550 Castings 05550-1 – 05550-03 DIVISION 9 – FINISHES 09900 Painting 09900-1 – 09900-12 DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL 15050 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050-1 – 15050-04 15060 Piping and Fittings (DIP) 15060-1 – 15060-23 15100 Valves, (General) 15100-1 – 15100-06 15125 Plug Valves 15125-1 – 15125-04

ER No. S049334 TOC - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

SECTION 01010

SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1. GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Work Included: This Section describes the project in general, and provides an overview of the extent of the work to be performed under this Contract. Detailed requirements and extent of work is stated in the applicable Specification sections and shown on the Contract Plans. The Contractor shall, except as otherwise specifically stated herein or in any applicable parts of the Contract Documents, provide and pay for all labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution, testing, and completion of the work under this Contract.

1.02 SPECIFICATIONS

A. The Specifications included in these Contract Documents establish the minimum performance and quality requirements for materials and equipment together with the minimum standards for quality of workmanship and appearance. Generally, there has been no attempt to separate the Specification sections into groups for the work of separate subcontractors, or for work to be performed by the various trades. Should there be any question as to the interpretation of any particular Specification section or part of Specification section, such question should be directed to the Department prior to the submittal of a proposal for the work under this Contract.

B. The work shown on the Plans is intended to be comprehensive and descriptive, not an exact and complete representation of the actual finished work. Installed work shall include fittings, joints, supports, nuts, bolts, and all other accessories required to provide complete and satisfactory systems as specified, even though some items may not be specifically shown on the Plans.

C. It is the intent of the Department to obtain a complete functional, and satisfactory installation under this project, and any items of labor, equipment or materials which may be reasonably assumed as necessary to accomplish this end shall be supplied whether or not they are specifically shown on any plans which may be supplied or stated herein. The Contractor shall provide all materials for the project unless they are specifically called out in these specifications as being supplied by the Department. The Contractor shall also supply all sheeting, shoring, bracing and all other labor, material or equipment required to preclude damage to, or loss of functionality of, any existing facility or system.

D. No request for additional compensation or Contract time (except for a non-compensable time extension at the sole discretion of the Engineer, whose

ER No. S049334 01010 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

decision shall be final) resulting from encountering utilities or structures not shown, or differing in location or elevation from that shown, will be considered. The Contractor shall explore sufficiently ahead of the Work to allow time for any necessary adjustments without delay to the progress of the installation. Costs due to delays occasioned by encountering underground utilities or structures which could have or should have been discovered by timely exploration ahead of the Work shall rest solely with the Contractor.

1.03 REASONABLY IMPLIED PARTS OF THE WORK SHALL BE DONE THOUGH ABSENT FROM SPECIFICATIONS

A. Any part of the work which is not mentioned in the Specifications but is shown on the Plans, or any part not shown on the Plans but described in the Specifications, or any part not shown on the Plans nor described in the Specifications, but which is necessary or normally required as a part of such work, or is necessary or required to make each installation satisfactorily and legally operable, shall be performed by the Contractor as incidental work without extra cost to the Department, as if fully described in the Specifications and shown on the Plans, and the expense thereof shall be included in the applicable unit prices or lump sum bid for the work.

1.04 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The work consists of furnishing all materials, labor, and equipment necessary to construct a 54-inch DI FM at NW 57th Avenue (Red Road) which connects to an existing 48-inch DI FM. The FM runs east for approximately 10,900 LF of open cut along the south embankment of C-8 canal (inside the Opa-locka Airport) up to the projection of NW 37th Avenue to connect to existing 54-inch PCCP FM. Additionally, there will be the installation of plug valves, air release valves, and access manholes.

1.05 TESTING

A. Testing procedures shall be submitted to the Engineer as shop drawings and will be subject to review and approval. The Department reserves the right to require test procedure and equipment changes and revisions to the extent considered appropriate by the Engineer whose decision shall be final. The Contractor is advised that all testing shall be carried out in accordance with the best practices of the trade, Best Management Practices (BMP) and as recommended in writing by the Engineering/technical/test staff of the manufacturer of the equipment and he should plan and price his test work accordingly. In no case will test recommendations of a manufacturer’s sales or management groups be considered sufficient. All necessary temporary power sources, load banks, test materials, test instrumentation, qualified test personnel including manufacturer’s representatives, fuels and lubricants shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be as approved by the Engineer and, if not approved, the Contractor shall change the item(s) to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Where required by the Engineer, testing shall be carried out utilizing Contractor-supplied power sources and load banks prior to any connection with FPL. The Contractor shall include in his prices bid all costs for

ER No. S049334 01010 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

testing and no extra compensation will be allowed.

B. Factory testing of equipment is in all cases required and test data from these tests shall be provided to the Engineer prior to shipment. At times the Department will want witnessed testing by Department personnel or representatives and at other times this will not be required. To establish a base line for pricing, the Bidder will assume that any piece of equipment with an invoice cost to the Contractor of twenty thousand dollars ($20,000.00) or more will require witnessed testing. The WASD will try in all cases to note which items in the Specifications will require witnessed testing. However, absent such list the Bidder shall use the $20,000 level for pricing purposes. In all cases during the cost breakdown process, the Contractor shall agree with the Engineer on the amount of a credit to the WASD for each item to be witness tested in the instance such test is canceled. All costs for factory testing will be included in the prices bid and no extra compensation will be allowed.

C. On site testing shall conform with the protocol previously approved by the Engineer and shall include testing and calibration prior to energizing of individual cubicles followed by testing and calibration as a whole system or group of systems. The Contractor shall supply via his own resources coordinated with those provided under the Emerson/Bristol subcontract, all material, equipment, power, time, and fully qualified specialist personnel to perform all system integration work as necessary to provide systems that talk to one another and correctly react to one another, including systems that must communicate with and react to existing systems and systems, being or to be, installed by others. It is an absolute requirement that upon completion, all systems installed in the Work be able to correctly communicate and react to one another and to systems, in existence, being, or to be, installed external to the Work. Final testing and calibration will be performed with the equipment energized and will only take place when the Engineer is satisfied with the results of earlier tests. Full written reports of tests and results shall be furnished by the Contractor to the WASD. All costs for this testing, calibration, system integration and reporting including the costs for factory and specialist personnel required during testing, calibration and system integration shall be included in the prices bid and no extra compensation will be allowed. Any delays or costs occasioned by test procedures or results not being satisfactory to the Engineer shall rest solely with the Contractor and no extra time or compensation will be allowed. All on site testing shall be witnessed by MDWASD and the Contractor shall make timely arrangements and fully coordinate tests with the Engineer.

D. After installation is completed, the Contractor shall provide records of non-destructive electrical insulation tests performed by a certified institution and approved by the Engineer, witnessed by WASD personnel and attesting that the dielectric condition of the equipment and wiring is acceptable.

ER No. S049334 01010 - 3 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

PART 2. PRODUCTS ( NOT USED)

PART 3. EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049334 01010 - 4 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

ER No. S049334 01011 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

SECTION 01011

SITE CONDITIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SITE INVESTIGATION AND REPRESENTATION

A. The Contractor acknowledges that he has satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work, the general and local conditions, particularly those bearing upon availability of transportation; disposal, handling and storage of materials; availability of labor, water, electric power, roads; disposal of water from construction; uncertainties of weather; the conformation and conditions at the ground; the type of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work and all other matters which can in any way affect the work or the cost thereof under this Contract.

B. The Contractor further acknowledges that he has satisfied himself as to the character, quality, and quantity of surface and subsurface materials to be encountered from inspecting the site, making whatever site investigations he deems diligent or prudent, and from evaluating information derived from exploratory work that may have been done by the Department or included with these Contract Documents. Any failure by the Contractor to acquaint himself with all the available information will not relieve him from responsibility for properly estimating the difficulty or cost thereof under this Contract.

C. The Contractor acknowledges that by personal field observation or other means satisfactory to himself, performed prior to the Bid, he has included in the prices bid all costs for dealing with all construction problems created by observable above or on grade features on or adjacent to the site of the work whether or not these features are shown on the Plans or described in the Specifications. In instances where the observable features indicate subsurface conditions which may affect the Project work, as for example, a pavement patch or catch basin gratings indicating respectively a utility or storm sewer not shown on the Plans, the Contractor acknowledges that he has made timely, diligent, inquiry of the Engineer or by other means fully satisfied himself prior to the Bid as to the nature of, and costs created by, the subsurface condition and included all costs therefore in the prices bid.

1.02 INFORMATION ON SITE CONDITIONS

A. All information obtained by the Department regarding the site conditions, topography, subsurface information, ground water elevations, existing construction of site facilities as applicable, and similar data will be available for inspection at the office of the Engineer upon request. Such information is offered as supplementary information only. Neither the Engineer nor the Department assumes any responsibility for the completeness or for the Contractor's interpretation of such supplementary information. Prior to bidding and after written approval from the Department, bidder may make his own survey investigations to satisfy himself with

ER No. S049334 01011 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

site conditions at his own cost.

1.03 SUBSURFACE INFORMATION

A. Subsurface investigations, including test borings, have been made to indicate subsurface conditions at particular locations. All information regarding subsurface conditions and all available soil samples recovered from test borings at the project site that the Department may have, may be examined by all prospective bidders prior to the receipt of proposals. Appointment for the examination of such information or soil samples shall be made with the Department.

1.04 BORING LOG

A. A log of test borings showing a record of the data obtained on subsurface conditions is included in the Contract Documents as an Appendix and is for reference only. All such information was prepared for the information of the Department's engineers only for design purposes and is not to be considered as a part of the Contract Documents.

1.05 BIDDERS SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION

A. Prospective bidders are advised, at their own expense, to make such subsurface investigation, by boring or test hole excavation, as may be desirable. However, such work is to be scheduled by appointment with the Engineer if on a Department site or by notification to the Department and properly permitted if in the Opa-Locka Airport.

1.06 DIFFERING SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS

A. In the event subsurface or latent physical conditions are found materially different from those indicated in these Documents, and differing materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in the character of work covered in these Contract Documents, promptly, and before such conditions are disturbed, notify the Engineer in writing of such changed conditions.

B. The Engineer and/or the Engineer of Record will investigate such conditions promptly and following this investigation, the Contractor shall proceed with the work, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer. If the Engineer and/or the Engineer of Record find that such conditions do so materially differ as to cause an increase or decrease in cost and time considered reasonable by the Engineer, the Department will make the final decision regarding any adjustment in cost or time for completion.

C. In the event that site conditions differ from those expected by the Contractor, the Contractor shall proceed to complete the work as contemplated by the Plans and Specifications at his own cost and expense. If in the discretion of the Engineer, the difference in site conditions renders completion of the work as described by the Plans and Specifications impossible, the Engineer may alter the work, in accordance with Section 3 of the General Covenants and Conditions, whereupon the Contractor shall be compensated for any extra work pursuant to Section 13 of the General Covenants and Conditions; the Engineer shall not alter the work where the site conditions render the work more difficult or costly to perform, if such work is

ER No. S049334 01011 - 3 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

otherwise still possible as described in the Contract Documents.

1.07 EXISTING UTILITIES AND LOCATION SERVICES

A. Known utilities and structures adjacent to or encountered in the work are shown on the Drawings. The locations shown are taken from existing records and the best information available from existing plans; however, it is expected that there may be some discrepancies and omissions in the locations and quantities of utilities and structures shown. Those shown are for the convenience of the Contractor only, and no responsibility is assumed by the Department, the Engineer, and/or the Engineer of Record for their accuracy or completeness. No request for additional compensation or Contract time (except for a non-compensable time extension at the sole discretion of the Engineer, whose decision shall be final) resulting from encountering utilities or structures not shown, or differing in location or elevation from that shown, will be considered. The Contractor shall explore sufficiently ahead of the Work to allow time for any necessary adjustments without delay to the progress of the installation. Costs due to delays occasioned by encountering underground utilities or structures which could have or should have been discovered by timely exploration ahead of the Work shall rest solely with the Contractor.

1.08 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR UTILITY PROPERTIES AND SERVICE

A. Where the Contractor's operation could cause damage or inconvenience to railway, telephone, fiber optic, television, electrical power, oil, gas, water, sewer, irrigation system, or any other utility, the Contractor shall make all arrangements necessary for the protection of these utilities and services.

B. Notify all utility companies that are affected by the construction operation at least 48 hours in advance. Under no circumstance expose any utility without first obtaining permission from the appropriate agency. Once permission has been granted, locate, expose, and provide temporary support for all existing underground utilities and utility poles where necessary. Absolutely no extra compensation will be allowed for construction problems created by utility poles of whatever size, overhead electric, telephone or other lines, whether shown on the Plans or not. The Contractor is solely responsible for discerning such items in the field prior to bidding and including all costs for such work in the prices bid.

C. The Contractor and his subcontractors shall be solely and directly responsible to the owner and operators of such properties for any damage, injury, expense, loss, inconvenience, delay, suits, actions, or claims of any character brought because of any injuries or damage which may result from the construction operations under this Contract.

D. Neither the Department nor its officers or agents shall be responsible to the Contractor for damages as a result of the Contractor's failure to protect utilities encountered in the work.

ER No. S049334 01011 - 4 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

E. In the event of interruption to domestic water, sewer, storm drain, or other utility services as a result of accidental breakage due to construction operations, promptly notify the proper authority. Cooperate with said authority in restoration of service as promptly as possible and bear all costs of repair. In no event shall interruption of any utility service be allowed unless granted by the owner of the utility.

F. In the event water service lines that interfere with trenching are encountered, the Contractor may, by obtaining prior approval of the water utility, cut the service, dig through, and restore the service with similar and equal materials at the Contractor's expense and as approved by the Engineer.

G. Replace, with material approved by the Engineer, at Contractor's expense, any and all other laterals, existing utilities or structures removed or damaged during construction, unless otherwise provided for in these Contract Documents and as approved by the Engineer.

1.09 INTERFERING STRUCTURES

A. Take necessary precautions to prevent damage to existing structures whether on the surface, above ground, or underground. An attempt has been made to show major structures on the Drawings. While the information has been compiled from the best available sources, its completeness and accuracy cannot be guaranteed, and is presented as a guide. The Contractor is solely responsible for field verification of all locations and information provided and to determine the type, location, elevation and extent of any utilities which may not have been shown on the Plans.

1.10 FIELD RELOCATION

A. During the process of construction, it is expected that minor relocations of the work may be necessary. Such relocations shall be made only by the direction of the Engineer at the Contractor’s expense. If existing structures are encountered that will prevent construction as shown, notify the Engineer before continuing with the work in order that the Engineer may make such field revisions as necessary to avoid conflict with the existing structures. If the Contractor fails to notify the Engineer when an existing structure is encountered, and proceeds with the work despite this interference, the Contractor does so at his own risk.

B. Representatives of utility companies, MDAD (Miami Dade Aviation Department), the railroad companies, the traffic and transportation authorities, etc., shall be notified in accordance with the provisions set forth in the relevant sections of the Specifications and the permitting documents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED

ER No. S049334 01011 - 5 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049334 01015 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

SECTION 01015

INDEX OF DRAWINGS

PART 1. GENERAL

1.01 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

A. Drawings dated May 9th , 2016 and any subsequent revision thereto introduced by Addenda prior to Bid, showing the work of the Contract are hereby made a part of the Contract Documents and are listed as follows:

Consent Decree Project No. 4.10 (2) Installation of Approximately 10,900 LF of 54 inch DI FM Running South of the South ROW of

Biscayne Canal (C-8) from NW 57th Ave to NW 37th Ave. ER No. S049334 / PCTS No. 12348

Contract No. S-902

Sheet No. Drawing

No. Title

C-1 Cover Sheet

C-2 RER Notes, General Notes and Legend

C-3 F.A.R, Part 77 Height Restrictions

C-4 OPF AOA Safety and Security Notes

C-5 Project Layout

C-6 – C-15 Plan and Profile

C-16 – C-17 Details

C-18 Contractor Access Routes/ Staging Areas/ Parking

C-19 Phasing/MOT Plan

C-20 Phasing Notes and Schedule

C-21 CSPP Details

C-22 Chain Link Fence Details

S-1 – S-21 Topographic Survey

B. Due to the possibility of typing errors or omissions, the above list shall not be considered as necessarily complete, nor shall the Standard Details which may be included elsewhere herein be considered as forming a complete listing of all Standard Details which may apply to this Project.

ER No. S049334 01015 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

Perform all work shown on all sheets of the Plans, as specified herein or necessary for a complete functional installation and no extra compensation will be made due to the omission or incorrect listing of a Drawing in this Section. All Departmental Standard Details are incorporated in these Contract Documents by reference and all work shall be performed in accordance with all applicable Departmental Standard Details.

PART 2. PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3. EXECUTION

NOT USED

END OF SECTION

 

ER No. S049334 01016 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902 

 

SECTION 01016  

SAFETY REQUIREMENTS AND PROTECTION OF PROPERTY  

  PART 1 - GENERAL

 

1.01 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR SAFETY  

A. Conduct whatever work is necessary for safety and be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site, including safety of all persons (including employees) and property during the construction of the project. This requirement shall apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours.

 1.02 FEDERAL, STATE, AND LOCAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS  

A. Safety provisions shall conform to the Federal and State Departments of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA), and all other applicable Federal, State, County, and local laws, ordinances, codes, the requirements set forth herein, and any regulations that may be specified in other parts of these specifications. Where any of these are in conflict, the more stringent requirements shall prevail. Contractor's failure to thoroughly familiarize himself with the aforementioned safety provisions shall not relieve him from compliance with the obligations and penalties set forth therein.

 B. All open excavations made in the earth shall be performed in compliance

with the State of Florida Trench Safety Act, OSHA 29 CFR 1926.650, Subpart P (Chapter 90-96, Laws of Florida). The Contractor shall appoint a "competent person", in accordance with Subpart P, who shall be present at the jobsite. A "competent person" shall mean one who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings, or working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to employees, and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them.  

C. The Contractor shall familiarize himself with the "Underground Facility Damage Prevention and Safety Act", Florida Statute 556. The Contractor shall contact the Sunshine State One-Call Center, at 1-800-432-4770, forty-eight hours prior to any excavation. Failure to familiarize himself with the aforementioned safety provisions shall not relieve him from compliance with the obligations and penalties set forth therein.  

D. Conduct operations in such a manner utilizing warning devices, such as traffic cones, barricades and warning lights that traffic, pedestrian and Department personnel are given adequate warning of hazards of the worksite as may be deemed necessary by the Department, Engineer of Record, governing agency having jurisdiction over the work or political subdivision.

 1.03 SAFE ACCESS BY FEDERAL, STATE, AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT OFFICIALS  

 

ER No. S049334 01016 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902 

A. The Contractor shall at all times provide proper facilities for safe access to the work by authorized government officials.

  1.04 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY PROGRAM  

A. Develop and maintain for the duration of this project, a safety program that will effectively incorporate and implement all required safety provisions. The Contractor shall appoint an employee who is qualified and authorized to supervise and enforce compliance with the safety program.

 B. Certain products specified in these specifications contain warnings by the

manufacturers that under certain conditions, if instructions for use are not followed, a hazardous condition may exist. It is the Contractor's responsibility to instruct his workmen in the safe use of the product, or any product substitution.

 C. The duty of the Engineer of Record to conduct construction review of the

Contractor's performance is not intended to include a review or approval of the adequacy of the Contractor's safety supervisor, the safety program, or any safety measures taken in, on, or near the construction site.

 1.05 SAFETY EQUIPMENT  

A. As part of the safety program, maintain at office or other well-known place at the jobsite, safety equipment applicable to the work as prescribed by the governing safety authorities, all articles necessary for giving first-aid to the injured, and establish the procedure for the immediate relocation to a hospital or a doctor's care of any person who may be injured on the jobsite.

B. Perform all necessary work to protect the general public from hazards, including, but not limited to, surface irregularities or unramped grade changes in pedestrian walkway or sidewalk, and trenches or excavations in roadway. Furnish barricades, lanterns, and proper signs to safeguard the public and work.

 C. The performance of all work and all completed construction, particularly with

respect to ladders, platforms, structure openings, scaffolding, fall protection devices, shoring, logging, machinery guards and the like, shall be in accordance with the applicable governing safety authorities.

 D. During construction, construct and at all times maintain satisfactory and

substantial temporary chain link fencing, solid fencing, railings, barricades or steel plates, as applicable, at all openings, obstructions, or other hazards in streets and walkways. All such barriers shall have adequate warning lights as necessary, or required, for safety.

 1.06 STORAGE OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS  

A. The Contractor is hereby cautioned that he cannot store any environmentally hazardous materials such as solvents, greases, lubricants or any other type of chemical substances at the project site. The Contractor shall

 

ER No. S049334 01016 - 3 PCTS No. 12348

S-902 

be allowed to keep such materials at the site which is to be used for immediate use only.

B. The materials shall be stored and handled in a proper and safe manner and upon its use immediately dispose of the containers, cans, rags and remnants of the materials in a manner approved by the Department of Environmental Resources Management (DERM) at the Contractor's own cost. The Contractor can not store empty containers at the site. In case of any violation, the Department will report such violation to DERM and the Contractor shall be subject to all the penalties and fines as required by State and County regulations.

 1.07 NOT USED

 

  1.08 TRAFFIC SAFETY AND ACCESS TO PROPERTY  

A. Comply with all rules and regulations of the city, state, and county authorities regarding closing or restricting the use of public streets or highways. No public or private road shall be closed, except by express permission of the Department. Conduct the work so as to assure the least possible obstruction to traffic and normal commercial pursuits. Protect all obstructions within traveled roadways by installing approved barricades, signs, and lights where necessary for the safety of the public. The convenience of the general public and residents and the protection of persons and property are of prime importance and shall be provided for in an adequate and satisfactory manner.

 B. Where traffic will pass over backfilled trenches before they are paved, the top

of the trench shall be maintained in a condition that will allow normal vehicular traffic to pass over. Temporary access driveways must be provided where required. Cleanup operations shall follow immediately behind backfilling and the worksite shall be kept in an orderly condition at all times.

 C. When flagmen and guards are required by regulation or when deemed

necessary for safety, they shall be furnished with approved orange wearing apparel and other regulation traffic control devices.

 1.09 FIRE PREVENTION AND PROTECTION  

A. Perform all work in fire-safe manner. Furnish and maintain on the site adequate fire-fighting equipment capable of extinguishing incipient fires. Comply with applicable federal, local, and state fire-prevention regulations. Where these regulations do not apply, applicable parts of the National Fire Prevention Standard for Safeguarding Building Construction Operations (NFPA No. 241) shall be followed.

 B. The Contractor shall have a Hot Work Permit Program and shall complete a

permit prior to cutting or welding. A Fire Watch shall be designated to help monitor the hot work operation.

 1.10 TRAFFIC CONTROL AND USE OF PUBLIC STREETS

 

ER No. S049334 01016 - 4 PCTS No. 12348

S-902 

 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for traffic control as specified hereinafter.

Any reference to Miami-Dade County, its departments, or its published regulations, permits and data, shall be synonymous and interchangeable with other recognized governing bodies over particular areas of streets or their departments, published regulations, permits, or data. Abide by all applicable laws, regulations and codes thereof, pertaining to maintenance of public streets, detour of traffic, traffic control and other provisions as may be required for this project.

 

B. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the maintenance of public streets, detour of traffic (including furnishing and maintaining regulatory and informative signs along the detour route), traffic control and other provisions, throughout the project as required by the Metropolitan Dade County Department of Public Works, Traffic Engineering Division (Traffic Division). Traffic shall be maintained according to corresponding typical traffic control details as outlined in the Dade County Public Works Manual. No street shall be completely blocked nor blocked more than one-half at any time, keeping the other half open for traffic without specific approval.

 C. If required by the Traffic Division, employ the required number of uniformed off-

duty policemen to maintain and regulate the flow of traffic through the construction area. The number of men required and the number of hours on duty necessary for the maintenance and regulation of the traffic flow shall be subject to their approval. If required for traffic control permits or agencies, the Contractor shall work odd or night hours, as required for traffic control reasons, and the cost of such work shall be considered as incidental to construction.

 D. The Contractor shall provide all barricades and/or flashing warning lights

necessary to warn motorist of the construction throughout the project.  E. Excavated or other material stored adjacent to or partially upon a roadway

pavement shall be adequately marked for traffic safety at all times. Provide necessary access to all adjacent property during construction.

 F. The contractor shall be responsible for the provision, installation and

maintenance of all traffic control and safety devices, in accordance with specifications outlined in the Dade County Public Works Manual. In addition, provide for the resetting of all traffic control and information signing removed during the construction period.

 G. Where excavations are to be made in the vicinity of signalized

intersections, attention is directed to the fact that vehicle loop detectors may have been embedded in the pavement. Verify these locations by inspecting the site of the work and by contacting the Sunshine State One-Call Center at 1-800-432-4770. Any loop detector which is damaged, whether shown on the Plans or not, shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Traffic Division.

 

 

ER No. S049334 01016 - 5 PCTS No. 12348

S-902 

H. Notify the Traffic Division 24 hours in advance of the construction date, and 48 hours in advance of construction within any signalized intersection.

 I. Temporary pavement will be required over all cuts in pavement areas, and also

where traffic is to be routed over swale or median areas. When the temporary pavement for routing traffic is no longer necessary, it shall be removed and the swale or median area restored to their previous condition.

 1.11 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR UTILITY PROPERTIES AND SERVICE  

A. Where the Contractor's operation could cause damage or inconvenience to railway, telephone, fiber optic, television, electrical power, oil, gas, water, sewer, or irrigation systems, the Contractor shall make all arrangements necessary for the protection of these utilities and services or any other known utilities.

 

B. Notify all utility companies that are affected by the construction operation at least 48 hours in advance. Under no circumstance expose any utility without first obtaining permission from the appropriate agency. Once permission has been granted, locate, expose, and provide temporary support for all existing underground utilities and utility poles where necessary.

 

 C. The Contractor and his subcontractors shall be solely and directly responsible

to the owner and operators of such properties for any damage, injury, expense, loss, inconvenience, delay, suits, actions, or claims of any character brought because of any injuries or damage which may result from the construction operations under this project.

 D. Neither the Department nor its officers or agents shall be responsible to the

Contractor for damages as a result of the Contractor's failure to protect utilities encountered in the work.

 E. In the event of interruption to domestic water, sewer, storm drain, or other utility

services as a result of accidental breakage due to construction operations, promptly notify the proper authority. Cooperate with said authority in restoration of service as promptly as possible and bear all costs of repair. In no event shall interruption of any utility service be allowed outside working hours unless granted by the owner of the utility.

 F. In the event water service lines that interfere with trenching are encountered,

the Contractor may, by obtaining prior approval of the water utility, cut the service, dig through, and restore the service with similar and equal materials at the Contractor's expense and as approved by the Department.

 G. Drainage culverts that are at or near right angles to a pipeline and are

removed by the Contractor shall be replaced in kind at the expense of the Contractor unless otherwise noted.

 H. Replace, with material approved by the Department, at Contractor's expense,

any and all other laterals, existing utilities or structures removed or damaged

 

ER No. S049334 01016 - 6 PCTS No. 12348

S-902 

during construction, unless otherwise provided for in these specifications and as approved by the Department.

 1.12 HURRICANE PREPAREDNESS  

A. General  

During such periods of time as are designated by the United States Weather Bureau as being a hurricane alert, the Contractor shall perform all precautions as necessary to safeguard the work and property, including the removal of all small equipment and materials from the site, lashing all other equipment and materials to each other and to rigid construction, and any other safety measures as may be directed by the Engineer.

 B. Upon Notification of a Hurricane Watch  

The Contractor should prepare or have in place a Plan of Action for the specific actions to be taken on their particular projects.

 C. Upon Notification of a Hurricane Warning

 

1) The Contractor shall implement their Plan of Action to protect the project and the public.  

2) For construction projects within the public right-of-ways, the Contractor shall suspend his construction operations, backfill all open trenches, remove all construction equipment and materials from the right-of-way, remove unnecessary traffic barricades and signs and secure remaining barricades by "half burial" or "double sand bags".

 1.13 WORKING IN CONFINED SPACES  

A. Where a Contractor needs to work in a confined space, the Contractor must comply with the General Industry, OSHA Confined Space Standard, CFR 1910.146 or the equivalent Confined Space Standard in DFR 1926, Construction Standards.

 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

 

(Not Used)  

  PART 3 - EXECUTION

 

(Not Used)   

END OF SECTION

 

ER No. S049334 01018 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902 

SECTION 01018

ENVIRONMENTAL CONTAMINATION

PART 1 – GENERAL

A. This Project is being performance on Miami Dade Aviation Department (MDAD) property, Environmental concerns should be subject to the requirements of MDAD SECTION P-160 CONTAMINATED SOIL / GROUNDWATER (Refer to MDAD Special Requirements Section P-160 included as Appendix B.)

PART 2 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. A dedicated allowance shall be established to reimburse the Contractor for direct cost associated with the hauling and disposal of contaminated soil.

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049334 01025 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

SECTION 01025 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL

A. The Contractor shall receive and accept the compensation as provided in the Quotation, Section 33, COST BREAKDOWN, of the instruction to Bidders and Section 27 and 28 of the General Covenants and Conditions as full payment for furnishing all labor, materials, tools and equipment, for performing all operations necessary to complete the work under this Quotation, and also in full payment for all loss or damages arising from the nature of the Work, or from the action of the elements or from unforeseen difficulties which may be encountered during the prosecution of the work until the final acceptance by the Department.

B. The cost breakdown (or schedule of values) referred to herein is defined in

Section 33 of the Instruction to Bidders. The cost breakdown (schedule of values) approved by the Engineer will be used as the basis for making progress payments and for determining the cost of extra work which is the same or similar (as determined by the Engineer) to that defined in the schedule of values.

C. The prices stated in the Quotation Form include full compensation to overhead

and profit, all costs and expenses for taxes, labor, equipment, furnishing and repairing small tools and ordinary equipment, mobilization, home office expenses and general supervision, materials, commissions, transportation charges and expenses, patent fees and royalties, bond, insurance, labor for handling materials during inspection, together with any and all other costs and expenses for performing and completing the work as shown on the Project Drawings and specified herein. In addition, the Contractor shall include the actual cost of social security taxes, unemployment insurance, worker’s compensation, fringe benefits, inclusive of life and health insurance, union dues, pension, pension plans, vacations, and insurance and Contactor’s public liability and property damage insurance involved in the work based on the actual wages paid to such labor and all other general costs and profits, prorated to each item.

D. It is the intent of the Department to obtain a complete and working installation

under this Contract, and any items of labor, equipment or materials which may reasonable be assumed as necessary to accomplish this end shall be supplied whether or not they are specifically shown on the Plans or stated herein.

E. Unless otherwise specifically stated elsewhere herein, the Contractor shall

include in the prices bid all materials, electrical supply, fuel, lubricants, temporary equipment, temporary wiring, temporary piping and fittings, pumps, gages, and all other items of whatever nature required to completely test, balance, disinfect if required, and put into fully operational condition all equipment and/or systems supplied by either the Department or the Contractor and installed as a part of this Project. Further, any test materials supplied by the Contractor shall be completely satisfactory to the Department. Any decision as to whether a

ER No. S049334 01025 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

particular material is suitable for test purposes shall be at the sole discretion of the Engineer whose decision shall be final. Any material considered not suitable shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor with suitable material and no extra compensation will be allowed."

1.02 PAYMENT ITEMS

A. It is intended that all work required to complete this Contract will be included in

the various bid items as follows: Item No. 1: Pavement Removal and Replacement (Airport Internal Service Road) For constructing limerock base for Type I permanent paving repairs, will be paid for at the unit price bid times the number of square yards of such base installed and accepted as measured along the main within the limits defined by details on the Plans and/or the Standard Details appended hereto. Greater widths are at the Contractors option and expense. The price bid shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor and equipment required for a complete limerock base installation ready to receive the tack coat and surface course. Limerock base for permanent paved driveway repairs will be paid for under this item. For constructing asphaltic concrete surface course for Type I (2-inch thick) permanent paving repairs, will be paid for at the unit price bid times the number of square yards of such surface course installed and accepted, as measured along the main within the limits defined by Details on the Plans and/or the Standard Details appended hereto. Greater widths are at the Contractors option and expense. The price bid shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor and equipment required for a complete machine-laid asphaltic concrete surface course installation. Asphaltic concrete surface course for permanent paved highways repairs will be paid for under this Item. For constructing Type "V" permanent paving repairs (nominal one-inch-thick machine laid asphaltic concrete wearing surface overlay), will be paid for at the Engineer, and the price bid shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor and equipment for a complete installation. Type V pavement repairs will usually be in addition to the required Type I and Type II paving repairs. Unit price bid times the number square yards of overlay, installed where directed by the this Item. Item No. 2: Seeding, Sodding and Landscaping For replacement of sod removed or damaged, if ordered by the Engineer, will be paid for at the unit price bid times the numbers of square yards of sod replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and placing of grass sod, including fertilizing, watering, maintaining and restoring sodded areas damaged, including during installation of main line, services or fire hydrant branch, if ordered by the Engineer. The price bid shall be full compensation for furnishing material, labor and equipment for preparation of the ground, fertilizing, placing the sod, watering and maintaining the sod area such as to assure a healthy stand of grass. Sod shall be maintained in a moist condition for a period not less than 30 days. Item No. 3: 48”x48” Ductile Iron Tee for Connection to Existing 48” DI FM For selling and delivering to the Department a 48”x48” DI tee with 48” MJ branch, 48” DI spool piece with tap for automatic air release valve, 48” plug valve, 48” DI solid sleeve (Long) (Restrained) coupler, 48”x54” DI MJ reducer, at the west connection shown on the plans or

ER No. S049334 01025 - 3 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

where directed by the Engineer in the field. These will be paid for from the aggregate sum amount bid by the Contractor for this purpose. Item No. 4: 48”x48” Ductile Iron Tee for Connection to Existing 48” DI FM For removing a joint of existing 48” DI FM pipe, and installing a 48”x48” DI tee with 48” MJ branch, 48” DI spool piece with tap for automatic air release valve, 48” plug valve, 48” DI solid sleeve (Long) (Restrained) coupler, 48”x54” DI MJ reducer, with flowable fill backfill of the excavation at the west connection shown on the plans or where directed by the Engineer in the field. These will be paid for from the aggregate sum amount bid by the Contractor for this purpose. The price bid shall be full compensation for each complete installation, ready for service, and shall include, but not be limited to, excavation; placing and compacting backfill; furnishing additional backfill material, if required; temporary paving; permanent paving outside of the main trench line, if necessary; and all other appurtenant and miscellaneous items and work. Item No. 5: 54”x54” Epoxy Coated Steel Tee, Spool Pieces, and Butt Straps for Connection to Existing 54” DI FM For selling and delivering to the Department a 54”x54” Epoxy Coated Steel Tee with 54” MJ branch, 54” Spigot by Plain End Epoxy Coated Steel spool piece, 54-inch Bell by Plain End Epoxy Coated Spool Piece, and two welded Steel Butt Straps, at the east connection shown on the plans or where directed by the Engineer in the field. These will be paid for from the aggregate sum amount bid by the Contractor for this purpose. Item No. 6: 54”X54” Epoxy Coated Steel Tee for Connection to Existing 54” DI FM For removing pipe joint from existing 54” PCCP FM pipe, and installing a 54”x54” Epoxy Coated Steel Tee with 54” MJ groove on the branch, 54-inch Epoxy Coated Steel Spigot by Plain End, and Epoxy Coated Bell by Plain End Spool piece, and two welded Steel Butt Straps from the tee to the spool pieces, the 54-inch tee branch outer diameter shall match the size of the new 54-inch DI forcemain for a MJ connection, with flowable fill backfill of the excavation at the east connection shown on the plans or where directed by the Engineer in the field. These will be paid for from the aggregate sum amount bid by the Contractor for this purpose. The price bid shall be full compensation for each complete installation, ready for service, and shall include, but not be limited to, excavation; placing and compacting backfill; furnishing additional backfill material, if required; temporary paving; permanent paving outside of the main trench line, if necessary; and all other appurtenant and miscellaneous items and work. Item No. 7: Access Manholes For selling and delivering to the Department access manholes at locations shown on the plans, or where directed by the Engineer in the field, complete as shown in the Standard Details, will be paid for at the unit price bid times, the number of assemblies accepted. The price bid shall be full compensation for transportation and handling cost delivered ditch side; for unloading; furnishing all materials and equipment necessary; and all other appurtenant and miscellaneous items and work. Item No. 8: Access Manholes For installing access manholes at locations shown on the plans, or where directed by the Engineer in the field, complete as shown in the Standard Details, will be paid for at the unit price bid times, the number of assemblies installed and accepted. The price bid shall be full compensation for each complete installation, ready for service, and shall include, but not be limited to, excavation; install manhole and manhole frame and cover, including concrete support ring and 5’x5’x8” min. thickness concrete slab for manhole foundation; placing and compacting backfill; furnishing additional backfill material, if required; temporary paving; permanent paving

ER No. S049334 01025 - 4 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

outside of the main trench line, if necessary; and all other appurtenant and miscellaneous items and work. Item No. 9: Airport Requirements (Mob & Demo) For performing preparatory work and operations in mobilizing for beginning the work of the Project, excluding materials and permit costs, both of which are paid under other payment items, shall include, but not be limited to; preparation, submission and acceptance of the Maintenance of Traffic Plan (MOT), by first WASD and meet the Airport requirements and if acceptable to the Department, submission and acceptance by all other governing authorities; supply, submission and correction of all shop drawings for long lead time materials; ordering the said equipment and materials in a timely fashion; those operations necessary for the movement of personnel, equipment, supplies and incidentals to the Project site and for the establishment of temporary offices, buildings, safety equipment and first aid supplies, sanitary and other facilities; the cost of MOT and permit preparation/submission/acceptance; the costs of bonds, required insurance and other preconstruction expense but excluding the actual cost of permits, which are paid under a separate dedicated allowance account and excluding the cost of materials which are paid under another bid item(s). The mobilization item will be paid for in four (4) separate payments, each equal to twenty-five (25) percent of the amount bid for this item for a contract with construction duration of over 120 calendar days. The four payments will be made with the first four payment draws and is conditioned upon progress satisfactory to the Engineer being made pursuant to the accepted Project. The total amount of the four partial payments may not exceed ten (10) percent of the original Subtotal of the bid items. Any remaining amount will be paid upon completion of all work on the Contract. Retainage, as specified in the General Covenants and Conditions and any Special Provisions will apply to these payments. Item No. 10: 54-inch Ductile Iron Pipe Class 150 psi For selling and delivery to the Department a 54-inch ductile iron pipe and fittings with Restrained Joints for wastewater forcemain, will be paid for at the unit price bid times the number of feet accepted. The price bid shall be full compensation for furnishing the pipes; furnishing fittings, solid sleeves, and specials; pipe bedding; materials for placing mains out of service; adapter fitting; megalugs; tie rods and eye bolts; transportation and handling cost delivered ditch side; furnishing all materials and equipment required to clean and test the forcemain; flange joint materials; concrete and grout materials; materials for constructing thrust blocks if required; furnishing additional trench backfill to replace unsuitable material removed within the trench; all pipe shop drawings preparation and correction costs; and all other appurtenant and miscellaneous items required for a complete installation Item No. 11: 54-inch Ductile Iron Pipe Class 150 psi For installing of 54-inch ductile iron pipe and fittings with Restrained Joints for wastewater forcemain, will be paid for at the unit price bid times the number of feet installed. The price per foot for installing pipe and fittings shall be full compensation for the completed pipeline, ready for service and shall include, but not be limited to, for complying with Trench Safety Act; exploratory excavation; excavation, sheeting and shoring to control trench width; furnishing joint materials including vegetable soap lubricant; protecting existing utilities along the route of the main; making thrust resistant joints; installing the rod and eye bolts; installing megalugs; installing solid sleeves making all connections within the lines themselves; cleaning and testing the force main; placing and compacting backfill; furnishing additional suitable backfill material within the trench, if required; furnishing and installing flowable fill as shown on the plans;

ER No. S049334 01025 - 5 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

disposing of excess or unsuitable fill material; replacing utilities, , and all other similar items, to original locations and to equal or better than original conditions; furnishing and maintaining temporary barricades; and all other appurtenant and miscellaneous items and work including final daily cleanup as per MDAD regulations. The quantity for payments shall be the horizontal projection of the center line of the permanently installed and accepted pipe (of the particular bid item), including the length of fittings along the run, measured to the nearest one-tenth of a foot from P.I. to P.I. of fittings and to the seat of the bell at the end of any particular run. Item No. 12: Air Release Valve For selling and delivering to the Department Automatic Air Release Valve Assemblies (ARV’s), at locations shown on the plans, or where directed by the Engineer in the field, complete as shown in the Standard Details, will be paid for at the unit price bid times, the number of assemblies accepted. The price bid shall be full compensation furnishing PVC pipe, including cutting and threading as required; furnishing corporation stop, 2” bronze threaded coupling, 2” bronze ball valve, bronze nipple, automatic air release valve assembly; furnishing manhole and manhole frame and cover, including concrete support ring and 5’x5’x8” min. thickness concrete slab for manhole foundation; furnishing additional backfill material, if required; and all other appurtenant and miscellaneous items and work. Item No. 13: Air Release Valve For installing Automatic Air Release Valve Assemblies (ARV’s), at locations shown on the plans, or where directed by the Engineer in the field, complete as shown in the Standard Details, will be paid for at the unit price bid times, the number of assemblies installed and accepted. The price bid shall be full compensation for installation, ready for service, and shall include, excavation; installing PVC pipe, including cutting and threading as required; tapping the ductile iron pipe; installing corporation stop, 2” bronze threaded coupling, 2” bronze ball valve, bronze nipple, automatic air release valve assembly; install manhole and manhole frame and cover, including concrete support ring and 5’x5’x8” min. thickness concrete slab for manhole foundation; placing and compacting backfill; furnishing additional backfill material, if required; temporary paving; permanent paving outside of the main trench line, if necessary; and all other appurtenant and miscellaneous items and work. Item No. 14: 48-inch Plug Valve For selling and delivering to the Department 48-inch plug valves complete with manual gear operators which shall be totally enclosed worm gear operators, permanently lubricated, suitable for buried and submerged operation, and shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA Standard C504, with AWWA input shaft stop. These will be paid for at the unit price bid times, the number of assemblies accepted. The price bid shall be full compensation for transportation and handling costs; all materials and equipment required to pressure testing the valve above grade in both directions prior to installation, to the satisfaction of the Engineer; furnishing riser pipe and valve boxes including concrete support rings; supplying support slabs if necessary; and all other appurtenant and miscellaneous items and work. Item No. 15: 48-inch Plug Valve For installing 48-inch plug valve complete with manual gear operators which shall be totally enclosed worm gear operators, permanently lubricated, suitable for buried and submerged operation, and shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA Standard C504, with AWWA input shaft stop. These will be paid for at the unit price bid times, the number of assemblies installed and accepted. The price bid shall be full compensation for each complete installation, ready for service and shall include, excavation; placing and compacting backfill; pressure testing the

ER No. S049334 01025 - 6 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

valve above grade in both directions prior to installation, to the satisfaction of the Engineer; installing joint materials as required; installing the valves in the trench and installing riser pipe and valve boxes including concrete support rings; installing support slabs if necessary; making temporary and permanent paving repairs around the valve outside of the main trench line (if necessary); and all other appurtenant and miscellaneous items and work. Item No. 16: 54-inch Plug Valves For selling and delivering to the Department 54-inch Plug Valves complete with manual gear operators which shall be totally enclosed worm gear operators, permanently lubricated, suitable for buried and submerged operation, and shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA Standard C504, with AWWA input shaft stop. These will be paid for at the unit price bid times, the number of assemblies accepted. The price bid shall be full compensation for transportation and handling costs; all materials and equipment required to pressure testing the valve above grade in both directions prior to installation, to the satisfaction of the Engineer; furnishing riser pipe and valve boxes including concrete support rings; supplying support slabs if necessary; and all other appurtenant and miscellaneous items and work. Item No. 17: 54-inch Plug Valves For installing 54-inch plug valve complete with manual gear operators which shall be totally enclosed worm gear operators, permanently lubricated, suitable for buried and submerged operation, and shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA Standard C504, with AWWA input shaft stop. These will be paid for at the unit price bid times, the number of assemblies installed and accepted. The price bid shall be full compensation for each complete installation, ready for service and shall include, excavation; placing and compacting backfill; pressure testing the valve above grade in both directions prior to installation, to the satisfaction of the Engineer; installing joint materials as required; installing the valves in the trench and installing riser pipe and valve boxes including concrete support rings; installing support slabs if necessary; making temporary and permanent paving repairs around the valve outside of the main trench line (if necessary); and all other appurtenant and miscellaneous items and work. Item No. 18: Temporary Chain Link Fence For furnishing and installing Temporary chain link fence at the locations shown on the plans or where directed by the Engineer in the field, and to be removed at the completion of construction, will be paid for at the unit price bid times by the linear foot installed. The price bid shall be full compensation for furnishing material, labor and equipment for preparation of the ground and the removal the fence at the completion of constructioin, and all other appurtenant and miscellaneous items and work. Item No. 19: Chain Link Fence For removing and replacing of chain link fence at the locations shown on the plans or where directed by the Engineer in the field, will be paid for at the unit price bid times by the linear foot replaced. The price bid shall be full compensation for furnishing material, disposal of fence removed, labor and equipment for preparation of the ground, and all other appurtenant and miscellaneous items and work. Item No. 20: 16-inch Ductile Iron Pipe For relocating of 16-inch ductile iron pipe and fittings for wastewater forceman, will be paid for at the unit price bid times the number of feet relocating. The price per foot for relocating pipe and fittings shall be full compensation for the completed pipeline, ready for service and shall include, but not be limited to; for complying with Trench Safety Act; exploratory excavation; excavation; sheeting and shoring to control trench width; unloading the ductile iron pipe and fittings from delivery trucks at the job site (trench side) and placing the pipe and fittings into position in the

ER No. S049334 01025 - 7 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

trench; constructing concrete anchors; furnishing joint materials including vegetable soap lubricant; protecting existing utilities along the route of the main; making thrust resistant joints; installing the rod and eye bolts; installing megalugs; installing solid sleeves making all connections within the lines themselves; tapping the main for corporation stops, installing corporation stops, if necessary; cleaning, disinfecting and testing the main; pressure testing portions of existing main; placing and compacting backfill; furnishing additional suitable backfill material within the trench, if required; disposing of excess or unsuitable fill material; temporary paving; replacing utilities, trees, hand rails, walls, and all other similar items, to original locations and to equal or better than original conditions; furnishing and maintaining temporary barricades and or construction cones for local traffic; and all other appurtenant and miscellaneous items and work including final cleanup. Item No. 21: Burrowing Owl site Assessment For on-site investigation of the work areas impacted by construction activity for the presence of burrowing owls. These will be paid for from the aggregate sum amount bid by the Contractor for this purpose. The price bid shall be full compensation for full assessment of the areas by a certified Biologist, including a survey and a mapping (schematic) of the areas, and periodic re-assessment, if required, and all other appurtenant and miscellaneous items and work. Item No. 22: Subtotal, the total of Bid Item No. 1 through 21. Item No. 23: Dedicated Allowance This item establishes a fund for reimbursement of the cost of required construction permits and fees and reimbursable direct expense associated with contaminated soils, if authorized by the Engineer. Payment shall reimburse the Contractor for only the cost of the construction permit or fee. Any question of whether a construction permit or fee is required shall be decided by the Engineer whose word shall be final. Any portion of this fund remaining after all authorized payments have been made will be withheld from contract payments and will remain with the County. Item No. 24: Contingency Allowance Account for Unforeseeable Conditions, Minor Construction Changes and Quantity Adjustments, additional work not covered by other items, if ordered by the Engineer: This account is for all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for modification or extra work required to complete the Project because of unforeseen conditions, unforeseen conflicts between existing elements of work and the proposed work; for minor changes required to resolve any unforeseen conditions, Revised Regulations, Technological and Products Development, Operational Changes, Schedule Requirements, Program Interface, Emergencies and Other Miscellaneous Costs; and for adjustments to estimated quantities shown on the unit prices of the proposal to conform to actual quantities installed; and associated time related to this work only if ordered by the Engineer. Payment to the Contractor under the Contingency Allowance Account Items will only be made for work ordered in writing by the Engineer, in accordance with Section 2.92 of the Special Conditions entitled "Extra Work and Payment Therefor". Any portion of these accounts remaining after all authorized payments have been made will be withheld from Contract payments, and will remain with the County. 1.03 PAYMENT

A. General: Progress payments will be made monthly on the date established in

ER No. S049334 01025 - 8 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

the General Covenants and Conditions. B. Payment for all Work shown or specified in the Contract Documents is included

in the Contract Price. No measurement or payment will be made for individual items.

C. Payment for Lump or Aggregate Sum Work covers all Work specified or shown within the limits or Specification sections.

1.04 NONPAYMENT FOR REJECTED OR UNUSED PRODUCTS

A Payment will not be made for following: 1. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected material. 2. Quantities of material wasted or disposed of in manner not called for

under Contract Documents. 3. Rejected loads of material, including material rejected after it has been

placed by reason of failure of CONTRACTOR to conform to provisions of Contract Documents.

4. Material not unloaded from transporting vehicle. 5. Defective Work not accepted by DEPARTMENT. 6. Material remaining on hand after completion of Work.

1.05 PARTIAL PAYMENT FOR STORED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A Partial Payment: Partial payments will be made in accordance with the General Covenants and Conditions.

B. Final Payment: Will be made only for materials incorporated in Work; remaining

materials, for which partial payments have been made, shall revert to Contractor unless otherwise agreed, and partial payments made for those items will be deducted from final payment.

1.06 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

A. Prior to submitting final application, make acceptable delivery of required documents, and other requirements as specified in Section 01700, Contract Closeout.

B. Final payment shall be subject to the conditions and requirements included in the

General Covenants and Conditions and all others included in the Contract.

1.07 PRICES BID

A. The price bid for each item shall be stated in both words and figures in the appropriate places in the Quotation form. All blank spaces for bid prices must be filled in with ink, or with a typewriter. The Bidder is further directed that any and all alterations, changes, corrections and modifications, made to the Quotation forms prior to submission of bids, must be initialed by the Bidder. Non-compliance by the Bidder of this directive may be grounds for rejection of his bid.

B. In the event that there is a discrepancy between the price written in words and

the price written in numbers, the price written in words shall govern except where the number of units multiplied by the unit price shown in numbers equals the total price for that bid item. In such case the unit price shown in numbers shall govern

ER No. S049334 01025 - 9 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

over the unit price shown in words. C. Where an error is made in the calculation of the total bid price of an item, the unit

price shall govern. D. If the bidder makes an error in his addition of the total bid prices of the applicable

items in the Quotation, the correct sum of its' applicable bid item totals shall be the Total Bid.

E. It has been determined that the County is not exempt from the payment of

Florida State Sales Tax under this Contract. All items of materials, equipment and supplies furnished by the Contractor and remaining a part of the completed Project are subject to this Tax. The Bidder shall include a sufficient amount of money to pay for this Tax in his bid price. Sufficient money to pay the Tax for all miscellaneous materials and minor items shown on the Plans, specified herein, or necessary for the work, and which will remain a part of the completed Project, shall also be included in the price or prices bid, and no other compensation will be provided.”

PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTIONS NOT USED

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049334 01031 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

SECTION 01031

GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This work of this Section comprises the establishing of grades, lines and levels.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01720 - Project Record Documents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Furnish all stakes, templates and other materials necessary for establishing and maintaining of the lines and grades necessary for control and construction of the Work and all incidental labor necessary for the prosecution of the Work.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 LAYOUT OF THE WORK

A. As provided in Section 4 of the General Covenants and Conditions, the Contractor through the services of a Florida Registered Land Surveyor, shall establish the line and bench marks and other reference points for the installation of the pipeline or structure.

B. For pipelines, this will consist of establishing all points of bend (but not necessarily bevel pipe unless in close proximity to other facilities), valves, tees, crosses and other stations not more than 100 feet apart along the proposed centerline of the pipe, or along a stationed offset line as shown on the Plans, marked by a nail in a metal cap if in pavement, with the station painted nearby or by a nail in the top of a wooden stake driven flush with the ground with the station marked on a flag stake nearby, if not in pavement.

C. For structures, this will consist of base lines, stakes at corners, centers and centerlines, auxiliary lines and a bench mark from which to establish the elevations.

D. The Contractor shall supply the Department Inspector with a copy of the

ER No. S049334 01031 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

Registered Land Surveyor's layout of the Work immediately upon its availability to his own forces.

E. The Contractor shall make his equipment and men available to the Inspector for spot checking the accuracy of the Work. The Inspector shall require the Work to be brought within the tolerances specified elsewhere before backfill is placed or the construction is otherwise hidden.

3.02 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. During the entire construction operation, the Contractor shall retain the services of a State of Florida Registered Land Surveyor who shall maintain records of the installation, including all deviations from the plans and specifications by obtaining "As-built" dimensions and elevations.

B. The surveyor shall prepare therefrom, record as-built drawings showing correctly and accurately all changes and deviations made during construction, including approved construction variances to reflect the Work as it was actually constructed.

C. "As-Built" drawings shall be submitted to the Chief Construction Manager on a monthly basis. Refer to Section 01720 - Project Record Documents for Department's Criteria for developing record as-built drawings.

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049334 01090 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

SECTION 01090

REFERENCE STANDARDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Comply with the requirements of the specification or standard which is current on the date of Advertisement for Bids. In case of conflict between the referenced specifications or standards, the one having the more stringent requirements shall govern.

B. In case of conflict between the referenced specifications or standards and the Contract Documents, the Contract Documents shall govern.

1.02 ABBREVIATIONS

AA Aluminum AssociationAAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway & Transportation OfficialsACI American Concrete InstituteAGMA American Gear Manufacturers AssociationAIEE American Institute of Electrical Engineers(Now IEEE) AIA American Institute of ArchitectsAISC American Institute of Steel ConstructionAISI American Iron and Steel InstituteANSI American National Standards InstituteAPA American Plywood AssociationAPWA American Public Works AssociationASCE American Society of Civil EngineersASME American Society of Mechanical EngineersASTM American Society for Testing and MaterialsAWI Architectural Woodwork InstituteAWPA American Wood Preservers AssociationAWPB American Wood Preservers BureauAWS American Welding SocietyAWWA American Water Works AssociationBHMA Builder's Hardware Manufacturer's Association CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe InstituteCRSI Concrete Reinforcing and Steel InstituteCS Commercial StandardDOT or FDOT Standard Specification for Road and Bridge Construction Florida

Department of TransportationFED SPEC Federal SpecificationsFS Federal StandardHI Hydraulic InstituteICEA Insulated Cable Engineer's Association

ER No. S049334 01090 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association ISA Instrument Society of AmericaJIC Joint Instrument Conferences of Hydraulic Manufacturers NBS National Bureau of StandardsNEC National Electrical CodeNEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association NESC National Electric Safety CodeNFPA National Fire Protection AssociationNLMA National Lumber Manufacturer's AssociationNSF National Sanitation FoundationNWMA National Woodwork Manufacturer's Association OSHA U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health

AssociationPS Product Standards Section - U.S. Dept. of Commerce SAE Society of Automotive EngineersSFBC South Florida Building CodeSMACNA Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractor's Association SSPC Steel Structures Painting CouncilUL Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc

PART 2 PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

NOT USED

END OF SECTION

 

ER No. S049334 01100 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902 

SECTION 01100

SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 EXISTING JOB SITE

A. The work of this project is to be performed at the Miami-Opa-Locka Executive Airport and Dade-Collier Training and Transition Airport alongside the main runway. All work must be performed at night from 9:00 PM until 8:00 AM and the Contractor must mobilize and demobilize all equipment on a daily basis so that the airfield is clear during runway operations for the entire duration of the Project. Coordinate all work with Miami-Dade Aviation Department, General Aviation Airport Supervisor, Mr. Nelson Majias, at (305) 869-1662, to insure the safety of operating personnel. This night work forms an ordinary part of the work of this Contract and no extra compensation will be allowed. Do not restrict access of the airport personnel to airport facilities for the purposes of the operation and maintenance, and exercise extreme care to prevent damage to the existing facilities, particularly when making interconnections thereto. Provide all required labor, material and equipment to maintain all operational functions of existing facilities or systems except as otherwise specifically permitted by the Department during construction; including providing all temporary telephone, control, water, gas or electrical service and power to any station facilities or systems or associated elements to maintain their operational status if they are deprived of these services due to construction work; and including providing all sheeting, shoring, bracing and all other labor, material or equipment required to preclude damage to, or loss of functionality of, any existing facility or system.

B. Protection of existing utilities, structures and other facilities: The underground pipes, utilities and structures shown on the Plans are located according to the best information available, but may vary by several feet from both the position and elevation shown. The Contractor shall explore far enough ahead of his work to determine the exact location and condition of such utilities, structures or facilities so that, before the pipe is installed, the Engineer may change the line or grade of the pipe or other facility, should that become necessary to avoid a conflict. Should this exploration reveal that adjustments to the work are necessary; the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer and coordinate with him to adjust the work in a timely fashion avoiding delays to construction. No request for additional compensation or Contract time (except for a non-compensable time extension at the sole discretion of

 

ER No. S049334 01100 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902 

the Engineer, whose decision shall be final) resulting from encountering utilities or structures not shown, or differing in location or elevation from that shown, will be considered. The Contractor shall explore sufficiently ahead of the Work to allow time for any necessary adjustment without delay occasioned by encountering underground utilities or structures which could have or should have been discovered by timely exploration ahead of the Work shall rest solely with the Contractor.

C. All cost for changing the grade of the of the proposed forcemain downward two feet-six inches or less in order to clear obstructions located differently than shown on the Plans, or to clear obstructions located differently than shown on the Plans but the location of which could have become known or should have become known by proper observation of field conditions or the proper exploratory procedure, shall be included in the prices bid under the various items of the Proposal and no additional compensation will be allowed.

D. All pipes, sewers, drains and other pipe, cables, or conduits, and all other obstructions, whether or not shown, shall be temporarily removed from, or supported during excavation. It is intended that wherever piping systems or utilities such as water, waste water, air, chemical, electrical or other service lines must be crossed, deflection of the pipe within recommended limits and cover shall be used to satisfactorily clear the obstruction unless otherwise indicated on the plans. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage to such installations and shall restore them to service immediately.

E. Where the Proposal contains items for installing mains of the same size as that under discussion in specific depth ranges, the main shall be paid for at the actual depth range installed. However, the provisions of paragraphs B and C of this section shall apply and any depth increase caused by a lack of timely and sufficient exploration by the Contractor shall be at his expense. In such instance, the main shall be paid for as if installed at the elevations originally shown on the Plans.

F. Changing the grade of the proposed main by rising deflections, or the alignment by horizontal deflections, will not be considered as extra work, or extra cost, to the Contractor, and in some cases a credit to the Department may be warranted.

G. Relocation of existing utilities: The relocation of existing utilities, as noted on the Plans, or for the convenience of the Contractor shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. This work shall be completed by either the forces of the existing utility or the Contractor's forces at the discretion of the responsible

 

ER No. S049334 01100 - 3 PCTS No. 12348

S-902 

utility. If the work is to be performed by the Contractor, all work shall be done in accordance with the utility company's requirements. Under no circumstances shall the Contractor be authorized extra payment for this work, and all cost for the relocation shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

H. The Contractor shall also be responsible for the coordination of all existing utility relocations with the appropriate utilities. Where temporary supports or protective encasements are required during the construction, the Contractor shall be responsible for this work at no additional cost.

I. Any conflicts between the field investigation and the information shown on the Plans shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Engineer.

1.02 LAND FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES

A. The Contractor shall limit his operations, temporary facilities and storage of equipment and materials to on-site areas to be designated by the Engineer. No stringing of pipe is allowed along the forcemain route except during the evening construction hours for the pipe to be installed that work night.

B. Should the Contractor require additional space he shall make his own arrangements for storage of materials and equipment in locations off the construction site. For the allocated space, submit to the Engineer for approval, proposed plan and layout for all temporary sanitary facilities, offices, storage facilities, temporary water service and distribution, and temporary power service and distribution. Prior to commencing any new construction remove, relocate and protect where necessary all existing underground and above ground facilities, pipelines, utility systems, plantings and all other existing installations. All of these existing features shall be restored to their initial or better than initial conditions.

1.03 AIRPORT OPERATION INTERFERENCE

A. The work under this Contract shall be performed with a minimum of interruption to the operation of the Airport.

B. Except as otherwise noted and required in Section 01120 - Sequence of Construction, the Contractor shall coordinate with the Miami-Dade Aviation Department and notify the Engineer seven days prior to beginning work.

C. The work schedule submittals shall reflect the Contractor's coordination of all work with Miami-Dade Aviation Department, General Aviation Airport Supervisor, Mr. Nelson Majias, at (305) 869-1662. After approval, no

 

ER No. S049334 01100 - 4 PCTS No. 12348

S-902 

deviation from the approved schedule shall be made without prior approval of the Department.

D. In the event the Contractor's operation interferes with work at the Miami-Opa-Locka Airport, he shall at his own cost immediately make all repairs and replacements and do all work necessary to restore the Pump Station to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Such work shall progress continuously to completion on a 24 hour, 7 work-day week basis.

E. Provide all required labor, material and equipment to maintain all operational functions of existing facilities or systems except as otherwise specifically permitted by the Department during construction.

F. Provide all sheeting, shoring, bracing and all other labor, material or equipment required to preclude damage to, or loss of functionality of, any existing facility or system.

1.04 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. Prior to commencement of construction, a pre-construction conference will be held to discuss and approve the previously reviewed Contractor's construction progress schedule, proposed sequence of construction and proposed construction methods relative to existing facilities and to establish procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other submittals and to establish a working understanding between the parties as to the Project. Refer to Section 01310 “Project Schedules, Meetings and Reports”, Paragraph 1.02, B., 1 & 2 for additional requirements and reviews of Construction Schedule before the pre-construction conference.

B. In some cases, the pre-construction conference may be held after the start work date stated in the written Notice to Proceed. This may be due to difficulty in coordination of all parties concerned, a requirement to immediately proceed with construction or other similar reasons. Such delays, will not relieve the Contractor of any responsibilities hereunder, and will not be an acceptable reason for him to request additional work completion time beyond that provided since he can be obtaining permits, mobilizing his equipment and forces, ordering materials, performing minor work, or other work if approved by the Engineer, during the interim period.

C. Prior to the preconstruction conference, the Contractor shall prepare the construction schedule, as described in Section 01120 “Sequence of Construction”, Section 01310, “Project Schedules, Meeting and Reports” of the Specifications and provide copies of same to others in attendance.

 

ER No. S049334 01100 - 5 PCTS No. 12348

S-902 

D. The construction schedule shall include the place of beginning, the proposed order of progression, together with the estimated times for beginning and completing the various items of work. In addition, the Contractor shall prepare on electronic media, a critical path method (CPM) Construction Progress Schedule with emphasis made to “construction time and completion”.

E. Include in the construction progress schedule data showing chronologically all operations contemplated and necessary for the completion of the Project within the agreed time, schedules of Shop Drawings, submissions, and material delivery dates to be incorporated into each phase of the work.

1. Include a detailed description of the construction methods proposed and to be performed with a minimum interruption of the operation of any existing facility. WASD reserves the right to make changes to the sequence as necessary to facilitate the work or to minimize any conflict with facility operation. In addition, the Contractor is required to cooperate in order to minimize the disruption of activities of other contractors and/or WASD forces. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer in writing, Contractor shall not commence construction operations until the required information has been approved. After approval, no deviation therefrom shall be made without prior written approval from WASD.

F. The Engineer will discuss requirements of such matters as Project supervision and inspection progress schedules and reports, insurance, safety, and other items pertinent to the Project.

G. All parties to this conference should be prepared to discuss any problems anticipated with the execution of the work under this Project.

1.05 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with all applicable provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). The Contractor's Manual of Safety Practices, dealing with the firm's policies on field safety procedures for employees shall be submitted to the Engineer for his review before Notice to Proceed will be issued.

B. Conduct operations in such a manner, utilizing warning devices, such as traffic cones, barricades and warning lights, that traffic and pedestrians are given adequate warning of hazards of the work site as may be deemed necessary by the County and/or the Engineer.

C. Certain products specified in these Specifications contain warnings by the manufacturer that under certain conditions, if instructions for use of the

 

ER No. S049334 01100 - 6 PCTS No. 12348

S-902 

product are not followed, a hazardous condition may develop. It is the Contractor's responsibility to instruct his workmen in the safe use of the product, or any product substitution.

D. For trench excavations in excess of five feet in depth, the Contractor shall comply with the provisions of the State of Florida “Trench Safety Act”.

E. The Contractor shall familiarize himself with the “Underground Facility Damage Prevention and Safety Act”, Florida Statute 556. The Contractor shall contact the Sunshine State One Call Center of Florida (SSOCCOF), at 1-800-432-4770, forty-eight hours prior to any excavation. Failure to familiarize himself with the obligations and the penalties set forth herein shall not relieve the Contractor from any responsibility.

F. All open excavations made in the earth shall be performed in compliance with the State of Florida Trench Safety Act, OSHA29 CFR 1926.650, Subpart P (Chapter 90-96, Laws of Florida). The Contractor shall appoint a “competent person”, which shall mean one who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings, or working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to employees, and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them.

G. Do not store any environmentally hazardous materials such as solvents, greases, lubricants or any other type of chemical substances at the Work site. The Contractor is permitted to keep such materials at the site as are for immediate use only. Store and handle the materials in a safe manner and upon their use immediately dispose of the cans, containers, rags and remnants of the materials in a manner approved by MDWASD and Department of Environmental Resources Management (DERM) at the Contractor's expense. Do not store empty containers at the site. In case of any violation, the Engineer will report such a violation to DERM and the Contractor shall be subject to all the penalties and fines established by State and County regulations.

H. The Contractor's personnel will be in the vicinity of raw sewage. For his own protection, as well as for protection of his employees, he shall check with the Miami-Dade County Health Department and, based upon their recommendation, shall have his personnel properly immunized against disease, if required.

1.06 ELEVATIONS AND LOCATIONS OF EXISTING INSTALLATIONS

 

ER No. S049334 01100 - 7 PCTS No. 12348

S-902 

A. The elevations and locations of existing installations, including piping, equipment, etc., shown on the Plans are approximate. Be responsible for verifying the accuracy of these locations and elevations prior to commencement of any work which is to be connected to the existing installation and immediately bring to the attention of the Engineer any and all discrepancies discovered.

B. The Contractor shall verify these locations and elevations sufficiently ahead of the Work to allow time for any necessary adjustments without delay to the progress of the installation. Costs due to delays occasioned by locations and/or elevations differing from those shown on the Plans which could have or should have been discovered by timely verification ahead of the Work shall rest solely with the Contractor. No request for additional compensation or Contract time (except for a non-compensable time extension at the sole discretion of the Engineer, whose decision shall be final) resulting from encountering interfering installations not shown, or existing installations differing in location or elevation from that shown, will be considered.

C. Do not proceed with the work affected until permission is received in writing from the Engineer indicating all modifications required, if any.

1.07 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING PIPING

A. Perform in such a manner that no damage and minimal interruption is caused to existing installations. Any damage caused to existing installations shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Department.

B. Coordinate operations with the MDWASD and notify the Operations and Maintenance Divisions at least 7 days in advance of any activity which may interfere with traffic or other on-site operations.

C. All connections to existing forcemains of the MDWASD shall be made under the direct supervision of MDWASD personnel. Valves separating the forcemain being installed from existing mains shall be operated by MDWASD personnel upon request by the Contractor. Under no circumstances shall any of these valves be operated by the Contractor's personnel.

1.08 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY MDWASD

 

ER No. S049334 01100 - 8 PCTS No. 12348

S-902 

A. The Department will furnish water at a charge for all construction activities unless otherwise specifically made an exception in the Project Specifications or specifically made an exception by the Engineer in writing.

B. Consumption for the following activities shall be determined by Department personnel who shall be provided with a minimum of 72- hour advance notification. Failure of the Contractor to provide advance notification and/or have Department personnel on site to witness and verify consumption for the following activities could result in his being fined and/or a citation being issued against him in accordance with the rules and regulations of the Department’s Tampering Section.

C. Pigging:

1. Flushing, only if and when approved by the Engineer:

2. Chlorination, if applicable:

3. To fill mains being pressure tested, excluding make-up water during test: and

4. When and where directed or approved by the Engineer.

D. Water for construction activities listed above will be furnished from adjacent WASD-owned water mains or the most convenient water source. The Contractor will be billed by the Department based on water usage recorded by the floating meter. Failure of the Contractor to meter the water could result in his being fined and/or a citation being issued against him in accordance with the rules and regulations of the Department’s Tampering Section. The Contractor can obtain the meter through proper application and payment of deposit fee at the Department’s New Customer Division, 3575 South Le Jeune Road, Miami, Florida. In instances where no Department-owned source of water is available, the Contractor shall make his own arrangements with the municipality or other controlling authority and include the cost of all water required during construction in his overall construction cost. No reimbursement will be made.

E. When the project is occurring in Unincorporated Dade County, the City of Miami or Coral Gables, the Contractor shall present a Dade County, City of Miami or Coral Gables, respectively, Fire Department Permit during application with New Business Office. This requirement may also apply to some municipal areas of Miami Dade County.

 

ER No. S049334 01100 - 9 PCTS No. 12348

S-902 

F. The deposit fee will be refunded to the Contractor upon return of the meter in a sound satisfactory condition. The largest meter available is 2-inches NPS. Effective October 1, 2007, the required deposit for a 2-inch meter is $2,500.00 plus $125.00 service charge. For current fees contact the Department’s New Customer Division at (786) 268-5200. Additional fees may be required by other governmental agencies for utilizing existing sources of water.

G. All piping, fittings, valves and equipment, including pumps and power, required for handling the water shall be furnished by the Contractor. Care shall be exercised in the use of the water and provision shall be made to protect the water supply for contamination and indiscriminate use by unauthorized persons. The Contractor shall use only potable water unless otherwise specifically called out elsewhere herein and then only in the case of sewage force mains, reclaim water mains, or raw water mains.

H. Under no circumstance shall the Contractor utilize a water source, including existing piping, until such source or piping has been approved for use by the Department.

1.09 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY THE CONTRACTOR

A. In addition to the detailed specifications for materials and equipment, the general requirements listed below shall apply for all materials and equipment furnished under the Contract.

B. All materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor for use in the work shall be new and of recent domestic manufacture, and shall be the products of reliable manufacturers who, unless otherwise specified, have been regularly engaged in the manufacture of such material and equipment for at least five years. All components shall, wherever possible, be standard stock articles of well known domestic manufacturers. Where the Plans and Specifications designate the product of a particular manufacturer, the product specified has been found suitable for the intended use, but, unless otherwise provided, articles or products of similar characteristics may be offered for the approval of the Engineer. A minimum of six copies (more if so required elsewhere herein) of complete descriptive data shall be furnished regarding all articles furnished by the Contractor. The descriptive data shall consist of dimension plans, catalog references and other information necessary to clearly identify and evaluate each article. When substitutions are allowed, the Contractor shall make all necessary changes in adjacent or connected structures and equipment at his expense and shall be solely responsible for all costs and time required by any differences in construction methods, fabrication or assembly required and no additional time will be allowed. Any

 

ER No. S049334 01100 - 10 PCTS No. 12348

S-902 

re-permitting together with all cost and work associated therewith shall be performed by the Contractor and no additional compensation or time will be allowed.

C. Where contemplated changes, substitutions or appurtenant work require engineering design, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor shall have such design services performed at his expense. Said engineering design services shall be of an extent satisfactory to the Engineer whose word shall be final and shall be performed by a Registered Professional Engineer, licensed to practice in the State of Florida.

D. Unless otherwise specified or noted on the Plans, all steel bolts, nuts, washers and other miscellaneous ferrous metal items (except cast iron or stainless steel) furnished by the Contractor shall be hot-dip galvanized in accord with ASTM A123, Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings for Iron and Steel Products, or ASTM A153, Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. Where the word galvanized or its abbreviation is used on the Plans or in the Specifications, it shall mean hot-dip galvanized. Fabricated items shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Internal threads shall be tapped or retaped after galvanizing.

E. The Contractor shall procure extended manufacturer's warrantees on equipment furnished by him. These warrantees shall be kept in force and extended such that WASD will be provided a manufacturer's warrantee with at least one year to run beyond the date of final acceptance of the Project. A copy of the warrantee with these provisions clearly stated or with an attached letter of certification from the manufacturer to this effect shall be delivered with the equipment and no payment or partial payment for said equipment will be made until such warrantee/certification is delivered to the Engineer.

1. The warrantee shall specifically cover the case where the equipment warranted has been replaced by a newer model. In such instance the warrantee shall either provide spare parts and service to repair or replace in its entirety the original model, or in lieu of this; provide a complete new model unit to replace the warranted and failing equipment. Should the failing equipment be replaced by a new model, the Contractor shall be responsible for making all necessary changes to adjacent and/or connected equipment at no extra cost to WASD and to the satisfaction of the Engineer who's decision shall be final.

2. As a part of final inspection, the Contractor shall deliver to WASD in a form satisfactory to the Engineer, either warrantees or certifications of

 

ER No. S049334 01100 - 11 PCTS No. 12348

S-902 

warrantee extensions showing the warrantees to be in effect at least one year beyond the planned date of final acceptance.

3. All costs for procuring, maintaining and extending these warrantees shall remain with the Contractor, even in cases where the contract construction time for completion has been extended. These costs shall be included in the Contractor's bid price and no further compensation will be allowed.

4. In instances, as specified in Section 26 "Partial and Final Payment" of the "General Covenants and Conditions"; where WASD puts an item of equipment into full productive service prior to final acceptance, the warrantee shall still be extended to at least one year past final acceptance. However, WASD will reimburse the Contractor for the prorated cost of the extended warrantee from the time when the equipment was placed in full productive service to the date of final acceptance based upon the manufacturer's invoice to the Contractor for this cost. Only the warrantee cost will be reimbursed, no overhead or other costs will be allowed.

5. The Contractor shall care for and protect against loss or damage all material to be incorporated in the construction, for the duration of the Contract, and shall repair or replace any damaged or lost materials. He shall be relieved of such responsibility only upon final acceptance of all the work by the Engineer.

F. All valves, piping, structural steel and miscellaneous materials and equipment shall be stored on blocks or racks. As far as possible, no materials or equipment shall be stored so that it is in direct contact with the ground. All metal shall be thoroughly cleaned before being placed in the work. Storage and protection measures shall be subject to approval of the Engineer whose decision shall be final. The Contractor shall immediately protect materials by different methods, materials or to a greater extent if so directed by the Engineer in the field.

G. Any salvageable pipe, fitting, or other miscellaneous material or equipment, removed during construction and not reused in the work shall be cleaned, hauled to and stored by the Contractor at his expense, where directed by the Engineer, and shall remain the property of WASD. All other material and equipment shall be legally disposed of by the Contractor at his own expense.

H. To ensure satisfactory and successful final painting of materials and equipment to be furnished, it is essential that the paints applied in the shop and in the field be mutually compatible. To this end, the Contractor shall

 

ER No. S049334 01100 - 12 PCTS No. 12348

S-902 

require that the shop paint applied to the materials and equipment be compatible with the paint proposed to be used in the field, or shall determine what shop paints have been used and select field paints compatible therewith, all as approved by the Engineer.

1.10 MANUFACTURER'S EXPERIENCE RECORD

A. When a manufacturer's experience record is required by these specifications, the following may be provided in lieu of the specified record:

1. Manufacturers and/or equipment which does not meet the specified experience period will be considered if the manufacturer or supplier provides a bond or cash deposit valid for five years less his years of experience, which will guarantee replacement of the equipment or process in the event of failure or unsatisfactory performance or service.

1.11 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC (MOT)

A. As used herein, any reference to Miami-Dade County, its departments, or its published regulations, permits and data, shall be synonymous and interchangeable with other recognized governing bodies over particular areas or streets, or their departments, published regulations, permits or data. The Contractor shall abide by all applicable laws, regulations, and codes thereof pertaining to maintenance of public streets, detour of traffic, traffic control and other provisions as may be required for this Project.

B. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the maintenance of public streets, detour of traffic (including furnishing and maintaining regulatory and informative signs along the detour route), traffic control, and other provisions throughout the Project as required by the Miami-Dade County Department of Public Works, Traffic Engineering Division (Traffic Division). Traffic shall be maintained according to corresponding typical traffic control details as outlined in the Miami-Dade County Public Works Manual. No street shall be completely blocked, nor blocked more than one-half at any time, keeping the other one-half open for traffic, without specific approval.

C. If required by the Traffic Division, the Contractor shall make arrangements for the employment of uniformed off-duty policemen to maintain and regulate the flow of traffic through the construction area. The number of men required and the number of hours on duty necessary for the maintenance and regulation of the traffic flow shall be subject to their approval. The cost of such off-duty policemen shall be paid from the Quotation Item established for this purpose. If required by traffic control permits or agencies, the Contractor shall work, odd or night hours,

 

ER No. S049334 01100 - 13 PCTS No. 12348

S-902 

as required for traffic control reasons, and the cost of such work shall be considered as incidental to construction and no extra compensation will be allowed.

D. The Contractor shall provide all barricades and/or flashing warning lights necessary to warn motorists of the construction throughout the Project, and concrete barriers if required.

E. Excavated or other material stored adjacent to or partially upon a roadway pavement shall be adequately marked for traffic safety at all times. The Contractor shall provide necessary access to all adjacent property during construction.

F. The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision, installation and maintenance of all traffic control and safety devices, in accordance with specifications outlined in the Miami-Dade County Public Works Manual. In addition, the Contractor shall be responsible for the resetting of all traffic control and information signing removed during the construction period.

G. Where excavations are to be made in the vicinity of signalized intersections, the Contractor is alerted that vehicle loop detectors may have been embedded in the pavement. Every effort has been made to show the approximate locations on the Plans; however, the Contractor shall verify these locations by inspecting the site of the work and by contacting the Traffic Division. Any loop detector which is damaged by the Contractor, whether shown on the Plans or not, shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor, at his expense, and to the satisfaction of the Traffic Division.

H. The Contractor shall notify the Traffic Division 24 hours in advance of the construction date, and 48 hours in advance of construction within any signalized intersection.

I. Temporary pavement will be required over all cuts in pavement areas, and also where traffic is to be routed over a swale or median areas. When the temporary pavement for routing traffic is no longer necessary, it shall be removed and the swale or median areas restored to their previous condition.

J. Pavement markings damaged during construction shall be remarked promptly by the Contractor, as required by the Traffic Division.

1.12 BY-PASS PUMPING AND PIPING

General

 

ER No. S049334 01100 - 14 PCTS No. 12348

S-902 

A. The Contractor shall maintain sewage flow at all times during construction. A by-pass system shall be designed and implemented to ensure sewage flows 24 hours a day until such time as the upgraded pump station is fully operational and cleared to begin discharging into the existing sewage collection system. Only after this is achieved, can the proposed by-pass system be disconnected and disassembled. Bypass pump the sewage around the existing pump station:

1. As a part of construction operations and when high flow rates and insufficient upstream storage capacity make it necessary.

2. During the testing and startup of the Pump Station.

3. For 7 days beyond the startup of the Pump Station (unless otherwise ordered by the Engineer) to ensure that the Pump Station is satisfactory to the Engineer.

B. Submit complete, detailed plans for this aspect of the work to the Engineer for approval in accordance with Section 01340. Provide all necessary pumps, piping, and other equipment to accomplish this task with each mobilized crew and shall be prepared to perform all construction, obtain all permits, pay all costs and perform complete restoration of all existing facilities to equal or better condition and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

C. All costs of accomplishing the bypass pumping tasks, at whatever volume, and all associated work, such as restoration, shall be considered work covered by pay items in the Quotation and no extra compensation will be allowed.

D. In some applications, the sewer may be plugged and wastewater contained within the capacity of the collection system. This shall only be done when it has been determined the system can accommodate the surcharging without any adverse impact and when approved in writing by the Engineer.

Pumping and Bypassing

A. When pumping / bypassing is required, as approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall supply the necessary pumps, conduits and other equipment to divert the flow of sewage around the pumping station in which work is to be performed. The bypass system shall be of sufficient capacity to handle existing flows plus additional flow that may occur during periods of rain storms. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing the necessary labor and supervision to set up and operate the pumping and bypassing system. A "setup" consists of the necessary pumps, conduits and other equipment to divert the flow

 

ER No. S049334 01100 - 15 PCTS No. 12348

S-902 

of sewage around a pumping station, from the start to finish of work performed in the Pump Station.

B. Pumps and equipment shall be continuously monitored by an on-site maintenance person capable of starting, stopping and maintaining these pumps during the construction. If pumping is required on a 24-hour basis, the primary pumps shall be electric motor driven in order to keep noise to a minimum. Standby, diesel engine driven pumps shall be furnished and installed to provide redundant bypass pumping capacity. All standby pumping facilities shall be “hospital quiet”. At all times, the Contractor shall observe and comply with local noise ordinance.

C. Maintain an on-site pump attendant on a 24 hour per day, seven days per week basis utilizing personnel competent and equipped to deal with emergencies that may arise until the Project is complete and the Pump Station is accepted by the Department. The qualifications of the proposed pump attendant(s) shall be submitted to the Department for approval.

D. Perform in such a manner that no damage and minimal interruption is caused to existing installations. Any damage caused to existing installations shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Department.

E. Coordinate operations with WASD and notify the Operations and Maintenance divisions at least 7 days in advance of any activity which may interfere with the Pump Station operation. Only the WASD superintendent of facility can authorize partial Pump Station shutdowns and the Contractor shall, under no circumstances, interfere with any Pump Station component without Pump Station Superintendent's and Construction Management's authorization and supervision.

Surcharging Sewers

A. Where the raw sewage flow is blocked or plugged, sufficient precautions must be taken to protect the public health. Upstream flow shall be monitored. The sewer lines shall also be protected from damage. The following occurrences will not be allowed:

 

ER No. S049334 01100 - 16 PCTS No. 12348

S-902 

1. No sewage shall be allowed to back up into any homes or buildings.

2. No sewage shall overflow any manholes, cleanouts or any other access to the sewers.

3. Users upstream of the repair area shall be able to use all their water and sewer utilities without interruption.

B. If any of the above occur or are expected to occur, the Contractor shall bypass pump to alleviate one or all of the conditions. Additionally, the Contractor is required to observe the conditions upstream of the plug and be prepared to immediately start bypass pumping, if needed.

Pump Discharge:

A. Any sump pumps, bypass pumps, trash pumps or any other type of pump which pulls sewage/water or any type of material out of the manhole, pump station or sewer shall discharge this material into another manhole, or appropriate vehicle or container acceptable to the Engineer. Under no circumstances shall this material be discharged, stored or deposited on the ground, swale, road or open environment.

Sewage Spills:

A. In the event, during any form of "Sewage Flow Control," that raw sewage is spilled, discharged, leaked or otherwise deposited in the open environment, due to the Contractor's work, the Contractor is responsible for any cleanup of solids and disinfection of the area affected. This work shall be performed at the Contractor's expense with no additional cost to the Department.

B. The Contractor is also responsible for notifying the sewer system maintenance personnel and complying with any and all regulatory requirements in regards to the size spill with no additional cost to the Department.

C. The Contractor shall be back charged for any fines, penalties or other costs or damages imposed upon the Department by any agency or private party as a result of a spill or improper discharge by the Contractor.

 

ER No. S049334 01100 - 17 PCTS No. 12348

S-902 

PART 2 PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

NOT USED

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01120

SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION

PART 1. GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Before commencement of any work, in compliance with the requirements of Section 01310, Paragraph 1.02, B., 1 & 2, submit to the Engineer for approval a detailed sequence of construction, clearly showing the interrelationship and the interdependency of work activities with one another.

B. The work of this project is to be performed inside the fence of the airfield at the Opa-Locka Airport. Special provisions for aviation facility work must be followed. Refer to Appendix A GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS ARTICLE 13 “SPECIAL TERMS AND CONDITION FOR WORKING ON MIAMI DADE AVIATION PROPERTY”

C. Shut down of the existing 48” and 54” forcemain during tie-in work must be coordinated with WASD. Identify and properly schedule all partial pump station interruptions that may be necessary for the completion of the interconnections. Coordinate and agree to such schedules with the Pump Station Superintendent.

D. Coordinate sequence of construction with progress schedule to ensure timely performance of the work and project completion within the specified construction time.

E. Special Instructions:

1. It is the intent of the Department to construct this Project with as little disturbance and annoyance to the airport's neighbors as possible.

F. The Contractor's equipment must be in first class operating condition, including proper mufflers and other silencing accessories. All equipment must be properly lubricated on a special maintenance type schedule to reduce noise, including tracks, rollers, idlers, sheaves and other noise producing components. Care must be taken to prevent oil spillage of any kind or oil dripping from equipment. The Contractor shall provide a temporary electric service for his electric equipment as specified herein below, and shall pay all cost thereof, including all charges for electricity used during the entire course of the Project until its acceptance by the Department.

G. If the equipment used proves less than satisfactory and is unduly or needlessly disturbing the neighbors, in the opinion of the Engineer, he will have the right to order the Contractor to immediately modify the equipment to make it satisfactory, or to change to other equipment that is satisfactory at no additional cost to the Department.

ER No. S049334 01120 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

H. During construction the Contractor shall, by sprinkling with water or by other means approved by the Engineer, eliminate dust annoyance to adjacent property owners. No additional compensation will be paid to the Contractor for any costs incurred in complying with the provisions herein.

1.02 SEQUENCE OF WORK

A. General Considerations

B. Plan the work and carry it out with minimum interference to the operation of the Miami-Opa-Locka Airport facilities. Prior to starting the work, confer with the Engineer to develop an approved work schedule. It will be necessary to perform the construction work in the evening outside normal working hours in order to avoid conflicting conditions with airfield operations. The Contractor shall do this work at such times and at no additional cost to the Department. Contractor shall notify the Engineer 7 days prior to the commencement of construction.

C. The sequence of work shall be as follows:

1. Preliminary Phase:

a. Minimal coordination with Operation and Maintenance Department is required because the existing system is not affected.

1) Clear and grub the site, removing all debris, rubbish, and unsuitable materials as necessary to prepare site, and for the installation of suitable fill for compaction and grading to the elevations shown on drawings.

2) Remove all unsuitable soil from areas to be filled. 3) Locate joints on existing 48” DI and 54” PCCP pipes to confirm

alignment. 4) Begin at the west connection at STA 201+42.20 and install 54”

DI pipe to the east up to STA 206+00. 5) Install new tee fitting on at the west connection on the existing

48” DI pipe and install plug valve, access manholes and pipe to tie in to new 54: DI.

6) Test pipe and restore site to STA 206+00. 7) Continue to install 54” DI pipe from STA 206+00 to the east

connection including installation of the plug valve and access manholes up to STA 310+15.

8) Test pipe and restore site to STA 310+15. 9) Install temporary fence at east connection to accommodate the

54” PCCP tie in. 10) Remove pipe joint from the existing 54” PCCP forcemain and

insert an epoxy coated 54”x54” steel tee fitting with an MJ grove on the branch for connection to the new 54” DI force main, one bell by plain end spool piece of 54” epoxy coated steel pipe, one plain end by spigot spool piece of 54” epoxy coated steel pipe, and a butt-strap weld from the tee to the spool pieces. The 54” tee branch outer diameter shall match the size of the new 54” DI forcemain for an MJ connection. Tie

ER No. S049334 01120 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

in to the new 54” DI from the west connection. 11) Test pipe and restore site, including the removal of temporary

fence and the installation of the permanent fence. 2. Complete access asphalt paving as indicated, fence work, painting, and

other miscellaneous work. 3. Acceptance of pipe by Engineer. 4. Landscaping work could be done parallel with above activities. 5. Cleanup, property restoration and paving repairs shall follow as closely

behind the completion of testing as possible, followed by a final inspection and cleanup when all other work is completed. Remove all debris and excess material.

6. In performing the work in the above described sequence, all requirements of the Specifications shall be strictly followed, particularly those pertaining to tests, and cleanup as the work progresses.

PART 2. PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3. EXECUTION

NOT USED

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049334 01120 - 3 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

ER No. S049334 01291 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

SECTION 01291

SCHEDULE OF VALUES (LUMP SUM PROJECTS)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for:

a. Schedule of Values.

B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

C. Referenced Standards: 1. Building Code:

a. International Code Council (ICC): 1) International Building Code and associated standards,

{2006}{2009}{2012}{2015} Edition including all amendments, referred to herein as Building Code.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

D. {As required in EJCDC C-700 2.03.A.3 Schedule of Values.}

1.04 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

E. Where a Contract is awarded on a lump sum basis, the Contractor shall file with the Engineer a balanced price segregation of the lump sum bid into items similar to the various subdivisions of the general and detailed specifications, the sum of which shall equal the lump sum bid. 1. The cost of various materials shall be furnished upon request of the

Engineer, and such data will then be used as a basis for making progress estimates.

2. Breakdown costs, itemized by Specification Section and trade, and distribute cost to individual applicable units and structures.

3. Where structures, units, equipment or other components are identified by a specific series or, identification number, utilize said designation throughout cost breakdown.

4. Provide detailed breakdown for individual yard piping or conduit runs and identify approximate quantities involved to satisfaction of the Engineer.

5. Provide separate breakdown for change order items requested.

F. A reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to the component parts of the Work will be approved if component parts of the Work have values assigned to them that are well-balanced with respect to relative values for similar work established by published estimating guides.

ER No. S049334 01291 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

1. Unless otherwise agreed to at the Preconstruction Conference, Means Estimator Guide or other similar nationally recognized estimating guide shall be used for resolving differences between Engineer's and Contractor's opinions of allocation of values.

2. Consent of Surety: If Contractor and Engineer cannot mutually agree on a Schedule of Values, Engineer will approve a Schedule of Values approved by the Surety providing the Performance Bond.

G. Contractor's costs shall not govern the allocation of values when application of Contractor's costs to a component part of the Work results in any other component part or combination of component parts being under-valued in relation to conventional estimating guides.

H. SCHEDULE OF VALUES shall be agreed upon prior to first Application for Payment.

1.05 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

I. Provide a Summary Sheets and cost breakdown sheets equivalent to those of EJCDC document C-620, Contractor's Application for Payment forms.

J. Provide an additional breakdown sheet, equivalent to the Stored Material Summary of EJCDC document C620, showing the tabulation format for stored materials.

K. Submit this sheet each month with Contractor's pay request breakdown.

L. The detail and format of cost breakdown and stored materials tabulation sheet shall be fully approved by Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SPECIFICATION SECTION)

PART 3 - EXECUTION - (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SPECIFICATION SECTION)

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01310

PROJECT SCHEDULES, MEETINGS AND REPORTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01340 - Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.

1.02 PROJECT SCHEDULES

A. General: Develop and submit, for approval by WASD, a construction progress schedule and phasing plan demonstrating complete fulfillment of all contract requirements including all activities of subcontractors, equipment vendors and suppliers. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, the construction progress schedule shall be computer developed and maintained using Primavera software as manufactured by Primavera Systems, Inc., or approved equivalent. The Contractor shall prepare a network plan utilizing CPM (Critical Path Method).

B. Submittal: The progress schedule shall be plotted on 11 inch by 17 inch paper and shall be revised and updated every two weeks, depicting progress through the last day of the current month and scheduled progress through completion. Six up-to-date copies of the schedule shall be submitted along with the application for monthly progress payments for the same period.

1. Twenty-one calendar days after award or upon receipt of Notice to Proceed, whichever comes first, submit for review the progress schedule to the Engineer describing the activities to be accomplished and their dependency relationships, showing starting and completion dates for each activity in terms of the number of days after receipt of Notice to Proceed. All completion dates shown shall be within the period specified for contract completion.

2. After receipt by the Engineer and initial review, and within three days the Engineer will meet with the Contractor for joint review, correction or adjustment of the proposed plan and schedule. The Contractor shall revise the schedule in accordance with agreements reached during the joint review, using calendar dates. The Contractor shall submit six copies of the corrected schedule at the preconstruction meeting, discussion and approval of the schedule will take place at the meeting, the Engineer may require the schedule prior to the meeting.

C. Schedule Requirements

1. Show the sequence and interdependence of activities required for complete performance. In preparing the schedule, break up the work into activities of a duration of no longer than ten working days each, except as to non-construction activities (such as procurement of materials, delivery of

ER No. S049334 01310 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

equipment and concrete curing) and any other activities for which the Engineer may approve the showing of longer duration. The schedule shall show the activities for actual construction work for each trade category of the project. The Contractor is to include a schedule of submittals of Shop Drawings, equipment schedules, coordination drawings, templates, fabrication, delivery and the like, and review and approval of Shop Drawings. Activities related to a specific physical area of the project shall be grouped on the schedule for ease of understanding and simplification. Activity duration (i.e. the single best estimate, considering the scope of the activity, and the resources planned for the activity) shall be shown on each activity on the diagram. To the extent that the schedule or any revised schedule shows anything not jointly agreed upon or fails to show anything jointly agreed upon, it shall not be deemed to have been approved by the Engineer. Failure to include any element of work required for the performance of this Contract shall not excuse the Contractor from completing all Work required within any applicable completion date, notwithstanding WASD's approval of the schedule.

2. At the preconstruction meeting, the Contractor shall include a cost estimate for each activity which cumulatively equals the total Contract cost. Estimated mobilization, home office expense, extended overhead and profit shall be prorated throughout all activities. The partial payments as defined under the General Conditions will be based on these approved activity costs.

3. With each request for a partial payment, beginning with the first request submit a copy of the schedule marked to show the activities completed and partially completed, for which payment is requested, in order to receive monthly draws.

1.03 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. General progress meetings will be held once each week at which every entity then involved in the planning, coordination and performance of work shall be present. The progress of each element of current work shall be discussed as to whether it is ahead of schedule, on time or behind time in relation to the updated progress schedule. In addition to showing the progress schedule of the previous week for each meeting, the Contractor shall prepare a three week "look ahead" schedule in detail. Methods to expedite behind time work shall be determined and commitments secured from the entities involved for bringing the lagging activities back to the scheduled date. Everything of significance which could affect the progress of the work, including schedule revisions, shall be discussed to ensure that current and subsequent work will be completed within the Contract time. Within three days after each meeting, copies of the minutes of the meeting, including a brief summary of progress of the work since the previous meeting, shall be distributed by the Contractor to each of those present or who should have been present. Whenever revisions to the progress schedule have been made or recognized at the progress meeting, a copy of the revised schedule shall accompany the minutes distributed.

ER No. S049334 01310 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

B. Each computer generated construction progress schedule, and associated report shall include the following tabulations: a list of activities in numerical order, a list of activity precedence, schedules sequenced by Early Start Date, Total Float, and Late Start Date. Each schedule and report shall include the following minimum items:

1. Activity Numbers 2. Estimated Duration 3. Activity Description 4. Early Start Date (Calendar Dated) 5. Early Finish Date (Calendar Dated) 6. Latest Allowable Start Date (Calendar Dated) 7. Latest Allowable Finish Date (Calendar Dated) 8. Status (Whether Critical) 9. Total Float and Free Float

C. In addition, each construction progress schedule, network analysis and report shall be prefaced with the following summary data:

1. Contract Name and Number 2. Contractor's Name 3. Project Duration 4. Contract Schedule 5. The Effective or Starting Date of the Schedule (the Date Indicated in the

Notice to Proceed)

D. The work day to calendar date correlation shall be based on an 8 hour day and 40 hour week with adequate allowance for holidays, adverse weather and all other special requirements of the work. Normal work hours are Monday thru Friday, 9:00 pm to 7:00 am.

E. If the Contractor desires to make changes in his method of operating which affect the construction progress schedule and related items, he shall notify the Engineer in writing stating what changes are proposed and the reason for the change while maintaining all construction activities within the contract duration. If the Engineer accepts these changes, in writing, the Contractor shall revise and submit, without additional cost to WASD, all affected portions of the construction progress schedule, and associated reports. The construction progress schedule and related items shall be adjusted by the Contractor only after prior acceptance, in writing by the Engineer. Adjustments may consist of changing portions of the activity sequence, activity durations, division of activities, or other adjustments as may be required. The addition of extraneous, nonworking activities and activities which add restraints to the construction progress schedule will not be accepted.

F. Except where earlier completions are specified, schedule dates which show completion of all work prior to the contract completion date shall, in no event, be the basis for claim for delay against WASD by the Contractor.

ER No. S049334 01310 - 3 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

G. Construction progress schedules and related items which contain activities showing negative float or which extend beyond the contract completion date will not be accepted by the Engineer. Whenever it becomes apparent from the current construction progress schedule and associated reports that delays to the critical path have resulted and the contract completion date will not be met, or if the completion of any activity, whether or not critical, falls more than 100 percent behind its previously scheduled and accepted duration, or when so directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall take some or all of the following actions at no additional cost to WASD. He shall submit to the Engineer for approval, a written statement of the steps he intends to take to remove or arrest the delay in the current construction progress schedule.

1. Increase construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as will substantially eliminate the backlog of work.

2. Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per day, working days per week, the amount of construction equipment, or any combination of the foregoing, sufficiently to substantially eliminate the backlog of work.

3. Reschedule activities to achieve maximum practical concurrence of accomplishment of activities, and comply with the revised schedule.

I. If the Contractor fails to submit a written statement of the intended steps or fails to take such steps, as are reviewed and accepted in writing by the Engineer, the Engineer may direct the Contractor to increase the level of effort in manpower (trades), equipment and work schedule (overtime, weekend and holiday work, etc.) in order to remove or arrest the delay to the critical path in the current construction progress schedule. The Contractor shall promptly provide such increased level of effort at no additional cost to WASD.

J. Shop Drawings which are not approved on the first submittal or within the time scheduled, and equipment which does not pass the specified tests and certifications, shall be immediately rescheduled.

K. The Contract time will be adjusted only in accordance with the General Covenants and Conditions and other portions of the Contract Documents as may be applicable. If the Engineer finds that the Contractor is entitled to any extension of the Contract completion date, the Engineer's determination as to the total number of days extension will be based upon the current construction progress schedule and on all data relevant to the extension. Such data shall be included in the next updating of the schedule and related items. Actual delays in activities which, according to the construction progress schedule, do not affect any contract completion date will not be the basis for a change therein.

L. From time to time it may be necessary for the Contract schedule of completion time to be adjusted by WASD in accordance with the General Covenants and Conditions and other portions of the Contract Documents as may be applicable. Under such conditions, the Engineer will direct the Contractor to reschedule the work or Contract completion time to reflect the changed conditions, and the Contractor shall revise the construction progress schedule and related items accordingly, at no additional cost to WASD.

ER No. S049334 01310 - 4 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

M. Available float time may be used by WASD through the Engineer.

N. WASD controls the float time and, therefore, without obligation to extend either the overall completion date or any intermediate completion dates, only WASD may initiate changes that absorb float time. WASD initiated changes that affect the critical path on the network diagram shall be the sole grounds for extending the completion dates. Contractor initiated changes that encroach on the float time may be accomplished only with WASD's concurrence. Such changes, however, shall give way to WASD initiated changes competing for the same float time.

O. Review and approval of the construction progress schedule, and related reports, by the Engineer is advisory only and shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for accomplishing the work within the contract completion date. Omissions and errors in the construction progress schedule, and related reports shall not excuse performance less than that required by the Contract Documents and in no way make the Engineer an insurer of the Contractor's success or liable for time or cost overruns flowing from any shortcomings in the construction progress schedule, and related reports.

P. The Contractor shall present and discuss the proposed schedule at the preconstruction conference. This schedule shall have been previously reviewed and agreed to by the Engineer. See Section 01310, 1.02, B.

Q. The construction progress schedule shall be based upon the precedence diagramming method of scheduling and shall be prepared in the form of a horizontal bar chart showing in detail the proposed sequence of the work and identifying all construction activities. The schedule shall be time scaled, identifying the first day of each week, with the estimated date of starting and completion of each stage of the Work in order to complete the project within the Contract time. The project critical path shall be clearly identified.

1.04 DAILY REPORTS

A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer at weekly meetings a separate daily report recording information concerning events at the site. The daily reports shall contain the following and any other significant information:

1. General weather conditions, rain, high/low temperatures 2. List of subcontractors on site

ER No. S049334 01310 - 5 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

3. List of separate contractors at the site, if any 4. Meetings and significant decisions 5. Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses 6. Emergency procedures, field orders 7. Orders/requests by governing authorities 8. Other events or activities 9. Partial completions

PART 2 PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

NOT USED

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049334 01310 - 6 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

ER No. S049334 01311 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

SECTION 01311

PROJECT COORDINATION

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS

A. Informational: Statement of Qualification (SOQ) for land surveyor or civil engineer.

1.02 UTILITY NOTIFICATION AND COORDINATION

A. Sunshine State One Call (811) and the following companies should be notified two full days in advance of excavation in area:

1. FPL 2. AT&T//Distribution 3. WASD Public Works Department 4. Comcast 5. Florida City Gas 6. Homestead City Gas 7. MCI 8. XO Communications 9. FPL Fibernet 10. Global Crossing Telecommunications, Inc. 11. Fiberlight LLC 12. Level 3 Communication LLC 13. Qwest Communications 14. Coastal Fuels Marketing 15. Information technology 16. Buckeye Pipe Line

1.03 FACILITY OPERATIONS

A. Continuous operation of Owner’s facilities is of critical importance. Schedule and

conduct activities to enable existing facilities to operate continuously, unless otherwise specified.

B. Perform Work continuously during critical connections and changeovers, and as required to prevent interruption of Owner’s operations.

C. When necessary, plan, design, and provide various temporary services, utilities, connections, temporary piping and heating, access, and similar items to maintain continuous operations of Owner’s facility.

D. Do not close lines, open or close valves, or take other action which would affect the operation of existing systems, except as specifically required by the Contract

ER No. S049334 01311 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

Documents and after authorization by Owner and Engineer. Such authorization will be considered within 48 hours after receipt of Contractor’s written request.

E. Install and maintain bypass facilities and temporary connections required to keep Owner’s operations on line. Sequences other than those specified will be considered upon written request to Owner and Engineer, provided they afford equivalent continuity of operations.

F. Do not proceed with Work affecting a facility’s operation without obtaining Owner’s and Engineer’s advance approval of the need for and duration of such Work.

G. Relocation of Existing Facilities:

1. During construction, it is expected that minor relocations of Work will be necessary.

2. Provide complete relocation of existing structures and Underground Facilities, including piping, utilities, equipment, structures, electrical conduit wiring, electrical duct bank, and other necessary items.

3. Use only new materials for relocated facility. Match materials of existing facility, unless otherwise shown or specified.

4. Perform relocations to minimize downtime of existing facilities. 5. Install new portions of existing facilities in their relocated position prior to

removal of existing facilities, unless otherwise accepted by Engineer. 1.04 ADJACENT FACILITIES AND PROPERTIES

A. Examination:

1. After Effective Date of the Agreement and before Work at Site is started, Contractor, Engineer, and affected property owners and utility owners shall make a thorough examination of pre-existing conditions including existing buildings, structures, and other improvements in vicinity of Work, as applicable, which could be damaged by construction operations.

2. Periodic reexamination shall be jointly performed to include, but not limited to, cracks in structures, settlement, leakage, and similar conditions.

B. Documentation:

1. Record and submit documentation of observations made on examination inspections in accordance with Article Construction Photographs.

2. Upon receipt, Engineer will review, sign, and return one record copy of documentation to Contractor to be kept on file in field office.

3. Such documentation shall be used as indisputable evidence in ascertaining whether and to what extent damage occurred as a result of Contractor’s operations, and is for the protection of adjacent property owners, Contractor, and Owner.

ER No. S049334 01311 - 3 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

1.05 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. General:

1. Photographically document all phases of the Project including preconstruction, construction progress, and post-construction.

2. Engineer shall have right to select subject matter and vantage point from which photographs are to be taken.

3. Digital Images: No post-session electronic editing of images is allowed. Stored image shall be actual image as captured without cropping or other edits.

B. Preconstruction and Post-Construction:

1. After Effective Date of the Agreement and before Work at Site is started, and again upon issuance of Substantial Completion, take a minimum of 10 photographs at each full station, capturing a 360 degree view of the work area. Contractor shall take additional photographs of any structure within the general work limits.

2. Particular emphasis shall be directed to structures both inside and outside the Site.

3. Format: Digital, minimum resolution of 1832 by 3264 pixels and 24-bit, millions of color.

C. Construction Progress Photos:

1. Photographically demonstrate progress of construction, showing every aspect of Site and adjacent properties as well as interior and exterior of new or impacted structures.

2. Weekly: Take number photographs identified above where work has progressed using digital, minimum resolution of 1832 by 3264 pixels and 24-bit, millions of color.

D. Documentation:

1. Digital Images:

a. Electronic image shall have date taken embedded into image. b. Archive using a commercially available photo management

system that provides listing of photographs including date, keyword description, and direction of photograph.

c. Label file folders or database records with Project and Owner’s name, and month and year images were produced.

1.06 REFERENCE POINTS AND SURVEYS

A. Owner’s Responsibilities:

1. Establish bench marks convenient to Work and at least every 500 feet

ER No. S049334 01311 - 4 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

on pipelines and roads. 2. Establish horizontal reference points or coordinate system with bench

marks and reference points for Contractor’s use as necessary to lay out Work.

3. Establish centerlines of principal structures, roads, and pipelines. 4. Establish clearing limits, centerlines of roads and pipelines, set toe of

fill and top of cut stakes, and set bench marks convenient for use as necessary to establish basic layout of the Work.

5. For gravity pipelines or sewer lines over 500 feet in length, set offset stakes indicating cut-to-flow line at each manhole or alignment change, 25 feet each side of manhole or alignment change and at approximate 200 foot intervals along line.

6. For pressure pipelines over 500 feet in length, set offset stakes indicating locations of pipelines at approximate 200 foot intervals along line and indicate depth of cut when required.

7. Establish location at all poles and anchors. 8. Provide cut data sheets to Contractor.

B. Location and elevation of bench marks are shown on Drawings.

C. Contractor’s Responsibilities:

1. Provide additional survey and layout required to layout the Work. 2. Notify Engineer at least 3 working days in advance of time when grade

and line to be provided by Owner will be needed. 3. Check and establish exact location of existing facilities prior to

construction of new facilities and any connections thereto. 4. In event of discrepancy in data or staking provided by Owner, request

clarification before proceeding with Work. 5. Retain professional land surveyor or civil engineer registered in state of

Project who shall perform or supervise engineering surveying necessary for additional construction staking and layout.

6. Maintain complete accurate log of survey work as it progresses as a Record Document.

7. On request of Engineer, submit documentation. 8. Provide competent employee(s), tools, stakes, and other equipment

and materials as Engineer may require to:

a. Establish control points, lines, and easement boundaries. b. Check layout, survey, and measurement work performed by

others. c. Measure quantities for payment purposes.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SALVAGE OF MATERIALS

ER No. S049334 01311 - 5 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

A. Materials to be salvaged include: Plug Valves on existing 54-inch diameter FM.

B. Salvage materials for Owner’s use where shown.

1. Remove material with extreme care so as not to damage for future use. 3.02 CUTTING, FITTING, AND PATCHING

A. Restore existing work, Underground Facilities, and surfaces that are to remain

in completed Work including concrete-embedded piping, conduit, and other utilities as specified and as shown on Drawings.

B. Make restorations with new materials and appropriate methods as specified for

new Work of similar nature; if not specified, use recommended practice of manufacturer or appropriate trade association.

C. Remove specimens of installed Work for testing when requested by Engineer.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01340

SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Before proceeding with the erection of the construction plan, including the setting or placing thereof, and the erection of other temporary structures, the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with such information and plans as WASD may require.

B. Shop Drawings shall be submitted prior to any project construction activity. In a timely fashion, well before the contemplated ordering for fabrication of special or-der or long-lead items or construction use of any standard element of the work, the Contractor shall furnish Shop Drawings for the review and approval of WASD.

C. It is the Contractor's sole responsibility, upon the first occasion of submittal of a particular element of the work, to submit Shop Drawings of an element which match and fulfill the requirements and intent of the Plans and Specifications. Any delays or costs caused, either directly or indirectly, by non-timely submissions; submission of items differing significantly from the intent of the Plans and/or Speci-fications; repeated submission of, or argument over, rejected elements or changes required for acceptance; arguments with the criteria or requirements of the Plans or Specifications; or any other such similar activities shall be at the expense of the Contractor.

D. It is the intent of the Contract Documents that the Contractor shall, in the first in-stance, submit Shop Drawings of elements which meet or exceed the require-ments of the Contract Documents and fit with the other elements of the work and the existing conditions. Activities such as those mentioned in Article 1.01 C, which are inimical to this intent will not be tolerated and may, at the sole discretion of the Engineer, subject the Contractor to costs for any delays, costs, damages or penal-ties suffered by the WASD due to such activities to include but not be limited to; extra engineering and overhead costs together with any liquidated or actual dam-ages.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Submit to the Engineer for review and approval, Shop Drawings, test reports and data on materials, equipment, and material samples as required for the proper control of work, and as specified in the Specification sections. Shop Drawings shall be submitted for all materials and equipment to be furnished.

B. Within twenty calendar days after the effective date of the Contract, submit to the Engineer a complete list of preliminary data on items for which Shop Drawings are to be submitted. Included in this list shall be the names of all proposed manufac-turers furnishing specified items. Review of this list by the Engineer shall in no way expressed or implied relieve the Contractor from submitting complete Shop

ER No. S049334 01340 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

Drawings and providing materials, equipment, etc., fully in accordance with the Specifications. This procedure is required in order to expedite final review of Shop Drawings.

C. Maintain an accurate updated Shop Drawing submittal log which shall include the following items:

1. Submittal Description and Number Assigned 2. Specification Section 3. Plans Sheet Number 4. Date to Engineer 5. Date Returned to Contractor (from Engineer) 6. Status of Submittal (Approved, Approved as Noted, Rejected/Resubmit) 7. Date of Resubmittal and Return (as Applicable) 8. Date Material Release (for Fabrication) 9. Projected Date of Fabrication 10. Projected Date of Delivery to Site 11. Status of O & M Manuals Submittal

1.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY

A. Furnish the Engineer with a schedule of Shop Drawings submittals, fixing the re-spective dates for the submission of Shop Drawings, the beginning of manufac-ture, testing and installation of materials, supplies and equipment. This schedule shall indicate those that are critical to the progress schedule.

B. Submit to the Engineer all plans and schedules sufficiently in advance of construc-tion requirements to provide maximum time for checking and appropriate action from the time the Engineer receive them.

C. It is the duty of the Contractor to check and approve all plans, data and samples prepared by or for him before submitting them to the Engineer for review. Each and every copy of the Plans and data shall bear Contractor's stamp showing that they have been checked and approved. Shop Drawings submitted to the Engineer without the Contractor's stamp and approval shall be returned to the Contractor for conformance with this requirement before Engineer's review. Shop Drawings shall indicate any deviations in the submittal from requirements of the Pro-ject Documents and the Contractor shall state the reason why a deviation is required.

D. All submittals shall be accompanied by a transmittal letter prepared in duplicate

containing the following information:

1. Date 2. Project Title and Number 3. Contractor's name and address 4. The number of each Shop Drawing, Data, and Sample submitted 5. Notification of Deviations from Project Documents 6. Submittal Log Number conforming to and referring to Specification Section

ER No. S049334 01340 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

Numbers

E. Submit seven copies of Shop Drawings and of descriptive or product data submit-tals necessary to complement Shop Drawing. The Engineer will retain five sets.

F. After receiving approval by the Engineer, the Contractor shall be responsible for submitting the Shop Drawings to the Building Department. Shop Drawings of all premanufactured items and all other Shop Drawings are required to obtain ap-proval prior to manufacturing or installing the submitted items. The Contractor shall also be responsible for contesting any interpretations by the Building De-partment that WASD considers non-acceptable. The Contractor shall include in the bid prices, all costs for permits, fees and expenses associated with the submit-tals, including resubmittals (if any) of Shop Drawings to the Building Department. The Building Department as used in this paragraph shall be taken to mean the Mi-ami-Dade County Building Department and/or other governing building authority appropriate to this project.

G. Do not begin any of the work covered by a drawing, data, or a sample returned as “Rejected/Resubmit” until a revision or correction thereof has been reviewed and returned to the Contractor, by the Engineer, with approval or approval “As Noted”. Be responsible for and bear all costs of damages which may result from the order-ing of any material or from proceeding with any part of work prior to receiving En-gineer's approval or approval “As Noted” of the necessary Shop Drawings.

H. Be fully responsible for observing the need for and for making any changes in the arrangement of piping, connections, wiring, manner of installation, etc., which may be required by the materials/equipment the Contractor proposes to supply, both as they pertain to the Contractor’s own work, work of others, or of other Divisions herein or Trades and clearly show such changes on the Shop Drawings.

I. When substitutions in materials or equipment are allowed, the Contractor shall make all necessary changes in adjacent or connected structures and equipment at his expense. Where contemplated changes, substitutions or appurtenant work re-quire engineering design, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor shall have such design services performed at his expense. Said engineering design services shall be of an extent satisfactory to the Engineer whose word shall be final and shall be performed by a Registered Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the State of Florida.

J. When substitutions in materials or equipment are allowed, the Contractor shall be

solely responsible for all costs and time required by any differences in construction methods, fabrication or assembly required and no additional time will be allowed.

K. The Miami-Dade Building Department requires that any changes made during construction which result in differences between the as constructed arrange-ment/elements and the arrangement/elements shown on the permitted plans be reconciled by re-permitting of the plan sheet or sheets affected by the construction changes prior to inspection. Thus, the plan sheet or sheets must be redrawn to re-flect the construction change, signed, sealed, dated and re-submitted by the Engi-

ER No. S049334 01340 - 3 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

neer of Record for re-permitting.

L. When a construction change, initiated by the Contractor or resulting from a change made by the Contractor, requires re-permitting as discussed in the preceding par-agraph, the Contractor shall be responsible for all labor, material and equipment required to redraw the Plan sheet or sheets affected by the change to the satisfac-tion of the Engineer of Record and WASD. The costs for all work of this sort and all costs of re-permitting shall be borne by the Contractor and no extra compensa-tion will be allowed.

M. Determine and verify:

1. Field measurements 2. Field construction criteria 3. Catalog numbers and similar data 4. Conformance with specifications 5. That installation and maintenance clearances are sufficient particularly when

equipment or arrangement changes have been made

1.04 ENGINEER’S REVIEW OF SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Engineer’s review of plans, data and samples, submitted by the Contractor will cover only general conformity to the Drawing and Specifications. The Engineer's review will not constitute an approval of dimensions, quantities, and details of the material, equipment, device, or item shown. The review of plans and schedules will be general, and shall not be construed:

1. As permitting any departure from the Contract requirements 2. As relieving the Contractor of responsibility for any errors, including detail,

dimensions, and materials 3. As approving departures from details furnished by the Engineer, except as

otherwise provided herein

B. Variations

1. If the plans or schedules, as submitted, describe variations per paragraph 1.03 C, and show a departure from the Contract requirements which Engi-neer finds to be in the interest of WASD and to be so minor as not to involve a change in Contract price or time for performance, the Engineer may return the reviewed plans without noting an exception.

2. If the plans or schedules, as submitted, describe variations and show a de-parture from the Contract requirements which the Engineer finds to be minor enough to be corrected by redlining the submittal, the engineer will mark and return the submittal marked "Approved as Noted." The redlined corrections shall be as binding on the Contractor as would be a resubmission embody-ing the same corrections.

C. When reviewed by the Engineer, each of the Shop Drawings shall be stamped and dated to indicate it had been reviewed. Shop Drawings stamped "Revise and Re-

ER No. S049334 01340 - 4 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

submit" and with required corrections shown will be returned to the Contractor for correction and resubmittal.

D. Resubmittals will be handled in the same manner as first submittals. On resubmit-tals the Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, to revisions and corrections required by the Engineer on previous sub-missions. The Contractor shall make any corrections required by the Engineer.

E. If the Contractor considers any correction indicated on the Shop Drawings to con-stitute a change to the Project Plans or Specifications, the Contractor shall give written notice thereof to the Engineer who will render a decision which shall be fi-nal. After the decision has been made, the Contractor shall without delay, provide the corrections to the plans.

F. When the Shop Drawings have been approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out the construction in accordance therewith and shall make no further changes therein except upon written instructions from the Engineer.

G. No partial submittals will be reviewed. Submittals not complete will be returned to the Contractor for resubmittal. Unless otherwise specifically permitted by the En-gineer, all submittals shall be made in groups containing all associated items for systems, processes or as indicated in specific specifications sections. All plans, schematics, manufacturer's product data, certifications and other Shop Drawing submittals required by a system specification shall be submitted at one time as a package to facilitate interface checking.

1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. When used in the Project Documents, the term "Shop Drawings" shall be consid-ered to mean Contractor's plans for materials and equipment which become an in-tegral part of the Project. These Shop Drawings shall be complete and detailed. Shop Drawings shall consist of fabrication, erection and setting drawings and schedule drawings, manufacturer's scale drawings, and wiring and control dia-grams. Cuts, catalogs, pamphlets, descriptive literature, and performance/test da-ta shall be considered only as supportive to required Shop Drawings as defined above.

B. Manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, illustrations and other stand-ard descriptive data shall be clearly marked to identify pertinent materials, product or models. Information which is not applicable to the Work shall be deleted by striking or cross hatching.

C. Each Shop Drawing shall have a blank area 3½ inches by 3½ inches, located ad-jacent to the title block. The title block shall display the following:

1. Project Title and Number 2. Name of Project Building or Structure 3. Number and Title of the Shop Drawing 4. Date of Shop Drawing or Revision

ER No. S049334 01340 - 5 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

5. Name of Contractor and Subcontractor Submitting Drawing 6. Supplier/Manufacturer 7. Separate Detailer when Pertinent 8. Specification Title and Number 9. Specification Section 10. Application Project Drawing Number

D. If plans show variations from Contract requirements because of standard shop practice or for other reasons, describe such variations in the letter of transmittal. If no explanation of these variations is provided, the Contractor shall not be relieved of the responsibility for executing the work in accordance with the Contract, even though such plans have been reviewed and approved.

E. For all mechanical and electrical equipment furnished, provide a list including the equipment name, address of and telephone number of the manufacturer's repre-sentative and service company so that service and/or spare parts can be readily obtained.

F. All manufacturers or equipment suppliers who propose to furnish equipment or products shall submit an installation list to the Engineer along with the required Shop Drawings. The installation list shall include at least five installations where identical equipment has been installed and has been in operation for a period of at least five years, unless otherwise specified. Manufacturers and/or equipment which fails to meet the specified experience period will be considered if the manu-facturer or supplier provides a bond or cash deposit which will guarantee replace-ment of the equipment or process in the event of failure or unsatisfactory service.

G. Only the Engineer will utilize the color "red" in marking Shop Drawing submittals.

1.06 REQUIRED INFORMATION

A. Submit, as applicable, the following for all prefabricated or manufactured structur-al, mechanical, electrical, plumbing, process system, and equipment work:

1. Shop Drawings or equipment drawings, including dimensions, size and loca-tion of connections to other work, and weight of equipment

2. Catalog information and cuts 3. Installation or placing plans for equipment, drives, and bases 4. Supporting calculations, signed and sealed by a Florida Registered Engineer

when required, for equipment and associated supports, or hangers required or specified to be designed by equipment manufacturers

5. Signed and sealed calculations and plans by in-house Florida Registered Professional Engineer for structural systems, indicating compliance to the structural design criteria specified in the Plans

6. Complete manufacturer's specifications, including materials description and paint system

7. Performance data and pump curves 8. Suggested spare parts with current price information 9. List of special tools required for testing, checking, parts replacement, and

ER No. S049334 01340 - 6 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

maintenance. (Special tools are those which have been specially designed or adapted for use on parts of the equipment, and are not customarily and routinely carried by maintenance mechanics)

10. List of special tools furnished with the equipment 11. List of materials and supplies required for the equipment prior to, and during

startup 12. List of materials or supplies furnished with the equipment 13. Special handling instructions 14. Requirements for storage and protection prior to installation 15. Requirements for routine maintenance required prior to equipment startup 16. List of all requested exceptions to the Project Documents

1.07 SUBMITTAL REQUIRED FOR FOREIGN MANUFACTURED ITEMS

A. In addition to the submittal requirements stated above, suppliers of foreign manu-factured items shall submit the names and addresses of companies within the United States that maintain technical service representatives and a complete in-ventory of spare parts and accessories for each foreign-made item proposed for incorporation into the Work. Failure to prove these capabilities shall be cause for rejection of the foreign manufactured items.

B. Foreign manufactured equipment and materials shall in all cases be clearly and permanently marked with the manufacturer’s name and country of origin of the item. The name of the U.S. importing/supplying firm is not acceptable. Shop Drawing submittals of foreign-made items shall be accompanied by written infor-mation to include name and location (i.e. country, City, and street address) of the manufacturer. This requirement shall also apply to the foreign made elements of items assembled in this country from parts wholly or partially manufactured over-seas.

1. The words, “Permanently Marked” as used in this paragraph shall mean; die stamped, cast-in, welded, or otherwise marked such that the removal of the marking by any mechanical or chemical means will result in obvious perma-nent damage to the surface marked. These markings shall be on surfaces which are not hidden by assembly.

C. Where specified elsewhere herein or at the sole discretion of the Engineer, whose word shall be final, supply verification of quality, suitability or other aspects, as di-rected by the Engineer, from a Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the State of Florida or the state where the supplying U.S. firm is located. The verifica-tion shall be signed, sealed, and dated. All costs for this verification shall be at the sole expense of the Contractor and no extra compensation will be allowed. Verifi-cation by foreign-based engineers, firms, manufacturers, etc. will not be accepta-ble. Verification by means of a very stringent foreign testing agency/standard (for example ISO 9000 series) may be acceptable. However, this shall again be at the sole discretion of the Engineer and the full burden of proof and satisfaction of WASD shall rest with the Contractor. No extra time will be permitted due to the requirement for verification and the Contractor has the sole responsibility to make his submittals with all necessary information in a timely fashion.

ER No. S049334 01340 - 7 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

D. Items which are fabricated (i.e. assembled in this country from partially or wholly foreign manufactured parts) may also be required to have verification of their for-eign made elements as specified for wholly foreign made items in the preceding paragraph.

E. Any items in contact with or being added to potable water shall conform with NSF/ANSI 61 or 60, as appropriate.

1.08 SAMPLES

A. Furnish for the approval of the Engineer, samples required by the Project Docu-ments or required by the Engineer. Samples shall be delivered to the Engineer as specified or directed. The Contractor shall prepay all shipping charges on sam-ples. Materials or equipment for which samples are required shall not be used in work until approved by the Engineer.

B. Samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate:

1. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and at-tachment devices

2. Full range of color, texture and pattern 3. A minimum of two samples of each Item shall be submitted

C. Each sample shall have a label indicating:

1. Name of Project 2. Material or Equipment Represented 3. Name of Producer and Brand (if any) 4. Location in Project

D. Prepare a transmittal letter in triplicate for each shipment of samples containing the information specified herein in Paragraph 1.06 A. Enclose a copy of this letter with the shipment and send a copy of this letter to the Engineer. Approval of a sample shall be only for the characteristics or use specified and shall not be con-strued to change or modify any Contract requirements.

E. Approved samples of the hardware in good condition will be marked for identifica-tion and may be used in the work. Materials and equipment incorporated in work shall match the approved samples. Samples which failed testing or were not ap-proved shall be returned to the Contractor at his expense, if so requested at time of submission.

1.09 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by the Contract Documents, which are proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract, are considered to be requests for substitutions. Where the Plans and/or Specifications designate the products of a particular manufacturer, the product specified has been found suitable for the intended use. Articles or prod-

ER No. S049334 01340 - 8 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

ucts of similar characteristics may be offered for the approval of the Engineer, whose decision shall be final. Copies of complete descriptive data shall be fur-nished regarding all materials furnished by the Contractor, consisting of Dimension drawings, catalog references, product data, cost, and other information necessary to clearly identify and evaluate each article. When substitutions are permitted, the Contractor shall make all necessary changes in adjacent, connected, or other structures and equipment at his expense.

B. Where engineer-recommended changes, substitutions or appurtenant work require engineering design, the Contractor shall have such design services performed. Those engineering design services shall be of an extent satisfactory to the Engi-neer, whose decision shall be final. Engineering services for engineer-recommended changes, substitutions or appurtenant work, shall be performed by a Registered Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the State of Florida.

C Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer in writing, no additional contract time will be allowed, and a decrease in time may be appropriate.

PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

NOT USED

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049334 01340 - 9 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

 

ER No. S049334  01451 ‐ 1  PCTS No. 12348 

S‐902 

SECTION 01451

CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES

A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section:

1. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. D3740, Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction.

b. E329, Use in the Evaluation of Testing and Inspection Agencies as Used in Construction.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Contractor Quality Control (CQC): The means by which Contractor ensures that the construction, to include that performed by subcontractors and suppliers, complies with the requirements of the Contract.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Informational Submittals:

1. CQC Plan: Submit, not later than 30 days after receipt of Notice to Proceed.

2. CQC Report: Submit, weekly, an original and one copy in report form. 1.04 OWNER’S QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. All Work is subject to Owner’s quality assurance inspection and testing at all locations and at all reasonable times before acceptance to ensure strict compliance with the terms of the Contract Documents.

B. Owner’s quality assurance inspections and tests are for the sole benefit of Owner

and do not:

1. Relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures;

2. Relieve Contractor of responsibility for damage to or loss of the material before acceptance;

3. Constitute or imply acceptance; or 4. Affect the continuing rights of Owner after acceptance of the completed

Work.

650095B.GN1

 

ER No. S049334  01451 ‐ 2  PCTS No. 12348 

S‐902 

C. The presence or absence of a quality assurance inspector does not relieve Contractor from any Contract requirement.

D. Promptly furnish all facilities, labor, and material reasonably needed for performing

such safe and convenient inspections and tests as may be required by Engineer.

E. Owner may charge Contractor for any additional cost of inspection or test when Work is not ready at the time specified by Contractor for inspection or test, or when prior rejection makes re-inspection or retest necessary. Quality assurance inspections and tests will be performed in a manner that will not unnecessarily delay the Work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Maintain an adequate inspection system and perform such inspections as will ensure that the Work conforms to the Contract Documents.

B. Maintain complete inspection records and make them available at all times to

Owner and Engineer.

C. The quality control system shall consist of plans, procedures, and organization necessary to produce an end product that complies with the Contract Documents. The system shall cover all construction and demolition operations, both onsite and offsite, including Work by subcontractors, fabricators, suppliers and purchasing agents, and shall be keyed to the proposed construction sequence.

3.02 COORDINATION MEETING

A. After the Preconstruction Conference, but before start of construction, and prior to acceptance of the CQC Plan, schedule a meeting with Engineer and Owner to discuss the quality control system.

B. Develop a mutual understanding of the system details, including the forms for

recording the CQC operations, control activities, testing, administration of the system for both onsite and offsite Work, and the interrelationship of Contractor’s management and control with the Owner’s Quality Assurance.

C. There may be occasions when subsequent conferences may be called by either

party to reconfirm mutual understandings and/or address deficiencies in the CQC system or procedures that may require corrective action by Contractor.

3.03 QUALITY CONTROL ORGANIZATION

A. CQC System Manager:

1. Designate an individual within Contractor’s organization who will be

 

ER No. S049334  01451 ‐ 3  PCTS No. 12348 

S‐902 

responsible for overall management of CQC and have the authority to act in CQC matters for the Contractor.

2. CQC System Manager may perform other duties on the Project. 3. CQC System Manager shall be an experienced construction person, with a

minimum of 3 years construction experience on similar type Work. 4. CQC System Manager shall report to the Contractor’s project manager or

someone higher in the organization. Project manager in this context shall mean the individual with responsibility for the overall quality and production management of the Project.

5. CQC System Manager shall be onsite during construction; periods of absence may not exceed 2 weeks at any one time.

6. Identify an alternate for CQC System Manager to serve with full authority during the System Manager’s absence. The requirements for the alternate will be the same as for designated CQC System Manager.

B. CQC Staff:

1. Designate a CQC staff, available at the Site at all times during progress,

with complete authority to take any action necessary to ensure compliance with the Contract. CQC staff members shall be subject to acceptance by Engineer.

2. CQC staff shall take direction from CQC System Manager in matters pertaining to QC.

3. CQC staff must be of sufficient size to ensure adequate QC coverage of Work phases, work shifts, and work crews involved in the construction. These personnel may perform other duties, but must be fully qualified by experience and technical training to perform their assigned QC responsibilities and must be allowed sufficient time to carry out these responsibilities.

4. The actual strength of the CQC staff may vary during any specific Work period to cover the needs of the Project. Add additional staff when necessary for a proper CQC organization.

B. Organizational Changes: Obtain Engineer’s acceptance before replacing any

member of the CQC staff. Requests for changes shall include name, qualifications, duties, and responsibilities of the proposed replacement.

3.04 QUALITY CONTROL PHASING

A. CQC shall include at least three phases of control to be conducted by CQC System Manager for all definable features of Work, as follows:

1. Preparatory Phase:

a. Notify Owner at least 48 hours in advance of beginning any of the required action of the preparatory phase.

b. This phase shall include a meeting conducted by the CQC System Manager and attended by the superintendent, other CQC personnel (as applicable), and the foreman responsible for the definable feature. The CQC System Manager shall instruct applicable CQC staff as to the

650095B.GN1

 

ER No. S049334  01451 ‐ 4  PCTS No. 12348 

S‐902 

acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet Contract requirements.

c. Document the results of the preparatory phase meeting by separate minutes prepared by the CQC System Manager and attached to the QC report.

d. Perform prior to beginning Work on each definable feature of Work:

1) Review applicable Contract Specifications. 2) Review applicable Contract Drawings. 3) Verify that all materials and/or equipment have been tested,

submitted, and approved. 4) Verify that provisions have been made to provide required

control inspection and testing. 5) Examine the Work area to verify that all required preliminary Work

has been completed and is in compliance with the Contract. 6) Perform a physical examination of required materials,

equipment, and sample Work to verify that they are on hand, conform to approved Shop Drawing or submitted data, and are properly stored.

7) Review the appropriate activity hazard analysis to verify safety requirements are met.

8) Review procedures for constructing the Work, including repetitive deficiencies.

9) Document construction tolerances and workmanship standards for that phase of the Work.

10) Check to verify that the plan for the Work to be performed, if so required, has been accepted by Engineer.

2. Initial Phase:

a. Accomplish at the beginning of a definable feature of Work:

1) Notify Owner at least 48 hours in advance of beginning the initial phase.

2) Perform prior to beginning Work on each definable feature of Work:

a) Review minutes of the preparatory meeting. b) Check preliminary Work to verify compliance with Contract

requirements. c) Verify required control inspection and testing. d) Establish level of workmanship and verify that it meets

minimum acceptable workmanship standards. Comparison with sample panels is appropriate.

e) Resolve all differences. f) Check safety to include compliance with and upgrading

of the safety plan and activity hazard analysis. Review the activity analysis with each worker.

3) Separate minutes of this phase shall be prepared by the CQC System

 

ER No. S049334  01451 ‐ 5  PCTS No. 12348 

S‐902 

Manager and attached to the QC report. Exact location of initial phase shall be indicated for future reference and comparison with follow-up phases.

4) The initial phase should be repeated for each new crew to work onsite, or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not being met.

3. Follow-up Phase:

a. Perform daily checks to verify continuing compliance with Contract requirements, including control testing, until completion of the particular feature of Work.

b. Daily checks shall be made a matter of record in the CQC documentation and shall document specific results of inspections for all features of Work for the day or shift.

c. Conduct final follow-up checks and correct all deficiencies prior to the start of additional features of Work that will be affected by the deficient Work. Constructing upon or concealing nonconforming Work will not be allowed.

4. Additional Preparatory and Initial Phases: Additional preparatory and initial phases may be conducted on the same definable features of Work as determined by Owner if the quality of ongoing Work is unacceptable; or if there are changes in the applicable QC staff or in the onsite production supervision or work crew; or if work on a definable feature is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity, or if other problems develop.

3.05 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PLAN

A. General:

1. Plan shall identify personnel, procedures, control, instructions, test, records, and forms to be used.

2. An interim plan for the first 30 days of operation will be considered. 3. Construction will be permitted to begin only after acceptance of the CQC

Plan or acceptance of an interim plan applicable to the particular feature of Work to be started.

4. Work outside of the features of Work included in an accepted interim plan will not be permitted to begin until acceptance of a CQC Plan or another interim plan containing the additional features of Work to be started.

B. Content:

1. Plan shall cover the intended CQC organization for the entire Contract

and shall include the following, as a minimum:

a. Organization: Description of the quality control organization, including a chart showing lines of authority and acknowledgment that the CQC staff will implement the three-phase control system (see Paragraph QC Phasing) for all aspects of the Work specified.

650095B.GN1

 

ER No. S049334  01451 ‐ 6  PCTS No. 12348 

S‐902 

b. CQC Staff: The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of each person assigned a QC function.

c. Letters of Authority: A copy of a letter to the CQC System Manager signed by an authorized official of the firm, describing the responsibilities and delegating sufficient authorities to adequately perform the functions of the CQC System Manager, including authority to stop Work which is not in compliance with the Contract. The CQC System Manager shall issue letters of direction to all other various quality control representatives outlining duties, authorities and responsibilities. Copies of these letters will also be furnished to Owner.

d. Submittals: Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing submittals, including those of subcontractors, offsite fabricators, suppliers and purchasing agents.

e. Testing: Control, verification and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test to include the test name, frequency, specification paragraph containing the test requirements, the personnel and laboratory responsible for each type of test, and an estimate of the number of tests required.

f. Procedures for tracking preparatory, initial, and follow-up control phases and control, verification, and acceptance tests, including documentation.

g. Procedures for tracking deficiencies from identification through acceptable corrective action. These procedures will establish verification that identified deficiencies have been corrected.

h. Reporting procedures, including proposed reporting formats; include a copy of the CQC report form.

C. Acceptance of Plans: Acceptance of the Contractor’s basic and addendum CQC

plans is required prior to the start of construction. Acceptance is conditional and will be predicated on satisfactory performance during the construction. Owner reserves the right to require Contractor to make changes in the CQC plan and operations including removal of personnel, as necessary, to obtain the quality specified.

D. Notification of Changes: After acceptance of the CQC plan, Contractor shall notify

Engineer, in writing, a minimum of 7 calendar days prior to any proposed change. Proposed changes are subject to acceptance by Engineer.

3.06 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL REPORT

A. As a minimum, prepare a CQC report for every 7 calendar days. Account for all days throughout the life of the Contract. Reports shall be signed and dated by CQC System Manager. Include copies of test reports and copies of reports prepared by QC staff.

B. Maintain current records of quality control operations, activities, and tests

performed, including the Work of subcontractors and suppliers.

 

ER No. S049334  01451 ‐ 7  PCTS No. 12348 

S‐902 

C. Records shall be on an acceptable form and shall be a complete description of inspections, the results of inspections, daily activities, tests, and other items, including but not limited to the following:

1. Contractor/subcontractor and their areas of responsibility. 2. Operating plant/equipment with hours worked, idle, or down for repair. 3. Work performed today, giving location, description, and by whom.

When a network schedule is used, identify each phase of Work performed each day by activity number.

4. Test and/or control activities performed with results and references to specifications/plan requirements. The control phase should be identified (Preparatory, Initial, Follow-up). List deficiencies noted along with corrective action.

5. Material received with statement as to its acceptability and storage. 6. Identify submittals reviewed, with Contract reference, by whom, and

action taken. 7. Offsite surveillance activities, including actions taken. 8. Job safety evaluations stating what was checked, results, and

instructions or corrective actions.

9. List instructions given/received and conflicts in Drawings and/or Specifications.

10. Contractor’s verification statement. 11. Indicate a description of trades working on the Project; the number of

personnel working; weather conditions encountered; and any delays encountered.

12. These records shall cover both conforming and deficient features and shall include a statement that equipment and materials incorporated in file work and workmanship comply with the Contract.

3.07 SUBMITTAL QUALITY CONTROL

A. Submittals shall be as specified in Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures. The CQC organization shall be responsible for certifying that all submittals are in compliance with the Contract requirements. Owner will furnish copies of test report forms upon request by Contractor. Contractor may use other forms as approved.

3.08 TESTING QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Procedure:

1. Perform tests specified or required to verify that control measures are adequate to provide a product which conforms to Contract requirements. Procure services of a licensed testing laboratory. Perform the following activities and record the following data:

a. Verify testing procedures comply with contract requirements. b. Verify facilities and testing equipment are available and comply with

testing standards. c. Check test instrument calibration data against certified standards. d. Verify recording forms and test identification control number system,

650095B.GN1

 

ER No. S049334  01451 ‐ 8  PCTS No. 12348 

S‐902 

including all of the test documentation requirements, have been prepared.

e. Documentation:

1) Record results of all tests taken, both passing and failing, on the CQC report for the date taken.

2) Include specification paragraph reference, location where tests were taken, and the sequential control number identifying the test.

3) Actual test reports may be submitted later, if approved by Engineer, with a reference to the test number and date taken.

4) Provide directly to Engineer an information copy of tests performed by an offsite or commercial test facility. Test results shall be signed by an engineer registered in the state where the tests are performed.

5) Failure to submit timely test reports, as stated, may result in nonpayment for related Work performed and disapproval of the test facility for this Contract.

B. Testing Laboratories: Laboratory facilities, including personnel and equipment,

utilized for testing soils, concrete, asphalt and steel shall meet criteria detailed in ASTM D3740 and ASTM E329, and be accredited by the American Association of Laboratory Accreditation (AALA), National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), or other approved national accreditation authority. Personnel performing concrete testing shall be certified by the American Concrete Institute (ACI).

3.09 COMPLETION INSPECTION

A. CQC System Manager shall conduct an inspection of the Work at the completion of all Work or any milestone established by a completion time stated in the Contract.

B. Punchlist:

1. CQC System Manager shall develop a punchlist of items which do not

conform to the Contract requirements. 2. Include punchlist in the CQC report, indicating the estimated date by

which the deficiencies will be corrected. 3. CQC System Manager or staff shall make a second inspection to

ascertain that all deficiencies have been corrected and so notify the Owner.

4. These inspections and any deficiency corrections required will be accomplished within the time stated for completion of the entire Work or any particular increment thereof if the Project is divided into increments by separate completion dates.

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049334 01560 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

SECTION 01560

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AND SPECIAL CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Minimizing the pollution of air, water, or land; control of noise, the

disposal of solid waste materials, and protection of deposits of historical or archaeological interest.

B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Front Ends Documents. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 01340 for requirements for the mechanics

and administration of the submittal process. 2. Prior to the start of any construction activities submit:

a. A detailed proposal of all methods of control and preventive measures to be utilized for environmental protection.

b. A drawing of the work area, haul routes, storage areas, access routes and current land conditions including trees and vegetation.

c. A copy of the NPDES permit for storm water discharges from construction activities.

d. A copy of the approved pollution prevention plan.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS – (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SPECIFICATION SECTION)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Employ and utilize environmental protection methods, obtain all necessary permits, and fully observe all local, state, and federal regulations including {_____}.

B. Land Protection: 1. Except for any work or storage area and access routes specifically

assigned for the use of the Contractor, the land areas outside the limits of construction shall be preserved in their present condition. a. Contractor shall confine his construction activities to areas defined

for work within the Contract Documents. 2. Manage and control all borrow areas, work or storage areas, access

routes and embankments to prevent sediment from entering nearby water or land adjacent to the work site.

3. Restore all disturbed areas including borrow and haul areas and establish permanent type of locally adaptable vegetative cover.

ER No. S049334 01560 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

4. Unless earthwork is immediately paved or surfaced, protect all side slopes and backslopes immediately upon completion of final grading.

5. Plan and execute earthwork in a manner to minimize duration of exposure of unprotected soils.

6. Except for areas designated by the Contract Documents to be cleared and grubbed, the Contractor shall not deface, injure or destroy trees and vegetation, nor remove, cut, or disturb them without approval of the Engineer. a. Any damage caused by the Contractor's equipment or operations

shall be restored as nearly as possible to its original condition at the Contractor's expense.

C. Surface Water Protection: 1. Utilize, as necessary, erosion control methods to protect side and

backslopes, minimize and the discharge of sediment to the surface water leaving the construction site as soon as rough grading is complete. a. These controls shall be maintained until the site is ready for final

grading and landscaping or until they are no longer warranted and concurrence is received from the Engineer.

b. Physically retard the rate and volume of run-on and runoff by: 1) Implementing structural practices such as diversion swales,

terraces, straw bales, silt fences, berms, storm drain inlet protection, rocked outlet protection, sediment traps and temporary basins.

2) Implementing vegetative practices such as temporary seeding, permanent seeding, mulching, sod stabilization, vegetative buffers, hydroseeding, anchored erosion control blankets, sodding, vegetated swales or a combination of these methods.

3) Providing Construction sites with graveled or rocked access entrance and exit drives and parking areas to reduce the tracking of sediment onto public or private roads.

2. Discharges from the construction site shall not contain pollutants at concentrations that produce objectionable films, colors, turbidity, deposits or noxious odors in the receiving stream or waterway.

D. Solid Waste Disposal: 1. Collect solid waste on a daily basis. 2. Provide disposal of degradable solid waste to an approved solid

waste disposal site. 3. Provide disposal of nondegradable solid waste to an approved solid

waste disposal site or in an alternate manner approved by Engineer and regulatory agencies.

4. No building materials wastes or unused building materials shall be buried, dumped, or disposed of on the site.

E. Fuel and Chemical Handling: 1. Store and dispose of chemical wastes in a manner approved by

regulatory agencies. 2. Take special measures to prevent chemicals, fuels, oils, greases,

herbicides, and insecticides from entering drainage ways.

ER No. S049334 01560 - 3 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

3. Do not allow water used in onsite material processing, concrete curing, cleanup, and other waste waters to enter a drainage way(s) or stream.

4. The Contractor shall provide containment around fueling and chemical storage areas to ensure that spills in these areas do not reach waters of the state.

F. Control of Dust: 1. The control of dust shall mean that no construction activity shall take

place without applying all such reasonable measures as may be required to prevent particulate matter from becoming airborne so that it remains visible beyond the limits of construction. a. Reasonable measures may include paving, frequent road

cleaning, planting vegetative groundcover, application of water or application of chemical dust suppressants.

b. The use of chemical agents such as calcium chloride must be approved by the State of Florida DOT.

2. Utilize methods and practices of construction to eliminate dust in full observance of agency regulations.

3. The Engineer will determine the effectiveness of the dust control program and may request the Contractor to provide additional measures, at no additional cost to Owner.

G. Burning: 1. Do not burn material on the site. 2. If the Contractor elects to dispose of waste materials by burning,

make arrangements for an off-site burning area and conform to all agency regulations.

H. Control of Noise: 1. Control noise by fitting equipment with appropriate mufflers.

I. Completion of Work: 1. Upon completion of work, leave area in a clean, natural looking

condition. 2. Ensure all signs of temporary construction and activities incidental to

construction of required permanent work are removed.

J. Historical Protection: 1. If during the course of construction, evidence of deposits of historical

or archaeological interests is found, cease work affecting find and notify Engineer. a. Do not disturb deposits until written notice from Engineer is given

to proceed. 2. The Contractor will be compensated for lost time or changes in

construction to avoid the find based upon normal change order procedures.

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049334 01600 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

SECTION 01600

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SHIPMENT, HANDLING, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. This shall include both Department and Contractor supplied material and equipment.

B. The Contractor is to inform all subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers of the requirements herein specified and shall include expenses for the following services in his costs for compliance with the requirements herein after specified.

1.02 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT

A. When practical, equipment shall be factory assembled. The equipment parts and assemblies that are shipped unassembled shall be furnished with assembly plan and instructions. The separate parts and assemblies shall be factory match-marked or tagged in a manner to facilitate assembly. All assemblies are to be made by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Department.

B. Generally, machined and unpainted parts subject to damage by the elements shall be protected with an application of a strippable protective coating, or other approved protective method.

C. Equipment shall be packaged or crated in a manner that will provide protection from damage during shipping, handling, and storage.

D. The outside of the package or crate shall be adequately marked or tagged to indicate its contents by name and equipment number, if applicable; approximate weight; state any special precautions for handling; and indicate the recommended requirements for storage prior to installation.

1.03 PACKING AND DELIVERY OF SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS

A. Properly mark to identify the associated equipment by name, equipment, and part number. Parts shall be packaged in a manner for protection against damage from the elements during shipping, handling, and storage. Ship in boxes that are marked to indicate the contents. Delivery of spare parts and special tools shall be made prior to the time associated equipment is scheduled for the initial test run.

1.04 SHIPMENT

A. All equipment and material shall be shipped with freight and shipping paid, FOB jobsite.

ER No. S049334 01600 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

B. The Contractor shall request a 7-day advance Notice of Shipment from manufacturers, and, upon receipt of such notice, provide the Engineer with a copy of the current delivery information concerning equipment items and material items of critical importance to the project schedule.

1.05 RECEIVING

A. The Contractor shall make provisions to unload and record the receipt of all equipment and materials at a location to be determined by the Contractor away from the Airport jobsite with secondary handling to be arranged for delivery to the jobsite during evening work hours for the materials needed that work night. No stringing of pipe or stock piling of bulk material is allowed inside the Airport along the pipe route except during working hours for the pipe and bulk material to be installed that work night.

B. All costs for receiving, inspection, handling, storage, insurance, inventory control, and equipment maintenance for both for both the Contractor-Supplied and Department-Supplied materials and equipment shall be included in the prices bid and no extra compensation will be allowed.

1.06 INSPECTION

A. Immediately upon receipt of equipment and materials at the Contractor’s offsite receiving location, the Contractor shall inspect for completeness and any evidence of damage during shipment. Department's supplied equipment and material shall be inspected and inventoried together with Department's inspector. Should there appear to be any shortage or damage, the Engineer shall be immediately notified; and the Contractor shall be fully responsible for informing the manufacturers and the transportation company of the extent of the shortage or damage. If the item or items require replacing or supplying missing parts, the Contractor shall take the necessary measures to expedite the replacement or supply the missing parts.

1.07 HANDLING

A. Equipment and materials received for installation on this Project shall be handled in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and in a manner that will prevent damage.

1.08 STORAGE

A. Equipment and materials shall be stored prior to installation as recommended by the manufacturer. Generally, materials such as pipe shall be stored off the ground in approved storage yards. Items subject to the damage by the elements, vandalism, or theft shall be stored in secure buildings. Items requiring environmental control for protection shall be provided with the necessary environmentally controlled storage facilities at no cost to the Department.

1.09 INSURANCE

ER No. S049334 01600 - 3 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

A. The Contractor's insurance shall adequately cover the value of materials delivered but not yet incorporated into the work. The Contractor and the Department shall be named as co-insured insofar as their respective interests may appear. Proof of this coverage must be submitted to the Engineer at the time request for progress or partial payments.

1.10 INVENTORY CONTROL

A. Equipment and materials shall be stored in a manner to provide easy access for inspection and inventory control. The Contractor shall keep a running account of all materials in storage to facilitate inspection and to estimate progress payments for materials delivered but not installed in the work.

1.11 EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE PRIOR TO DEPARTMENT'S ACCEPTANCE

A. Provide the required or manufacturer's recommended maintenance during storage, during the installation, and until such time as the Department accepts the equipment for full-time operation.

1.12 SALVABLE EQUIPMENT

A. Any salvable pipe, fitting, or other miscellaneous material or equipment removed during construction and not reused in the work shall be cleaned, hauled, and stored by the Contractor at his own expense, where directed by the Engineer, and shall remain the property of the Department. All other material shall be disposed of by the Contractor at his own expense.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

NOT USED.

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049334 01710 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

SECTION 01710

CLEANING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section specifies the maintenance of the work site in a clean, orderly, hazard-free condition.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations in accordance with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws. Rubbish, volatile wastes, and other construction wastes shall be neither burned nor buried on the work site, and shall not be disposed of into storm drains, sanitary drains, streams or other waterways.

B. Final cleaning shall be accomplished either by workmen experienced in cleaning operations or by professional cleaners.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ON-SITE WASTE CONTAINERS

A. Provide on-site waste containers for collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish. See Section 01100, Subsection 1.05 regarding Safety Requirements for environmentally hazardous materials.

2.02 CLEANING MATERIALS

A. Cleaning materials shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the surface to be cleaned.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain work site in accordance with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws applicable to work site cleanliness, and in a neat, orderly and hazard-free condition until final acceptance of the work. Catwalks, accessible underground structures, work site sidewalks and walkways adjacent to the work site shall be kept free from hazards caused by construction activities.

B. Store volatile wastes including rags in covered metal containers, and remove from work site daily.

ER No. S049334 01710 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

C. Prevent accumulations of wastes which create hazardous conditions.

D. Artificially ventilate spaces which are not naturally ventilated when volatile or noxious substances are present in those spaces.

3.02 INTERIM CLEANING

A. Perform cleaning every workday for duration of the Work. Structures, grounds, and areas of the work site and public and private properties shall be maintained free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish caused by construction operations on the work site. Place waste materials and rubbish in on-site containers.

B. Remove or secure loose material on open decks and on other exposed surfaces at end of each day's work or more often to maintain work site in hazard-free condition. Prevent dislodgement of materials due to wind and other forces.

C. Wet down dry materials and rubbish to lay dust and prevent blowing dust.

D. Empty on-site waste containers whenever necessary so that trash overflow does not occur. Legally dispose of contents at either public or private dumping areas.

E. Vacuum-clean interiors of buildings which are ready to receive finish painting. Continue vacuum-cleaning on an as-needed basis, until area is ready for final acceptance.

F. Control the handling of materials, debris and rubbish; do not drop or throw from heights.

G. Immediately remove spillages of fuels or oil or of construction-related materials from hauling routes or the site.

H. Perform cleaning operations so dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning processes will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

3.03 FINAL CLEANING

A. In addition to the cleaning performed above, in preparation for final inspection, remove grease, dust, dirt, rust stain on concrete floors, labels, fingerprints and other foreign materials from exposed interior and exterior finished surfaces. Flush down all parking level areas and stairs leaving such surfaces clean of all sand, laitances, etc.

B. In preparation for final acceptance or occupancy, conduct final inspection and cleaning of exposed interior and exterior surfaces, and of concealed spaces.

C. Maintain cleaning operations until project has been finally accepted.

ER No. S049334 01710 - 3 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01720

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope of Work: For contracts where the work is performed at an on-site location maintain one record copy of:

1. Record Drawings 2. Record Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modification of the contract. 5. Engineer's written orders or instructions. 6. Approved Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. 7. Field Test records. 8. Construction photographs. 9. As-built locations, dimensions, and elevations as recorded by the

Contractor’s Florida Registered Land Surveyor (FRLS).

B. The records listed above are to be made available to the Engineer at all times for all projects.

C. Related Requirements Described Elsewhere:

1. Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.

1.02 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES

A. Maintain documents in a clean dry, legible, condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes.

1.03 RECORDING

A. During the life of the Contract the Contractor shall retain the services of a FRLS who shall maintain records of the installation, including all deviations from Plans and Specifications.

B. Measure and Record all information for all projects concurrently with construction progress.

C. Submit redlines, partially completed as-built plan sheets and fully complete as-built Plan sheets, all as required by and satisfactory to, the Engineer as prerequisite for the acceptance of monthly payment applications.

D. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat large printed letters.

ER No. S049334 01720 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

1. Record all information for pipeline projects and on-site projects

concurrently with construction progress.

2. Do not conceal any work until as-built information is recorded by the Contractor’s surveyor, and if so required, by the M-D WASD surveyor.

3. All locations for future connections or tie-ins shall be left unburied and uncovered until the Contractor’s FRLS measures and records the as-built information. a. All as-built and inspector information is to be made available to

the Engineer on a daily basis for inclusion in the M-D WASD records.

4. Restrained pipe, end line valves, thrust blocks shall be left uncovered for the last complete length. Inline valves and tees shall be left exposed for 1 length on both sides plus the face end. Measure and record the elevation, horizontal and vertical alignment, and the inclination for these items.

5. For all projects, the Contractor’s FRLS shall maintain exact and extensive records of any deviations from Drawings and Specifications. These records shall be satisfactory to the Engineer, whose decision shall be final, and sufficient to allow the production of accurate as built Plans which correctly and completely portray the work as constructed.

6. For all projects, the Contractor’s FRLS shall record data as follows during the entirety of construction.

a. For facility (e.g. a water or sewage plant, pumping station, or similar site, if so designated by M-D WASD) projects, record as-built dimensions and elevations every twenty-five feet (25') or portion thereof along pipeline and at every abrupt change in direction of the new line.

b. For pipeline projects, constructed in the public right-of-way, record dimensions and elevations every one hundred feet or portion thereof along the pipeline and at every horizontal and vertical change in direction.

c. In all cases, record locations and elevations for each valve, fitting, service line, fire hydrant, water sampling point, utility poles adjacent to the proposed line, overhead wires crossing the ditch line (approximate height above grade) and other appurtenances along the pipeline.

d. The identity, dimensions, location, and elevation of any existing utility crossing the proposed line and so immediately adjacent to the new line as to be exposed by the excavation, shall also be recorded. Locate, excavate, expose, and record the same data for any utility shown in the plans whose proximity to the proposed pipeline could affect the certification requirements of the new installation. Note that in instances of a very wide ditch due to ground conditions, the recording of data for adjacent, paralleling utilities shall only be required for lines which come

ER No. S049334 01720 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

within three feet of the outside of the pipe being installed, unless otherwise ordered by the Engineer who’s decision shall be final.

e. Without exception, for all thrust blocks, the top elevation, outer dimension, thickness of the block, length and location of any sheet piling, if used, shall be recorded by the Contractor’s FRLS.

f. Specific locations and elevation of equipment, the buildings and miscellaneous items installed inside them shall be recorded as applicable and as required by the Engineer.

g. Without exception, where the substitution of another piece of equipment for that shown on the Plans has been allowed, the footprint, clearance, and elevation dimensions shall be recorded by the Contractor’s FRLS, and these changes shall be accurately and thoroughly prortrayed on the as-built plans.

h. Contractor's Licensed Surveyor shall prepare from the field data, as-built record drawings showing correctly, completely, and accurately the installation, embracing all changes and deviations made during construction, including all construction variances, to reflect the work as it was constructed.

i. Record Drawings shall be prepared as specified hereinafter. j. Record Drawings and three (3) blue line copies shall be signed

and sealed by the Surveyor and shall be submitted to the Department for the Engineer's review within ten (10) calendar days following the completion date of successful pressure testing of all mains and appurtenances under this Contract.

k. If the Engineer determines that the Drawings are not acceptable, they will be returned to the Contractor with a cover letter noting the deficiencies and/or reasons for the disapproval. Contractor shall have ten (10) calendar days to correct all exceptions taken by the Engineer and resubmit as-built record drawings to the Engineer for final acceptance.

1.04 DRAWINGS

A. During the life of the Contract, maintain records of all deviations from the Plans and Specifications and prepare therefrom As-Built Record Drawings showing correctly and accurately all changes and deviations made during construction to reflect the work as it was actually constructed. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to check the As-Built Record Drawings for errors and omissions prior to submittal to the Department and certify in writing that the As-Built Record Drawings are correct and accurate, including the actual location of all piping, exposed and internal piping, and electrical/signal conduits in or below the concrete floor. Indicate the size, depth and voltage in each conduit.

B. Legibly Mark To Record Actual Construction: All data as previously specified for all installations by the Contractor’s FRLS. For on-site structures and facilities work the Contractor’s Florida Registered Land Surveyor shall record:

1. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor and datum plane.

2. All exposed and underground piping and ductwork with elevations and dimensions and locations of valves, pull boxes, etc. Changes in

ER No. S049334 01720 - 3 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

location. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent reference points, plant survey grids, property lines and similar.

3. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the construction shall be referenced to visible and accessible features of the structure. Air conditioning ducts with locations of dampers, access doors, fans and other items needing periodic maintenance.

4. Field changes in dimensions and details. 5. Changes made by Engineer's written instructions or by Change Order. 6. Details not on original Contract Drawings. 7. Equipment and piping relocations. 8. Major architectural and structural changes in structures, including tanks. 9. Architectural schedule changes according to Contractor's record and

shop drawings. 10. Record Drawings shall be prepared as specified hereinafter.

C. Specifications and Addenda: Legibly mark each section to record:

1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and Supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed.

2. Changes made by Engineer's written instructions or by Change Order.

D. Approved Shop Drawings: Provide record copies for system diagrams and drawings together with each element of process equipment, piping, electrical system and instrumentation system.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing:

1. Date 2. Project title and number 3. Contractor's name and address 4. Title and number of each Record Document 5. Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative.

B. Record Drawings with five blue line copies which have been signed and sealed

by the surveyor shall be submitted to the WASD for the engineer’s review. Drawings shall conform to recognized standards of drafting and the minimum technical standards as set forth by the Board of Professional Surveyors and Mappers, shall be neat , legible and on 24-inch by 36-inch bond paper. These materials shall be submitted to the WASD for the Engineer’s review as a prerequisite for payment during the course of construction as previously specified and final, complete sets of documents within ten calendar days following the completion date of successful testing of all mains, equipment and appurtenances under this Contract. Final payment will not be made until the five sets of as-built record drawings (with AutoCAD file) and five sets of blue-line prints have been approved and accepted by the Engineer. 1. In cases where a portion of a pipeline system or parts of a process

ER No. S049334 01720 - 4 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

system are put into service, the above conditions shall apply for the in-service portion and monthly payments shall be withheld until the as-built drawings are accepted by the Engineer.

2. As-Built Record Drawings, as prepared by the Contractor’s Florida Registered Land surveyor and submitted by the Contractor, shall comply with following criteria and standards: a. Title block must show the Contract or Project Title (as

applicable); Contract number; WASD ER number; Contractor’s name; Engineer of Record’s name; Surve4yor’s name and address; date; location; and where appropriate to the work, size and type (i.e. water main, sanitary gravity main, sanitary force main) of main.

b. Baselines or centerlines must be tied to section corners, monument line and right-of-way lines.

c. Pipeline must be tied to baseline or centerline with stations and offsets.

d. Baselines or centerlines must show bearings or deflection angles, or delta, radius, chord and arc length for curves.

e. Show all horizontal curve data, including point of curvature (PC) and point of tangency (PT) stations or radial bearing.

f. Stationing must be the same as shown on construction drawings and must be tied to Section corners, centerline intersections and all other pertinent control points within the Project. All such pertinent points shall have their stationing shown and where there is dual stationing for a point, both stations shall be called out.

g. Indentify all streets by name or number and show stationing at all intersecting streets.

h. Refer to vertical datum plane and identify the location, elevation and source supplying the bench mark used.

i. Tie easement lines to survey baseline or platted centerline and right-of-ways.

j. Show horizontal and vertical locations of all fittings, deflections, or at any significant change of direction, and at a maximum of 100-foot intervals along the pipeline for off-site (e.g. in the public right-of-way) and at maximum 25- foot intervals for on-site (e.g. on a facility such as a pump station or plant work.

k. On all pipe fittings of 36-inch diameter or over, (i.e. tees bends, crosses, wyes, increasers/decreasers, bevels) elevations must be taken at the end and center points to reflect the true elevation and altitude of the fitting.

l. Elevations of natural ground or pavement over the pipeline must be shown at each position where the pipe elevation is shown and at interveni8ng high and low points.

m. Manhole rim and valve box rim elevations must be shown. n. Show all invert and bottom elevations in manholes and valve

vaults or boxes. Show all invert and bottom elevations together with pipe size, and where it can be determined, pipe material, for existing structures having pipes which cross the pipe line being constructed.

o. Locations and elevations together with diameter, thickness and

ER No. S049334 01720 - 5 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

material of all casings. p. Location, top and bottom elevations of all sheeting left in place. q. Coordinate values used inside plants shall be the local, WASD

established coordinate systems referenced to the property boundary.

r. State plane coordinate values for all new valves and manholes; on existing valves and manholes at points of connection or closest to the point of connection and the point of connection itself.

3. Certification: The Contractor shall certify on as-built record drawings all other actual constructed details and information as may be required by the WASD including but not limited to: a. Valves shall be identified by size, type, end condition; and n

valves 16-inch or larger, the manufacturer’s name and number of turns required to open or close the valve.

b. Show calculated pipeline percent of grade between manholes of gravity systems.

c. Types and sizes of sheeting and piling together with measured and complete; location, dimensional, , and elevation data on any pile caps, tie backs, anchors, whalers or other appurtenant structures left in place.

C. Drawings on Magnetic Media: The WASD requires the submittal of as-built drawings in AutoCAD 2008 for Windows format or later. Graphical information contained on magnetic media shall be the same as provided on plan sheets. Magnetic media shall be delivered to the office of the Chief, Engineering Division Miami-Dade Water and Sewer Department at 3575 S. LeJeune Road, Miami, Florida 33146 or by mail at P.O. Box 330316. A letter of transmittal shall be provided, containing a list of all files and data being provided.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

NOT USED

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049334 01720 - 6 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

 

ER No. S049334  01730 ‐ 1  PCTS No. 12348 

S‐902 

SECTION 01730

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Detailed information for the preparation, submission, and Engineer’s review of Operations and Maintenance (O&M) Data, as required by individual Specification sections.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Preliminary Data: Initial and subsequent submissions for Engineer’s review.

B. Final Data: Engineer-accepted data, submitted as specified herein.

C. Maintenance Operation: As used on Maintenance Summary Form is defined to mean any routine operation required to ensure satisfactory performance and longevity of equipment. Examples of typical maintenance operations are lubrication, belt tensioning, adjustment of pump packing glands, and routine adjustments.

1.03 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Equipment and System Data:

1. Preliminary Data:

a. Do not submit until Shop Drawing for equipment or system has been reviewed and approved by Engineer.

b. Submit prior to shipment date.

2. Final Data: Submit Instructional Manual Formatted data not less than 30 days prior to installation of equipment or system.

B. Materials and Finishes Data:

1. Preliminary Data: Submit at least 15 days prior to request for final inspection. 2. Final Data: Submit within 10 days after final inspection.

1.04 DATA FORMAT

A. Prepare preliminary and final data in the form of an instructional manual and on electronic media.

B. Instructional Manual Format:

 

ER No. S049334  01730 ‐ 2  PCTS No. 12348 

S‐902 

1. Binder: Commercial quality, permanent, three-ring or three-post binders with

durable plastic cover. 2. Size: 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches, minimum. 3. Cover: Identify manual with typed or printed title “OPERATING AND

MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION” and list:

a. Project title. b. Designate applicable system, equipment, material, or finish. c. Identity of separate structure as applicable. d. Identify volume number if more than one volume. e. Identity of general subject matter covered in manual.

4. Spine:

a. Project title. b. Identify volume number if more than one volume.

5. Title Page:

a. Contractor name, address, and telephone number. b. Subcontractor, Supplier, installer, or maintenance contractor’s name,

address, and telephone number, as appropriate.

1) Identify area of responsibility of each. 2) Provide name and telephone number of local source of

supply for parts and replacement.

6. Table of Contents:

a. Neatly typewritten and arranged in systematic order with consecutive page numbers.

b. Identify each product by product name and other identifying numbers or symbols as set forth in Contract Documents.

7. Paper: 20-pound minimum, white for typed pages. 8. Text: Manufacturer’s printed data, or neatly typewritten. 9. Three-hole punch data for binding and composition; arrange printing so that

punched holes do not obliterate data. 10. Material shall be suitable for reproduction, with quality equal to original.

Photocopying of material will be acceptable, except for material containing photographs.

C. Electronic Media Format:

1. Portable Document Format (PDF):

a. After all preliminary data has been found to be acceptable to Engineer, submit Operation and Maintenance data in PDF format on CD.

 

ER No. S049334  01730 ‐ 3  PCTS No. 12348 

S‐902 

b. Files to be exact duplicates of Engineer-accepted preliminary data. Arrange by specification number and name.

c. Files to be fully functional and viewable in most recent version of Adobe Acrobat.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Informational:

1. Data Outline: Submit three copies of a detailed outline of proposed organization and contents of Final Data prior to preparation of Preliminary Data.

2. Preliminary Data:

a. Submit four copies for PMCM, WASD and Engineer’s review. b. If data meets conditions of the Contract:

1) One copy will be returned to Contractor. 2) One copy will be forwarded to Resident Project

Representative. 3) One copy will be retained in Engineer’s file. 4) One copy will be retained in PMCM’s file.

c. If data does not meet conditions of the Contract:

1) All copies will be returned to Contractor with Engineer’s comments (on separate document) for revision.

2) Engineer’s comments will be retained in Engineer’s file. 3) Resubmit three copies revised in accordance with

Engineer’s comments.

3. Final Data: Submit four copies in format specified herein. 1.06 DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

A. Content For Each Unit (or Common Units) and System:

1. Product Data:

a. Include only those sheets that are pertinent to specific product. b. Clearly annotate each sheet to:

1) Identify specific product or part installed. 2) Identify data applicable to installation. 3) Delete references to inapplicable information.

c. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. d. Performance curves, engineering data, nameplate data, and tests. e. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.

 

ER No. S049334  01730 ‐ 4  PCTS No. 12348 

S‐902 

f. Original manufacturer’s parts list, illustrations, detailed assembly drawings showing each part with part numbers and sequentially numbered parts list, and diagrams required for maintenance.

g. Spare parts ordering instructions. h. Where applicable, identify installed spares and other provisions for future

work (e.g., reserved panel space, unused components, wiring, terminals).

2. As-installed, color-coded piping diagrams. 3. Charts of valve tag numbers, with the location and function of each valve. 4. Drawings: Supplement product data with Drawings as necessary to clearly

illustrate:

a. Format:

1) Provide reinforced, punched, binder tab; bind in with text. 2) Reduced to 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches, or 11 inches by

17 inches folded to 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches. 3) Where reduction is impractical, fold and place in 8-1/2-inch by

11-inch envelopes bound in text. 4) Identify Specification section and product on Drawings and

envelopes.

b. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. c. Control and flow diagrams. d. Coordinate drawings with Project record documents to assure correct

illustration of completed installation.

5. Instructions and Procedures: Within text, as required to supplement product data. a. Format:

1) Organize in consistent format under separate heading for each different procedure.

2) Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure. 3) Provide information sheet for Owner’s personnel, including:

a) Proper procedures in event of failure. b) Instances that might affect validity of guarantee or

Bond.

b. Installation Instructions: Including alignment, adjusting, calibrating, and checking.

c. Operating Procedures:

1) Startup, break-in, routine, and normal operating instructions. 2) Test procedures and results of factory tests where required. 3) Regulation, control, stopping, and emergency instructions. 4) Description of operation sequence by control manufacturer.

 

ER No. S049334  01730 ‐ 5  PCTS No. 12348 

S‐902 

5) Shutdown instructions for both short and extended duration. 6) Summer and winter operating instructions, as applicable. 7) Safety precautions. 8) Special operating instructions.

d. Maintenance and Overhaul Procedures:

1) Routine maintenance. 2) Guide to troubleshooting. 3) Disassembly, removal, repair, reinstallation, and re-

assembly.

6. Guarantee, Bond, and Service Agreement: In accordance with Section 01 77 00, Closeout Procedures.

B. Content for Each Electric or Electronic Item or System:

1. Description of Unit and Component Parts:

a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data, nameplate data, and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. d. Interconnection wiring diagrams, including control and lighting systems.

2. Circuit Directories of Panelboards: 3. Electrical service. 4. Control requirements and interfaces. 5. Communication requirements and interfaces. 6. List of electrical relay settings, and control and alarm contact settings. 7. Electrical interconnection wiring diagram, including as applicable, single-line,

three-line, schematic and internal wiring, and external interconnection wiring. 8. As-installed control diagrams by control manufacturer. 9. Operating Procedures:

a. Routine and normal operating instructions. b. Startup and shutdown sequences, normal and emergency. c. Safety precautions. d. Special operating instructions.

10. Maintenance Procedures:

a. Routine maintenance. b. Guide to troubleshooting. c. Adjustment and checking. d. List of relay settings, control and alarm contact settings.

11. Manufacturer’s printed operating and maintenance instructions. 12. List of original manufacturer’s spare parts, manufacturer’s current prices, and

recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.

 

ER No. S049334  01730 ‐ 6  PCTS No. 12348 

S‐902 

C. Maintenance Summary:

1. Compile individual Maintenance Summary for each applicable equipment item, respective unit or system, and for components or sub-units.

2. Format:

a. Use Maintenance Summary Form bound with this section or electronic facsimile of such.

b. Each Maintenance Summary may take as many pages as required. c. Use only 8-1/2-inch by 11-inch size paper. d. Complete using typewriter or electronic printing.

3. Include detailed lubrication instructions and diagrams showing points to be greased or oiled; recommend type, grade, and temperature range of lubricants and frequency of lubrication.

4. Recommended Spare Parts:

a. Data to be consistent with manufacturer’s Bill of Materials/Parts List furnished in O&M manuals.

b. “Unit” is the unit of measure for ordering the part. c. “Quantity” is the number of units recommended. d. “Unit Cost” is the current purchase price.

1.07 DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES

A. Content for Architectural Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes:

1. Manufacturer’s data, giving full information on products:

a. Catalog number, size, and composition. b. Color and texture designations. c. Information required for reordering special-manufactured products.

2. Instructions for Care and Maintenance:

a. Manufacturer’s recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods.

b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods that are detrimental to product.

c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

B. Content for Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products:

1. Manufacturer’s data, giving full information on products:

a. Applicable standards.

 

ER No. S049334  01730 ‐ 7  PCTS No. 12348 

S‐902 

b. Chemical composition. c. Details of installation.

2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair. 1.08 SUPPLEMENTS

A. The supplements listed below, following “End of Section”, are part of this Specification.

1. Forms: Maintenance Summary Form.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

 

ER No. S049334  01730 ‐ 8  PCTS No. 12348 

S‐902 

MAINTENANCE SUMMARY FORM

PROJECT: CONTRACT NO.:

1. EQUIPMENT ITEM

2. MANUFACTURER

3. EQUIPMENT/TAG NUMBER(S)

4. WEIGHT OF INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS (OVER 100 POUNDS)

5. NAMEPLATE DATA (hp, voltage, speed, etc.)

6. MANUFACTURER’S LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE

a. Name Telephone No.

b. Address

7. MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

Maintenance Operation Comments

Frequency

Lubricant (If Applicable)

List briefly each maintenance operation required and refer to specific information in manufacturer’s standard maintenance manual, if applicable. (Reference to manufacturer’s catalog or sales literature is not acceptable.)

List required frequency of each maintenance operation.

Refer by symbol to lubricant required.

 

ER No. S049334  01730 ‐ 9  PCTS No. 12348 

S‐902  

8. LUBRICANT LIST

Reference S

Shell

Exxon Mobile

Chevron Texaco

BP Amoco

Or Equal

List symbols used in No. 7 above.

List equivalent lubricants, as distributed by each manufacturer for the specific use recommended.

9. RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS FOR OWNER’S INVENTORY.

Part No. Description Unit Quantity Unit Cost

Note: Identify parts provided by this Contract with two asterisks.

ER No. S049334 01740 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

SECTION 01740

PERMITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL

A. Where the Department has obtained various permits for this Project, copies will be appended at the rear of the Specifications.

B. The Contractor shall familiarize himself with, and comply with, all requirements of these permits. All other necessary permits shall be obtained by the Contractor and be paid for as specified below in 1.01, G.

C. Unless otherwise specifically stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents, Supply Plans and Calculations for work not designed by the Department that is preponderantly of a structural nature signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Florida as stated in the Florida Building Code; Section 104.2.1, Section 104.2.2 , and Chapter 2 Definitions, which each read as follows:

1. All information, drawings, specifications and accompanying data shall bear the name and signature of the person responsible for the design.

2. Design Professional: If the design professional is an architect or engineer legally registered o under the law of this state regulating the practice of architecture or engineering, then he/she shall affix his official seal to said drawings, specifications, and accompanying date, as required by Florida Statute.

3. Engineer: A Florida registered Engineer.

D. The Contractor's particular attention is called to any Special Conditions of the permits relating to construction procedures, excavation and backfill requirements, open trench restrictions, turbidity control and all other general and special conditions, including 1:10 cement mix and pavement details. In the event any of the conditions of the permits are in conflict with the requirements of these Specifications, the more stringent conditions of the permits shall take precedence. The Contractor is to conform to all regulations of the governmental agencies having jurisdiction over this work, whether or not included in the permit.

E. Any deviations from the Plans, Specifications or permits appended thereto, must first be approved by the Engineer even if approval for the change has been given by the permitting agency.

F. The Contractor shall assume throughout the life of the Contract all obligations and responsibilities imposed on the Department or other County departments as permittee of the above-mentioned permits. All expenses necessary for compli-ance with the regulations and requirements of each permitting agency and its

ER No. S049334 01740 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

permit shall be borne by the Contractor, and shall be included in his overall bid price.

G. The cost of any fees such as impact fees, inspection fees, etc. and the cost of obtaining all required permits shall be borne by the Department. The Contractor shall pay the required fees, obtain the permit(s) and then upon submission of proof of cost to the Department, be reimbursed for said cost out of the Allowance Account(s). This shall apply only to required permits and fees. Permits obtained or fees paid for the advantage of the Contractor or non-required permits obtained for whatever reason shall not be reimbursed. The necessity or non-necessity of a permit or fee shall be determined by the Engineer who's word shall be final. As specified in the paragraph above, all costs of compliance with the permit(s) shall be borne by the Contractor and included in his bid price.

H. All surveying required by the Project permits shall be done by the Contractor's Florida Registered Land Surveyors. This includes staking out limits of construction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

NOT USED

END OF SECTION

 

ER No. S049334 01750 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902 

SECTION 01750

MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC AND PUBLIC STREETS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of public streets and traffic control as specified hereinafter.

1.02 REGULATIONS

As used herein, any reference to Miami-Dade County, its departments, or its published regulations, permits and data, shall be synonymous and interchangeable with other recognized governing bodies over particular areas or streets, or their departments, published regulations (i.e., Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (M.U.T.C.D.), F.D.O.T. Roadway and Bridge Standard Index Drawing Book), permits or data. The Contractor shall abide by all applicable laws, regulations, and codes thereof pertaining to Maintenance of Traffic (M.O.T.) on public streets, detour of traffic, traffic control and other provisions as may be required for this Project.

1.03 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC (M.O.T.)

A. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the M.O.T. on public streets, detour

of traffic (including furnishing and maintaining regulatory and informative signs along the detour route), traffic control, and other provisions, throughout the Project, as required by the Miami-Dade County Department of Public Works, Traffic Engineering Division (Traffic Division) or Florida Department of Transportation (F.D.O.T.) and the above noted standards. Traffic shall be maintained according to corresponding typical traffic control details as outlined in the Miami- Dade County Public Works Manual and the above noted standards. No street shall be completely blocked, nor blocked more than one-half at any time, keeping the other one-half open for traffic, without specific approval.

B. If required by the Traffic Division or F.D.O.T., the Contractor shall make

arrangements for the employment of uniformed off-duty policemen to maintain and regulate the flow of traffic through the work area. The number of men required and the number of hours on duty necessary for the maintenance and regulation of traffic flow shall be provided by the Contractor.

C. The Contractor shall provide all barricades with warning lights, necessary arrow

boards and signs, to warn motorists of the work throughout the Project. Adequate approved devices shall be erected and maintained by the Contractor to detour traffic.

D. Excavated or other material stored adjacent to or partially upon a roadway pavement

 

ER No. S049334 01750 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902 

shall be adequately marked for traffic safety at all times. The Contractor shall provide necessary access to all adjacent property during construction.

E. The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision, installation and

maintenance of all M.O.T. and safety devices, in accordance with specifications outlined in the Miami-Dade

County Public Works Manual and the above noted standards. In addition, the Contractor shall be responsible for providing the Engineer with M.O.T. plans for lane closures and/or detours for approval. These plans (sketches) shall be produced by an individual employed by the Contractor and certified as "Work Zone Traffic Safety Supervisor" by the International Municipal Signal Association.

F. Where excavations are to be made in the vicinity of signalized intersections,

attention is directed to the fact that vehicle loop detectors may have been embedded in the pavement. (See Section 01016, Article 1.10-G.)

G. Where applicable, the Contractor shall notify the Traffic Division 24 hours in

advance of the construction date or 48 hours in advance of construction within any signalized intersection.

H. Temporary pavement will be required over all cuts in pavement areas, and also

where traffic is to be routed over swale or median areas. When the temporary pavement for routing traffic is no longer necessary, it shall be removed and the swale or median areas restored to their previous condition.

I. Pavement markings damaged during construction shall be remarked, as

required by the Traffic Division. 1.04 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC FOR BYPASS PUMPING

The Contractor shall take appropriate steps to ensure that all pumps, piping and hoses that carry raw sewage are protected from vehicular traffic and pedestrian traffic.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049334 02230 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

SECTION 02230

CLEARING AND GRUBBING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Clear and grub the areas to be occupied by the facilities or utility systems to be constructed, including all areas to be excavated, filled, paved or planted as shown on the Plans and as specified herein.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Clearing shall consist of the cutting, removal and disposal of all trees, stumps, brush, shrubs, rubbish and any other objectionable material within the designated areas.

B. Grubbing shall consist of the removal and disposal of all stumps larger than 1-1/2 inches in diameter and other objectionable material to a depth of at least 12 inches below the ground surface.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. In the course of the work, it may become necessary to remove trees if they interfere with the work. Miami-Dade County and various municipalities have ordinances regulating the removal, relocation and pruning of trees in the public right-of-way; these ordinances shall be strictly adhered to. The Contractor shall obtain a permit from Miami-Dade County, Public Works and Waste Management Department and/or other regulatory agencies having jurisdiction over the work area before removing, relocating and/or pruning any tree. The Contractor shall comply with all requirements and conditions of the permit at no additional cost to the Department.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. The Contractor shall remove and replace, where required all existing shrubbery, trees, grass, sprinklers, fences, signs, mailboxes, structures, roadways, sidewalks, curbs and similar items or structures in the way of all excavation necessary for the construction of the Project.

ER No. S049334 02230 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

3.02 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT AREAS

A. The Contractor shall protect areas shown on the Plans or designated by the Engineer to remain protected from damage by construction operations by erecting suitable barriers or other acceptable means.

3.03 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS

A. All roots, vegetation and other refuse removed from the site during clearing and/or grubbing operations shall be legally disposed of by the Contractor. Burning of any material on site will not be permitted.

B. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer tickets indicating proof of legal disposal of unsuitable backfill material. If the unsuitable material has beneficial use, the transport destination needs to be reported to the Engineer. Payment for disposal of the unsuitable material shall not be made until the Department has proof of legal disposal at a particular destination.

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049334 02260 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

SECTION 02260

STEEL SHEET PILING

PART 1. GENERAL

1.01. SCOPE

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install steel sheet piling as shown in the plans or as required for a complete and satisfactory installation.

PART 2. PRODUCTS

2.01 STEEL SHEET PILING

A. Steel sheet piling shall conform to the requirements of "Standard Specification for High-Strength Low Alloy Columbium Vanadium Structural Steel", ASTM A572/A572M, latest version.

B. The Contractor will be responsible for design and selection. Structural plans for the sheet steel piling installation and the calculations for the required Section Modulus and the Sheet Piling Designation shall be prepared by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Florida. Sealed plans shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to installation of the piling system.

C. Structural steel shall meet the requirements of ASTM Standard A36 "Structural Steel."

PART 3. EXECUTION

3.01 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY SHEET PILING

A. The Contractor will be responsible for removing the temporary sheet piling and structural steel at the completion of the Project, such material will remain the property of the Contractor.

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049334 02315 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

SECTION 02315

TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING FOR PIPING SYSTEMS

PART 1. GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. The work included under this Section consists of excavating, backfilling and compaction as required for the construction of the piping systems as specified herein.

B. All excavations shall be executed in accordance with the Florida Building Code, The State of Florida Trench Safety Act (TSA), OSHA requirements and all applicable requirements of Section 01016 “Safety Requirements and Protection of Property”, including notification to Sunshine State One-Call of Florida, Inc. (1-800-432-4770), 48 hours prior to any excavation.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Dewatering and Drainage - Section 02140.

PART 2. PRODUCTS

2.01 BACKFILL MATERIAL

A. Except where a 1:10 cement/sand or flowable fill concrete mix is required (See Part 2 of Section 02745 “Pavement Removal and Replacement”), granular soil backfill materials shall be utilized. Suitable backfill material shall be clean, shall not be expansive nor have high organic content, shall be free of clay, marl, unstable materials, debris, lumps and clods, and shall meet the following requirements:

1. Maximum Liquid Limit shall not exceed 12 as determined by ASTM D4318.

2. Maximum Plasticity Index shall not exceed 35 as determined by ASTM D4318.

3. Not more than 10 percent of weight shall be finer than 74 micron (No. 200) U.S. Standard Sieve.

B. Fill material containing limerock shall have sufficient sand to fill the voids in the limerock. No stones or rocks larger than 6-inches in diameter will be permitted in any backfill. Backfill material placed within 1-foot of piping and appurtenances or in the upper 6-inches of all backfill and fills shall not contain any stones or rocks larger than 2-inches in diameter.

C. Debris, broken paving or broken concrete shall not be used.

ER No. S049334 02315 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

D. Material for backfill may be material resulting from excavation, only if it meets the above mentioned requirements, or if suitable in the opinion of the Engineer. If sufficient suitable backfill material, including select backfill material, below, is not available from the site, additional material shall be furnished.

2.02 SELECT BACKFILL MATERIAL

A. Select backfill material specified in these specifications or required by the Plans shall meet all the general requirements for backfill material set forth above, and in addition, shall be free of any rocks or stones larger than 2 inches in diameter. Select backfill material may be material resulting from excavation, if suitable in the opinion of the Engineer, carefully selected to comply with these requirements.

2.03 BEDDING MATERIAL

A. Pipe bedding material shall consist of one of the following types of material, utilized in accordance with subsection 3.07 "Installation of Pipe Bedding", below.

1. Select Backfill material shall be as specified in 2.02 “Select Backfill Material” above.

2. Pearock shall be used for small diameter (less than 24-inch) pipe bedding (except copper pipe) as shown on the Standard Details. Pearock shall consist of hard, durable particles of proper size and gradation, and shall be free from organic material, wood, trash, sand, loam, clay, excess fines, and other deleterious materials. The pearock shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C33/C33M “Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates”, Size Number 8, and be graded within the following limits:

U.S. Sieve Size Percent Finer by Weight

1/2-inch 100

3/8-inch 85 to 100

No. 4 10 to 30

No. 8 0 to 10

No. 16 0 to 5

3. Crushed stone shall be used for bedding of 24-inch and larger diameter pipe and/or manholes as shown on the Standard Details. Crushed stone shall consist of hard, durable, sub-angular particles of proper size and gradation, and shall be free from organic material, wood, trash, sand, loam, clay, excess fines and other deleterious materials. The stone shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C33/C33M “Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates”, Size No. 57 (3/4-inch rock) and be graded within the following limits:

ER No. S049334 02315 - 3 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

Sieve Size Percent Finer by Weight 1 1/2-inch 100

1-inch 95 to 100

1/2-inch 25 to 100

No. 4 0 to 10

No. 8 0 to 5

4. Sand for bedding Copper Pipe shall be a dry screened sand. Sand shall be graded sand with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch sieve and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

5. Limerock screenings, sand or other fine material shall not be used for bedding.

B. All pipe bedding material shall be new. Existing pipe bedding material may not be used.

2.04 BACKFILL UNDER MANHOLES AND METER VAULTS

A. Any excavation below the levels required for the proper construction of manholes or meter vaults shall be filled with Class C concrete. The use of earth, rock, sand or other materials for this purpose will not be permitted.

PART 3. EXECUTION

3.01 CLEARING

A. The Contractor shall perform all clearing necessary for the proper installation of all piping and appurtenances in the locations shown in the Drawings, in accordance with Section 02230, "Clearing and Grubbing."

B. Plantings, shrubbery, trees, utility poles or structures subject to damage resulting from the excavation shall be transplanted, relocated, braced, shored, or otherwise protected and preserved unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Injury or damage to the referenced items shall be restored at no cost to the Department.

3.02 EXCAVATION

A. The Contractor shall perform all excavation of every description and of whatever substances encountered, to the dimensions and depth shown on the Drawings, or as directed. All excavations shall be made by open cut.

B. When the walls of the excavations are to be kept vertical and in order to protect the safety of workmen, the general public, this or other work or structures, or excavation walls, or pipe installation including materials encountered in the excavation which have a tendency to slough or flow into the excavation,

ER No. S049334 02315 - 4 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

undermine the banks, weaken the overlying strata, or are otherwise rendered unstable by the excavation operation shall be retained by steel sheeting, stabilization, grouting or approved methods. Said methods shall comply with the Trench Safety Act (TSA). Sheeting and shoring or other approved method shall be designed by a Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the State of Florida.

C. For structures, the Contractor shall maintain the bottom of the excavation firm and dry, and maintain an elevation of the water one (1) foot below the concrete to be placed, by use of pumps, tremie or other acceptable method. Excavation for the structures shall be sufficient to provide a clearance between their outer surfaces and the face of the excavation, sheeting, or shoring, of not less than 2 feet.

D. Excavation and removal of suitable or unsuitable material for structures shall be carried down to a depth of at least 12-inches below the bottom elevation of each footing or slab. After the area has been excavated, if in the opinion of the Engineer, soil conditions are not suitable to support the loads to be carried, he may order the excavation to continue an additional two feet deeper or to such lesser depth as may expose a suitable foundation material. All such excavations and removal of unsuitable material and subsequent backfilling and compaction to the required grade shall be considered as a normal part of the work and no extra compensation will be made. If the soil is still unsuitable after the additional excavation as described above, the Engineer may order excavation to additional depths as may be required. Such additional depth of excavation, removal of unsuitable material and subsequent compacted backfill shall be performed if ordered in writing by the Engineer.

E. Where wood sheeting or certain designs of steel sheeting are used, the Department may require the sheeting to be cut off at a level 2-feet above the top of the installed pipe and that portion below that level shall be left in place. If interlocking steel sheeting is used, it may be removed providing removal can be accomplished without disturbing the bedding, pipe or alignment of the pipe. Any damage to the pipe bedding, pipe or alignment of the constructed utility caused by removal of sheeting shall be cause for rejection of the affected portion of the work. Not more than 100-feet of trench shall be opened ahead of pipe laying operations at one time unless a greater length of open trench is approved by the Engineer.

F. In areas where trench widths are not limited by right-of-way or easement widths, property line restrictions, existing adjacent improvements including pavements, structures, and other utilities, and maintenance of traffic, the trench sides may be sloped to a suitable angle of repose of the excavated material, but only from a point one foot above the crown of the pipe.

G. A substantially and safely constructed moveable shield or box, as approved by the Engineer, may be used in place of sheeting, except where specifically called for on the Plans to install sheeting. Where a moveable shield or trench box, is used in place of sheeting and shoring, the trench shall be opened immediately ahead of the shield as pipe laying proceeds inside the shield. All

ER No. S049334 02315 - 5 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

construction in conjunction with using such a shield must be as approved by the Engineer, including excavation, installation of pipe, and backfilling and compaction.

H. Ladders or steps shall be provided for and used by workmen to enter and leave trenches.

I. Materials removed from the trenches shall be stored and disposed of in such a manner that they will not interfere unduly with traffic on public streets and sidewalks and they shall not be placed on private property. In congested areas, such materials as cannot be stored adjacent to the trench or used immediately as backfill shall be removed to convenient places of storage. If any material is creating a public hazard or other unsafe condition, it shall be removed immediately to a storage area.

J. Materials suitable for use as backfill be hauled to and used in areas where not enough suitable material is available from the excavation. Material unsuitable for use in backfill shall be removed promptly and disposed of by the Contractor.

K. Excavation for pipes and piping appurtenances:

1. The Contractor shall remove and replace, where required, all existing shrubbery, trees, grass, sprinklers, fences, signs, mail boxes, structures, roadways, sidewalks, curbs and similar items or structures in the way of the pipeline and shall make all excavation necessary for the pipelines to the lines and grades shown on the Plans.

2. Weeded area shall be restored, as specified herein. Where pavements or sidewalks are cut they shall be cut by means of a mechanical pavement saw to form true and straight edges which shall in general be either parallel or at right angles with the centerline of the pipe.

3. In order to protect himself from being held liable for any existing damaged pavement, including detour routes, the Contractor is advised to notify in writing the authority having jurisdiction over the street where such defective pavement exists prior to proceeding with any work in the vicinity. A copy of all such notices shall be forwarded to the Department.

4. Pipe trenches shall be excavated to a width within the limits of 12-inches above the top of the pipe to the trench bottom so as to provide a clearance on each side of the pipe barrel, measured to the face of the excavation or sheeting, if used, of 6-inches to 12-inches. All pipe trenches shall be excavated to a level 6-inch below the outside bottom of the proposed pipe barrel to provide for the installation of the bedding material.

5. Excavation for appurtenances shall be sufficient to provide a clearance between their outer surfaces and the face of the excavation or sheeting, if used, of not less than 12-inches. Manhole excavations shall be carried to sufficient depth to permit their construction on the undisturbed bottom of the excavation.

6. Excavation for thrust block shall be made in such a manner so that, when concrete is placed, it will bear against a firm, undisturbed, vertical trench wall with bearing are in accordance with the schedule shown in the

ER No. S049334 02315 - 6 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

Standard Details. 7. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the soil at that depth is unsatisfactory as

foundation material because it contains unsuitable marl, muck, organic matter, or other unsuitable material, the excavation shall be continued 2 feet deeper, except if a suitable foundation material is exposed at a lesser depth, further excavation will not be required.

8. If the soil is still unsuitable after the additional excavation as prescribed above, the trench bottom shall be excavated further in one foot increments in accordance with subsection 3.04 "Trench Overcut", herein.

9. Selected backfill shall then be placed and compacted in 6-inch layers up to the level of the pipe bedding material.

10. When the pipe to be installed in a trench requires the pipe installers to work under and around the pipe, the Contractor may request the Department that he be allowed to exceed the 12" maximum clearance, specifying the clear distance desired. The decision of the Engineer in this regard shall be final.

11. The ends of existing mains shall be temporarily capped or plugged to keep them clean and the ends of all mains shall be temporarily anchored to keep the joints from blowing apart from internal pressure until the new mains can be reconnected to them.

12. In addition to specific construction methods specified, the general requirements in subsequent subsections, below, shall apply to the work of this Project.

3.03 TRENCH STABILIZATION

A. Trench bottoms which are rendered soft or unstable as a result of construction methods, such as improper or inadequate sheeting, dewatering or other causes, shall be stabilized. In no event shall pipe be installed when such conditions exist. The Contractor shall correct such conditions so as to provide proper bedding or foundations for the proposed installation.

3.04 TRENCH OVERCUT

A. If, after excavating the trench to a depth of 2 feet 6 inches below the outside bottom elevation of the proposed pipe barrel, and the soil at that depth is still unsatisfactory as foundation material because it contains marl, muck, organic matter, or other unsuitable material, and the Engineer authorizes overcut, the pipe trench shall be excavated further in one-foot depth increments until either a suitable foundation material is found, or the Contractor is directed by the Engineer to stop trench overcut operation and begin backfilling. In no case will trench overcut be more than 6 feet in depth, i.e., to a point 8.5 feet below the bottom of the pipe.

B. Select backfill, as defined above, shall then be compacted in 6-inch layers up to the bottom of the proposed 6 inches of pipe bedding.

3.05 REMOVAL OF WATER

ER No. S049334 02315 - 7 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

A. It is a basic requirement of these Specifications that excavation shall be free from water before pipe or structures are installed. However, it is realized that in certain sections of the work this cannot be accomplished economically and the Contractor may request permission from the Engineer to use the "Alternate Method of Construction" defined in subsection 3.09 below.

B. The Contractor shall provide all necessary pumps, underdrains, well point systems, and other means for removing water from trenches and other parts of the work including structures. The Contractor shall continue dewatering operations until the backfill has progressed to a sufficient height over the pipe to prevent flotation or movement of the pipe in the trench, so that the backfill is above the natural water level.

C. Where applicable, the Contractor shall be required to obtain all necessary permits approving the location and proposed method of disposal before discharging water from any excavation into any portion of the public right-of-way or into any existing drainage structure or facility. Fees for obtaining these permits shall be paid in accordance with Section 01740, “Permits”.

D. Any water which accumulates in the excavations for structures shall be removed promptly by means satisfactory to the Engineer, in such a manner as to not create a nuisance to adjacent property or public thoroughfare.

E. Water from the trenches and excavation shall be disposed of in such a manner as will not cause injury to public health, to public or private property, to the work completed or in progress, to the surface of the streets, or to cause interference with the use of the same by public. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval, proposed methods of handling trench water and/or segregated solids and fines, including locations at which these materials will be disposed. Approval shall be received before starting the excavation.

F. The Contractor is cautioned that Miami-Dade County or other governing body having jurisdiction over the work location may have regulatory rules and ordinances prohibiting, or limiting, the discharge of water from any excavation into sanitary and storm sewer systems, or to canals and drainage ditches.

G. Pumps and engines for dewatering systems shall be operated with mufflers and a minimum noise level suitable to a residential area. The Contractor shall be responsible for any nuisance created due to the disposal of the water from his discharge system.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF BACKFILL

A. Backfilling of pipe trenches will not be allowed until the work has been approved by the Engineer, pressure tested if required, and the Engineer indicates that backfilling may proceed. Any work which is covered or concealed without the knowledge and consent of the Engineer shall be uncovered or exposed for inspection. Partial backfill may be made to help restrain the pipe during

ER No. S049334 02315 - 8 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

pressure testing if previously authorized by the Engineer.

B. The Contractor shall backfill all trenches and other excavations made in the process of installing the pipe. He shall maintain the surface of the backfill free from major irregularities and potholes. Backfill, up to a point at least one foot above the pipe shall be select backfill material not exceeding 2 inches in diameter.

C. Select backfill material shall be placed under and around the pipe to one foot above the crown in 6-inch layers. Each layer shall be thoroughly compacted to at least 90 percent of maximum density as defined by AASHTO Standard No. T180, "Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils using a 4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm. (18-in.) Drop". The material in the ditch may be compacted by either hand tamper or a mechanized power tamper, provided the results obtained meet the continued approval of the Engineer. Particular attention and care shall be exercised in obtaining thorough support for the branch of all service connection fittings. Care shall be taken to preserve the alignment and gradient of the installed pipe.

D. Backfilling and compacting of material lying above a point one foot above the crown of the pipe and below the pavement base or the surface of the ground, if out of pavement, shall be accomplished in layers not exceeding 9 inches in thickness. Each layer shall be thoroughly compacted with a powered hand tamper or a mechanized power tamper to at least 98 percent of maximum density as determined by AASHTO Specification T180 or such greater density as may be required by the governing authority over the area in which the work is performed. A testing laboratory, designated by the Engineer, will make periodic field tests to determine the density being obtained in each lift, or layer, or the backifll. When compacted backfill fails to meet the specified percentage of maximum density as shown by test results, it shall be reworked and recompacted in a manner approved by the Engineer, and then retested. The reworking, recompacting and retesting of the backfill shall be repeated as many times as may be necessary to obtain compacted backfill with density meeting or exceeding the specified percentage as indicated by test results.

E. The Contractor shall exercise proper care to insure that no pipe will be broken or displaced through the use of the type of mechanical compacting equipment he selects. Water shall be added as required to obtain optimum moisture to facilitate compaction, but ponding or inundation of backfill will not be permitted. These ponding limitations shall not prohibit backfill in a wet trench up to the level of the natural water table if the "Alternate Method of Construction" is utilized.

F. Backfill shall in general be kept up with the rate of pipe laying. The backfill up to the springline of the pipe shall be placed as soon as practical after the laying of the pipe.

G. On parts of the line where ground water level may be high enough to float the pipe, the placing of the backfill and the rate of pumping the trench shall be so controlled as to prevent the pipe from floating or moving from the line and grade

ER No. S049334 02315 - 9 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

shown on the Plans. In the event that sufficient suitable material is not available at any point to properly backfill the trench, the Contractor shall transport suitable material from points of the line where such material is available or shall otherwise furnish suitable material.

H. Suitable material in excess of all backfill requirements and all unsuitable material shall be removed from the work and disposed of by the Contractor.

I. Within paved areas of trench excavation, the base and surfacing shall be reconstructed as specified under Section 02745, "Pavement Removal and Replacement".

J. Where cuts have been made through unpaved, stabilized rock roadways, driveways and parkways, surface restoration shall consist of 3 inches of compacted limerock overlaid by 3 inches of gravel or graded and washed rock with a maximum diameter of 1/2-inch, except as otherwise directed by the Engineer. The rock shall be installed over the entire width of the disturbed area and shall closely match the existing rock at each location. Several grades of rock may be required to attain this end, but it is not anticipated that more than one grade will have to be used at any one location.

K. Backfill for Structures: See Section 02314 “Excavation, Backfill and Fill for Structural Facility and Utility System”, subsection 3.05 “Backfill”.

3.07 INSTALLATION OF PIPE BEDDING

A. As described above, all pipe trenches shall be excavated to a level 6-inches below the outside bottom of the proposed pipe barrel. The resulting excavation shall be backfilled with approved pipe bedding material, up to the level of the lower one third of the proposed pipe barrel. This backfill shall be tamped and compacted to provide a proper bedding for the pipe and shall then be shaped to receive the pipe. Bedding shall be provided under the branch of all fittings to furnish adequate support and bearing under the fitting.

1. Select Backfill material may be utilized where the excavated trench bottom is above water.

2. Pearock, as specified above, shall be used for small diameter (less than 24-inch) pipe bedding (except copper pipe), whenever the excavated trench bottom is at or below water, unless otherwise approved by the Department. It may also be used above water in lieu of select backfill material.

3. Crushed stone, as specified above, shall be used for bedding of 24-inch and larger diameter pipe and/or manholes, under the same conditions as pea rock in 2 above, unless other wise approved by the Department.

4. Sand bedding for copper pipe shall be a dry screened sand.

B. Any excavation below the levels required for installation of the pipe bedding shall be backfilled with bedding material, as approved by the Engineer, tamped, compacted and shaped to provide proper support for the proposed pipe.

ER No. S049334 02315 - 10 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

3.08 COMPACTION AND DENSITIES

A. Methods of control and testing of backfill construction to be employed in this work are:

1. Maximum density of the material in trenches shall be determined by AASHTO Designation T180.

2. Field density of the backfill material in place shall be determined by Florida Method FM 1 T 238.

B. Laboratory and field density tests which, in the opinion of the Engineer are necessary to establish compliance with the compaction requirements of these specifications, will be conducted by the Department's laboratory. Tests will be made at depths and locations selected by the Engineer.

C. Trench backfill which does not comply with the specified densities, as indicated by such tests, shall be reworked and recompacted until the required compaction is secured, at no additional cost to the Department. The costs for retesting such work shall be paid for by the Contractor.

3.09 ALTERNATE METHOD OF CONSTRUCTION

A. General:

1. A combination of conditions in the substrata, water table, or method of disposal may be encountered during the course of the work which make dewatering impossible, or only possible through the use of unusual methods, the cost of which is excessive. When such conditions are encountered, but only after all reasonable means to dewater the excavation have been employed without success, the Contractor, with the concurrence of the Engineer may elect to employ the following alternate method of construction. The concurrence of the Engineer shall be obtained in writing and shall limit the use of the alternate method of construction to such specific portions of the work as the Engineer shall determine.

2. The requirements set forth in other sections of these Specifications shall establish the required standards of construction quality for this work. Use of the alternate method of construction described hereinafter shall in no way be construed as relieving the Contractor of his basic responsibility for satisfactory completion of the work.

3. Subject to all of the requirements stated hereinabove, including written approval of the Engineer, construction will be permitted in accordance with the following specifications. All requirements of these Specifications shall apply to this construction unless otherwise specifically modified herein.

B. Removal of Water:

1. The installation of pipe, manholes and appurtenances under water will be permitted and the requirements of "Removal of Water" will be waived.

ER No. S049334 02315 - 11 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

C. Excavation:

1. Excavation of pipe trenches to the level of the bottom of the proposed pipe bedding shall be performed in accordance with subsection 3.02, “Excavation”, herein.

D. Ductile Iron Pipe and Manhole Bedding:

1. The pipe trench or manhole excavation shall be backfilled to receive the pipe or manhole with limerock bedding material up to the level of the lower one-third of the proposed pipe barrel, or to the outside bottom of the proposed manhole as applicable. This bedding for manhole shall be tamped and compacted to provide a proper bedding for the pipe or manhole, as also specified herein. Bedding material for pipe shall be tamped and graded to provide a proper bedding for the outside bottom of the pipe barrel up to the level of the springline of the pipe. Bedding shall be provided under the branch of all fittings to furnish adequate support and bearing under the fitting. The bedding material shall be as referenced in subsection 2.03, above. Under no circumstances will material other than limerock bedding material be considered satisfactory for use as bedding material for underwater construction.

E. Backfill:

1. After the pipe is installed, backfilling shall proceed in accordance with the provisions of "Backfill", except that select backfill material or pipe bedding material shall be used to backfill around the pipe and to a level one foot above the outside top (crown) of the pipe. Under no circumstances shall material other than select backfill or specified pipe bedding material be considered satisfactory for this purpose.

2. If the Alternate Method of Construction is used, all backfill material, including limerock bedding material, shall be carefully lifted into the trench and released to fall freely therein when the bucket or container is at or just above water level. Under no circumstances shall backfill material be dumped or pushed into trenches containing water. Below the existing water level, backfill material shall be carefully rammed into place in uniform layers. Above the water level, backfill material shall be placed and compacted as specified in "Backfill" and "Compaction and Densities".

3.10 RESTORATION OF EXISTING SURFACES

A. Paved and grassed areas disturbed by the operations required under this Section shall be restored as indicated on the Drawings and/or specified herein.

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049334 02505 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

SECTION 02505

CLEANING AND TESTING OF MAIN

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The Contractor shall furnish all material, labor and equipment necessary to clean and test the force main and/or water main.

B. The material herein specifies cleaning and testing of mains 24-inches in diameter

and less. For mains of diameter greater than 24-inches, the Contractor shall furnish for approval by the Department a written shop drawing submittal detailing materials and methods to be used in cleaning the main. This submittal shall be made in a timely fashion so as not to delay construction and to permit sufficient time for review. If said submission is not approved, the Contractor shall immediately make such changes as are directed by the Department and resubmit.

C. The Contractor is advised that he is solely responsible for any damage caused to

the main or it's lining by cleaning operations and he shall be required to repair or replace, as required by the Department, any damaged pipe or lining.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Prior to cleaning operations, submit in writing to the Engineer, the methodology the Contractor will use to clean the pipe.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA Standard C-600, latest edition. B. Cleaning and testing shall be performed in strict accordance with these

specifications. C. The Contractor is cautioned that Miami Dade County or other governing body

having jurisdiction over the work location may have regulatory rules and ordinances prohibiting or limiting the discharge of water from any excavation into sanitary and storm sewer systems, or to canals and drainage ditches. The Contractor shall comply with all regulations of all governing agencies.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CLEANING

A. As soon as the installation of each run of force main and/or water main is

completed, and prior to installation of valves on the main in positions which would

ER No. S049334 02505 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

interfere with the cleaning operation, the line shall be cleaned to remove deleterious materials left in the pipe by construction.

3.02 TESTING

A. Water for cleaning and testing shall be furnished as specified in "Water Used in

Construction" of Section 01100. The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary pumps, piping and fittings, including the corporation stop, to connect the section under test to the source of water. The test pump shall be a centrifugal or gear pump producing a steady pressure free of pulsation. The Department will furnish a suitable meter for measuring the flow of water into the line. The test pressure shall be 100 psi.

B. The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary pumps, piping and fittings,

including the corporation stops, to connect the section under test to the source of water. The test pump shall be a centrifugal or gear pump producing a steady pressure free of pulsation.

C. All corporation stops in the section being tested shall be opened and left open until

water comes out of them, in order that as much air as possible may be removed from the line. Water shall be pumped into the line through the meter up to the required pressure, and pumping shall be continued to maintain that pressure for a period of 2 hours, or such longer period as the Inspector requires to inspect the line for leaks. Leakage shall be defined as the quantity of water that must be supplied into the newly laid pipe, or any valved section thereof, to maintain the specified leakage test pressure after the air in the pipeline has been expelled and the pipe has been filled with water.

D. The maximum allowable leakage for ductile iron mains shall be determined by the

following formula from the ANSI/AWWA Standard C600 "Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances", latest edition:

L = SD times the square root of P 148,000 where: L is the allowable leakage in gallons per hour; S is the length of pipeline tested in feet; D is the nominal diameter of the pipe in inches; and P is the average test pressure during the leakage test, in pounds per square inch gage.

E. No pipe installation will be accepted if the leakage is greater than that determined

by the above requirements. F. The Contractor shall locate and repair all leaks until the leakage is reduced to the

limits specified. The Contractor may use the leak detector belonging to the Department but shall reimburse the Department for the actual cost of the operation of the instrument by Department personnel. Any observed leaks or any obviously defective joints or pipes shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the Engineer, even though the total leakage is below that specified above.

ER No. S049334 02505 - 3 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

G. The tests and repairs shall be continued or repeated until the Engineer is assured

that the leakage from the section of line under test is less than the amount specified.

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049334 02536 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

SECTION 02536

PRECAST MANHOLES & COVERS

PART 1. GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This section includes minimum construct requirements for precast concrete structures, in general. It also includes precast concrete manhole sections with bell and spigot joints with masonry transition to covering, anchorage, coating/lining and accessories.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS:

A. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete, Formwork & Reinforcing.

B. Section 03600 - Grout.

C. Section 04100 – Mortar for Masonry.

D. Section 05550 - Castings.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. Unless otherwise indicated, all materials, workmanship and practices shall be in accordance with the current editions of the following standards:

1. Florida Building Code. 2. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete 3. PCI MNL 116, Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of

Precast Concrete Products. 4. ASTM C62 - Specification for Building Brick (Solid masonry units made

from Clay or shale). 5. ASTM C478 - Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections. 6. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

Products.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information for approval. Fabrication shall not begin until submission has been approved.

1. Satisfactory evidence that plant and production methods meet the requirements of PCI MNL 116.

2. Complete shop drawings of both concrete structure and castings and showing all dimensions, reinforcement data, concrete strengths, etc. If of a non-standard design or if required by the Engineer of Record submit design

ER No. S049334 02536 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

calculations and data. All computation shall bear the seal of a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Florida.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience.

PART 2. PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Precast manholes shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C478, latest edition, the Miami-Dade Water and Sewer Department Standard Details and the following:

1. Reinforcement of Grade 60 bars. 2. Cement shall be Type II. 3. Minimum shell thickness of manholes shall be eight (8) inches. 4. Lifting holes through the structure will not be permitted.

B. Three to five courses of brick shall be constructed atop the manhole corbel for height adjustment.

C. Joints shall be steel form bell and spigot type. Ram-Nek preformed plastic joint filler, or approved equal, shall be used in filling the of the joint with grout on both inside and outside of the joint.

D. Holes for pipe connections, with a diameter equal to the outside dimension of the connecting pipe plus an additional 4-inches, shall be formed in the manhole walls. No cutting or chipping of the pre-formed holes, or cutting additional holes in the precast concrete walls will be permitted.

E. The bottom slab shall be cast monolithically with the lower section and the longitudinal reinforcement extending into the slab.

F. No construction joints will be allowed below an elevation of four feet above mean sea level. Construction joints will be allowed above elevation+4.0, if adequate keyways and waterstops, approved by the Department, are provided. The Department may approve an alternate joint method in cases of excessively deeper and heavy structures.

G. Built-in ladders or climbing rungs will not be permitted in any sanitary sewer manhole and only in other structures where shown on the Plans and called for in the specifications.

H. Openings shall be sealed with "non-shrink" grout. No "expanding" grout shall

ER No. S049334 02536 - 3 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

be used.

I. Furnish manholes with accessories listed under "Manhole Accessories", below.

J. Lid and Frame: See Section 05550, "Castings".

2.02 CLAY BRICK UNITS

A. Clay brick shall be used in manhole construction. Clay brick shall conform to ASTM Standard C62-91b, "Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale)". Bricks shall have true edges and sharp corners and shall have been cured for at least 14 days before being placed in any wall.

2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT

A. As specified in Section 04100 and 03600, respectively.

2.04 REINFORCEMENT

A. As specified in Section 03300.

2.05 SUMP

A. Where required, formed integrally with the base slab.

2.06 COATING/LINING

A. Unless specified elsewhere, manhole interior coating shall be Carboline Bitumastic 300M or as approved by the Department.

B. All manholes receiving the discharge of a force main shall be lined on all interior concrete surfaces with T-Loc, by Ameron, AGRU "Suregrip" or approved equal (See Section 02615). Lining system shall fully protect openings, such as for pipes, to insure that corrosive attack cannot take place at these locations. Protective system design for these areas will be checked as shop drawings. Note that boot systems are not accepted by the Department.

C. All manhole exterior surfaces, from finished grade to base, shall be coated with Carboline Bitumastic Super Service Black.

D. The Department shall consider, for approval, the application of alternate interior coating systems such as Polybrid 705, by Polybrid Coatings Inc., Georgetown, TX, CIM 1000, by C.I.M. Industries Inc., locally available from Coastal Construction Products, Inc., Miami, FL, Geothane from Futura Coatings, and the like, each on a case by case basis.

2.07 MANHOLE ACCESSORIES

ER No. S049334 02536 - 4 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

A. All new sanitary sewer manholes shall be furnished with the following items. Where existing manholes will be modified or are scheduled to be refurbished, rehabilitation shall also include the following items unless otherwise approved by the Department.

1. Provide manhole frame system sealing system in accordance with Section 02620.

2. Provide protective liner system in accordance with subsection 2.06, B., above.

3. Provide high density polyethylene manhole infiltration inserts in accordance with Section 02625, unless the Department requires the installation of stainless steel insert.

B. Install a heat activated, high shrink membrane, on the manhole's exterior, at each section joint and from the cast iron frame to the corbel section. Membrane shall be Wrapid Seal, by Canusa Corrosion Protection and Sealing, or approved equal with the following properties:

PRODUCT COMPONENT

PROPERTY TEST STANDARD UNIT RESULTS

ADHESIVE Softening Point ASTM E28 Deg. C (Deg. F) 100 (212)

Lap Shear Strength

DIN 30 672 N/cm2 (psi) 8 (12)

BACKING

Tensile Strength ASTM D638 MPa (psi) 20 (2900)

Elongation ASTM D638 % 600

Hardness ASTM D2240 Shore D 46

Abrasion Resistance

ASTM D1044 mg 45

SLEEVE

Peel Strength ASTM D1000 N/cm2 (psi) 15 (9)

Water Absorption ASTM D570 % 0.05

Low Temp. Flexibility

ASTM D2671D Deg. C (Deg. F) -40 (-40)

PART 3. EXECUTION

3.01 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Section 02314, "Excavation, Backfill and Fill for Structures" for specific procedures, requirements and testing methods appurtenant to the work under this Section.

B. Excavation shall extend to a level 12-inches below the level of the outside bottom of the base slab. If necessary, provide sheeting and shoring for the excavation.

C. Backfill resulting excavation with drainfield limerock or specified bedding material

ER No. S049334 02536 - 5 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

to a level to receive the structure at the proper elevation.

3.02 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. The precast base shall be set level, with the walls plumb on the graded crushed rock bedding.

B. If any surfaces of structures are exposed to view and to a depth of 6 inches below grade, the Contractor shall fill all depressions and all air holes with mortar, dampen surfaces, and apply an approved bonding agent then spread slurry, consisting of one part cement and one and one-half parts sand, by damp loose volume, on the surface with clean burlap pads and sponge rubber floats. The Contractor shall remove any surplus by scraping and hen rubbing with clean burlap. Finish surface shall be suitable to receive paint.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF MANHOLES

A. Place base slab and manhole sections plumb and level.

B. During all backfilling operations, the backfill level shall be kept even on all sides of the structure. Exercise every precaution to prevent damage to, or unplanned loading of, the structures and its appurtenances.

C. Lay clay brick in running bond. A minimum of three and a maximum of five courses shall be constructed atop each manhole corbel. Lay masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work. Stucco inside and out with 3/4-inch of mortar.

D. Set cover frames and covers level without tipping, to correct elevations.

E. Exterior surfaces of all structures shall be painted prior to the installation as specified in Section 09900.

F. Openings shall be sealed with non-shrink grout. No expanding grout shall be allowed.

G. After satisfactory installation and testing, all interior concrete surfaces of the new manhole shall be seal coated in accordance with Section 09900.

H. The invert channels of the manhole shall be formed of brick or brick rubble thoroughly bedded and covered with sand-cement grout, accurately shaped to a semi-circular bottom conforming to the lower half of the connecting sewer pipe. Steep slopes outside the invert channels shall be avoided. Changes in size and grade shall be made gradually and evenly. Changes in the direction of the sewer or entering branch shall be a smooth curve with radius as long as practicable.

I. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to assure that the frames and covers are set to match proposed finish paving grades at the manhole locations.

J. Gravity sewers shall connect to the manholes in accordance with Standard

ER No. S049334 02536 - 6 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

Details SS 7.0 and Section UC-250 "Gravity Sewer Systems".

3.04 ALTERNATE INSTALLATION

A. Installation methods given below in this Section shall only apply if permission if granted by the Engineer of Record to use the "Alternate Method of Construction" as specified elsewhere herein. All provisions of that Section shall be applied to the installation of the structures with the specific modifications as follows:

1. Excavation:

a. Excavation shall be carried to a depth of two feet below the bottom of the base slab.

2. Special Bedding :

a. Bedding shall be crushed stone or gravel meeting the requirements of ASTM Standard C33 "Concrete Aggregates", latest edition, gradation 67.

b. The bedding shall be placed in the excavation from cut bottom to the level of the bottom of the slab. Thereafter it shall be thoroughly rammed and tamped by use of a crane and weight or other means suitable to the Engineer of Record to provide a stable base for the structure. Tamping and, if necessary, additional filling shall be carried on until the Engineer of Record is satisfied that a suitably stable base has been created for the structure.

B. Backfill

1. After the structure is installed, special bedding material as specified immediately above shall be carefully hand or machine tamped around the structure up to a level of no more than eighteen inches above the water level. Thereafter the procedures and materials specified for backfill and compaction shall be used to complete the installation.

2. During all backfilling operations the backfill level shall be kept even on all sides of the structure and the Contractor shall exercise every precaution to prevent damage to, or unplanned loading of, the structure or its appurtenances.

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049334 02741 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

SECTION 02741

PRIME AND TACK COATS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The work specified in this Section consists of the application of bituminous material on previously prepared base in accordance with these specifications and in conformity with the line, grades, dimensions and notes shown on the Plans.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Liquid Asphalt for Prime Coat shall be Asphalt Emulsion Prime (AEP) meeting the requirements of DOT. Specifications Section 916-4 and Section 300.

B. Liquid Asphalt for Tack Coat shall be Asphalt Emulsion Prime (AEP), conforming to the requirements of DOT. Specification Section 916-4 and Section 300.

2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. The pressure distributor used for placing the tack or prime coat shall be equipped with pneumatic tires having sufficient width of rubber in contact with the road surface to avoid breaking the bond of or forming a rut in the surface. The distance between the centers of openings of the outside nozzles of the spray bar shall be equal to the width of the application required, within an allowable variation of 2 inches. The outside nozzle at each end of the spray bar shall have an area of opening of not less than 25%, nor more than 75% in excess of the other nozzles which shall have uniform openings. When the application covers less than the full width, the normal opening of the end nozzle at the junction line may remain the same as those of the interior nozzle.

B. Application of prime or tack coat shall be done with a distributor approved by the Engineer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Before applying any bituminous material, all loose material, dust, dirt, and foreign material, which might prevent proper bond with the existing surface, shall be removed. Particular care shall be taken to clean the outer edges of the strip to be treated in order to insure that the prime or tack coat will adhere.

ER No. S049334 02741 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

B. When the prime or tack coat is applied adjacent to curb and gutter, or any other concrete surface (except where they are to be covered with a bituminous wearing course) such concrete surfaces shall be protected by heavy paper or other protective material while the prime or tack coat is being applied. Any bituminous material deposited on such concrete surfaces shall be removed immediately.

3.02 WEATHER LIMITATIONS

A. No bituminous material shall be applied when the air temperature is less than 50 degrees F in the shade, or when the weather conditions or the condition of the existing surface is unsuitable. In no case shall bituminous material be applied while rain is falling or when there is water on the surface to be covered.

3.03 APPLICATION OF PRIME COAT

A. After the base has been finished, the full width of surface shall be swept with a power broom supplemented with hand brooms and mechanical blowers prior to the application of the prime coat. Care shall be taken to remove all loose dust, dirt and objectionable matter. If deemed necessary, the base shall be lightly sprinkled with water immediately in advance of the prime coat. The prime coat shall be applied to the full width of the base.

B. The temperature of the prime material shall be such as to insure uniform distribution. The material shall be applied with a pressure distributor as specified above. The amount to be applied shall be sufficient to coat the surface thoroughly and uniformly without any excess to form pools or to flow off the base. For limerock base, the rate of application shall not be less than 0.10 gallons per square yard.

C. If the roadway is to be opened for use following the application of the prime material, a light uniform application of clean sand shall be applied and rolled. The sand shall be non-plastic, shall be free from silt and rock particles and shall not contain any sticks, vegetation, grass, roots or organic matter. After the sand covering has been applied, the surface may be opened to traffic.

3.04 APPLICATION OF TACK COAT

A. In general, a tack coat will not be used on primed bases except in areas which have become excessively dirty and cannot be cleaned or where the prime has cured and lost all of its bonding effect.

B. No tack coat shall be applied until the primed base or leveling course or new or existing asphaltic concrete has been cleaned and is free from sand, dust or other objectionable material.

C. The tack coat shall be applied with a pressure distributor as specified above. It shall be heated to a suitable consistency and applied in a thin uniform layer at the rate of between 0.05 gallons and 0.15 gallons per square yard.

ER No. S049334 02741 - 3 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

D. The tack coat shall be applied sufficiently in advance of the laying of the wearing surface to permit drying, but shall not be applied so far in advance or over such an area as to lose its adhesiveness as a result of being covered with dust or other foreign material. The tack coat shall not advance ahead of the paving by more than 300 feet in business or residential areas unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Suitable precautions shall be taken by the Contractor to protect the surface while the tack coat is drying and until the wearing surface is applied.

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049334 02745 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

SECTION 02745

PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Work included under this Section covers the furnishing of all labor, equipment and material required for cutting, removing, milling, protecting, constructing, replacing or stabilizing all existing roadways, driveways and pavements and adding any new pavement as required by the Plans, specified elsewhere herein or by permit requirement.

B. All existing utility castings, including valves boxes, junction boxes, manholes, handholes, pull boxes, inlets and similar structures in the areas of trench restoration, pavement replacement and pavement overlay shall be adjusted by the Contractor to bring them flush with the surface of the finished work.

C. Utility crossings across all plant drives shall be repaired as follows:

1. 12-inch stabilized subgrade 2. 8-inch limestone base 3. 1½-inch thick Type I Asphaltic Concrete Mix meeting Miami-Dade County

Public Works Department (Section 133)

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. The phrase "DOT Specifications" shall refer to the Florida Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition. The DOT Specifications, are referred to herein and are hereby made a part of this Contract to the extent of such references, and shall be as binding upon the Contract as through reproduced herein in their entirety.

1.03 DAMAGE BY CONTRACTOR

A. The Contractor shall protect from damage by construction operations, all pavements, including all base courses and surface courses, within the work area.

B. Any base course or surface course beyond those limits, damaged as a result of the Contractor's operation, shall be restored in accordance with the applicable requirements of these Specifications, to the satisfaction of WASD.

ER No. S049334 02745 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIAL, GENERAL

A. Limerock Base: The limerock base shall consist of either one or two courses limerock obtained from local sources where the overburden was removed from the pits prior to mining operations. The limerock shall comply with the requirements of DOT Specifications, Section 200 and Section 911 for Miami Oolite limerock, with a maximum size of the aggregate to be 1½ inches.

B. Prime Coat and Tack Coat shall be as specified Section 02741 - Prime and Tack Coats.

C. Asphaltic Concrete: The materials and construction of the asphaltic concrete patch and surface courses shall be Type S 1 Asphaltic Concrete conforming to Sections 330, 331 and 916 of the DOT Specifications.

D. Sand cover material shall be clean and non-plastic, and shall be composed of hard durable grains, free from loam, roots, silt, clay, or rock particles and other deleterious substances. Local sand meeting such requirements may be used. Sand shall be subject to approval by WASD.

E. Flowable Fill: Flowable fill, as specified in Division 3 - Sitework, shall be used as backfill only where indicated on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. It shall be used for trenches, support for pipe structures, culverts, utility cuts and other works where cavities exist and where firm support is needed for pavements and structural elements.

2.02 BITUMINOUS PAVING MATERIAL

A. Asphalt cement for asphaltic concrete mixes shall be Viscosity Grade AC-20, homogeneous, free from water and shall meet the requirements of DOT Specifications, Section 916-1. Unless otherwise specified, all test samples required shall be supplied by the Contractor. For friction courses, in addition to meeting the above requirements, the bituminous material shall contain 0.5% of a heat-stable, anti-stripping additive from an approved source.

B. Asphaltic Concrete: Type S-I Mix shall meet the requirements of DOT Specifications for Type S-I Asphaltic Concrete, Sections 330, 331 and 916 of D.O.T Specifications.

C. Asphaltic Concrete: Type I Mix shall meet the requirements of Dade County Public Works Department Specifications for Type I Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course, Section 133 of the Public Works Manual.

D. Emulsified Asphalt for Slurry Seal Coat shall be of the slow-setting, mixing type and shall be homogeneous, meeting the requirements of the Asphalt Institute, Grade SS-1 or SS-1h.

ER No. S049334 02745 - 3 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

E. Liquid Asphalt for Prime and Tack Coat: See Section 02741 - Prime and Tack Coats.

F. Liquid Asphalt for Sand and Asphalt Paving shall be asphalt cement, viscosity Grade AC-5 or emulsified asphalt, Grade RS-2 (anionic) conforming to the requirements of DOT Specifications, Section 916-1 and 916-4, respectively.

G. Mineral Aggregate for Slurry Seal Coat shall consist of screened sand or limestone screenings or gray granite screenings or a mixture of sand and screenings plus not less than 3 percent, by weight, of Type I or Type II Portland cement.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Permanent pavement repair shall be in accordance with the details shown in the Standard Details herein, with edges straight and parallel and patches rectangular in plan. Replace any paving, beyond the limits shown in the details and as called for in the Specifications, as required. Where trenches are located out of the existing pavement and damage occurs to the pavement, that pavement shall also be replaced by the Contractor.

B. Pavement markings removed or obliterated by the Contractor's operations shall be promptly replaced.

C. All equipment necessary for construction shall be on the job site in first class working condition. Spilling or dropping of petroleum products is prohibited and all defective equipment shall be removed or replaced immediately. The Contractor shall be subject to all DERM (Department of Environmental Resources Management) regulations and clean up requirements.

D. The percentages of maximum density for subgrade and limerock base specified herein are minimum. Greater percentages of maximum density shall be obtained, if so required, by the governing authority having jurisdiction over the work location.

E. Asphaltic concrete mixtures shall be obtained only from plants which comply with the requirements of DOT Specifications, Section 320 as applicable, using materials specified herein, and producing the specified mixture. General construction requirements for all hot bituminous mixtures specified herein shall conform to DOT Specifications, Section 330, as applicable.

F. Asphaltic concrete shall be laid only where the surface to be covered is intact, firm, cured and dry, and only when weather conditions are suitable. The temperature of the mixture at the time of spreading shall be within limits of Florida DOT specifications or within 25 degrees of the temperature set by WASD. No mixture shall be spread when the air temperature is less than 40 degrees F.

ER No. S049334 02745 - 4 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

G. Any mixture caught in transit by a sudden rain may be laid at the Contractor's risk, if the base is in suitable condition. Under no circumstances shall asphaltic material be placed while rain is falling, or when there is water on the area to be paved.

H. Subgrade: Roadway subgrades shall be stabilized to the minimum depth shown on the Plans to a Limerock Bearing Ratio of not less than 40. Stabilizing shall be Type B as defined in Section 160 of the DOT Specifications. Stabilization may require the addition and thorough mixing in of crushed limerock, course limerock screenings, or any other stabilizing material acceptable to WASD. The stabilizing material shall be applied in such quantity that, after mixing and blending, the subgrade will have a LBR of not less than 40. Stabilizing material shall be mixed or blended in the subgrade material by plowing, scarifying, disking, harrowing, blading and mixing with rotary tillers until the mixed materials are of uniform bearing value throughout the width and depth of the layer being processed.

I. At least three density determinations shall be made on each day's final compaction operations on each course and the density determinations shall be made at more frequent intervals if deemed necessary by WASD.

J. Limerock Base: The limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 911 of the DOT Specifications, to the thickness and width indicated on the Plans.

K. After spreading of the base material is completed, the entire surface shall be scarified and shaped so as to produce the exact grade and cross section after compaction. For double course base, this scarifying shall extend a depth sufficient to penetrate slightly the surface of the first course. The maximum depth of each lift shall be 8 inches.

L. When the material does not have the proper moisture content to insure the required density, wetting or drying shall be required. If the material is deficient in moisture, water will be added and uniformly mixed in by disking the base course to its full depth. If the material contains an excess of moisture, it shall be allowed to dry before being compacted. As soon as proper conditions of moisture are attained, the material shall be compacted to an average density not less than 98% maximum density as determined in more than one course, the density shall be obtained in each lift of the base.

M. During final compacting operations, if blading of any areas is necessary to obtain the true grade and cross section, the compacting operations for such areas shall be completed prior to making the density determination on the finished base.

N. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer of Record, the surface shall be "Hard Planed" with a blade grader immediately prior to the application of the prime coat to remove the thin glaze or cemented surface and to allow free penetration of the prime material. The materials planed from the base shall be removed from the base area.

ER No. S049334 02745 - 5 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

O. If cracks or checks appear in the base, either before or after priming, which in the opinion of WASD, would impair the structural efficiency of the base course, the Contractor shall remove such cracks or checks by rescarifying, reshaping, adding base material where necessary and recompacting.

P. Mixing Base and Subgrade: If at any time the subgrade material shall become mixed with the base course material, the Contractor shall, without additional compensation, dig out and remove the mixture, reshape and compact the subgrade and replace the materials removed with clean base material, which shall be shaped and compacted as specified above.

Q. Asphaltic Concrete: The spreading, compacting and jointing the wearing surface shall be in accordance with Sections 330 and 331 of the DOT Specifications to the thickness indicated on the Plans.

3.02 TEMPORARY PAVING

A. Prior to commencing excavation, the asphalt surface shall be sawcut within the limits of the allowable trench width. Temporary paving will be required along the entire route where the original paved surface is removed. Unless otherwise approved by WASD, temporary paving shall be placed the same day the trench is backfilled. The trench shall be backfilled up to a level one inch below the existing pavement surface and a temporary, cold mixed sand/asphalt pavement shall be constructed up to the level of the existing pavement surface. The liquid asphalt shall be Grade RC-70, conforming to the requirements of DOT Specifications, Section 916-2. The sand shall conform to the requirements of DOT Specifications, Section 902 for fine aggregate.

B. Prior to completion of the work and within a maximum of 30 calendar days, the Contractor shall remove the one inch of cold mix and surplus backfill. He shall replace it with the specified compacted limerock base course and asphaltic within the specified working limits. Municipal agencies permitting this work may accelerate the time for removal of the cold mix, at their discretion.

C. The temporary pavement shall be maintained by the Contractor in a condition satisfactory to WASD until its removal. Removal shall include any surplus backfill material. Replacement of the temporary pavement with permanent pavement shall be made within 30 days. In replacing the temporary paving with permanent pavement, all work shall be completed in sections compatible with specified traffic maintenance procedures.

D. The Contractor may elect to install a suitable temporary hot mix asphaltic pavement, to be left in-place, in lieu of cold mix, when the hot mix asphalt is left in-place and installed over properly compacted limerock base course. This temporary pavement shall be incorporated into the specified permanent pavement restoration as part of Type I paving restoration.

ER No. S049334 02745 - 6 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

E. Sand seal on the limerock base course will not be permitted in lieu of temporary paving.

F. Unless otherwise approved by WASD, temporary paving, shall be placed within twenty-four hours following the completion of backfilling.

3.03 TYPE I PAVING REPAIR (LIMEROCK BASE - ASPHALTIC CONCRETE SURFACE)

A. Type I paving repairs shall be made with an eight inch thick compacted limerock base and a minimum 1½-inch thick asphaltic concrete surface, as detailed in the Standard Details.

B. The backfill previously placed and compacted shall be excavated to the required depth below the existing road surface and the existing paving shall be cut back beyond all excavations, using an abrasive disc saw to trim the edges to straight and true lines, minimum width for the limerock base shall be equal to the trench width plus two feet. Eight inches of limerock base shall be placed in two layers, each layer compacted to not less than ninety-eight percent density in accordance with Section 200 of DOT Specifications. During rolling, the base shall be wetted down, as necessary, to secure the greatest possible compaction. After rolling, the entire surface of the base shall be thoroughly scarified to a depth of not less than three inches and shaped to conform to and be parallel with the existing surface, then watered and rolled again. Rolling and watering shall continue until the entire depth of the base is bonded and compacted into an unyielding mass.

C. If at any time the subgrade material becomes mixed with the limerock base course materials, the Contractor shall, without additional compensation, dig out and remove the mixture, reshape and compact the subgrade and replace the materials removed with clean rock which shall be watered and rolled until satisfactorily compacted.

D. After the limerock base course has been properly prepared and is dry and ready to receive the wearing surface, a tack coat of emulsified asphalt, in accordance with Section 02741 - Prime and Tack Coats, shall be applied at a rate of 0.10 gallon per square yard, immediately followed by the asphaltic concrete. The tack coat shall be applied to the entire limerock base uniformly, and shall thoroughly coat all surfaced. Care shall be taken to tack coat and bond the edge of surrounding pavement.

E. The asphaltic concrete shall be plant mixed, using the best grade of local aggregates of approved size and gradation and mixed with an approved binder and conforming to Dade County Public Works Type I.

F. Where repair width permits, the asphaltic concrete plant mix material shall be placed by means of an approved mechanical spreader and finisher. The mixture shall be compacted to true grade and cross section by means of a tandem roller weighing not less than eight tons. The compacted asphaltic concrete mixture shall not be, in any case, less than one inch in thickness. Rolling shall proceed as

ER No. S049334 02745 - 7 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

closely behind the spreader as possible and all material shall be completely compacted the same day it is placed. The minimum width of the wearing surface shall be the same as the base.

3.04 REPAIR OF DAMAGE PAVEMENT

A. All damage to pavement by the Contractor as a result of Work under this project shall be repaired in a manner satisfactory to WASD. The repair shall include the preparation of the subgrade, the placing and compacting of the limerock base, the priming of the base, the placing and maintaining of the surface treatment, all as specified herein.

B. The width of all repairs within the work area shall extend at least 12 inches beyond the limit of the damage. The edge of the pavement to be left in place shall be cut to a true edge with a saw or other acceptable method so as to provide a clean edge to abut the repair. The line of the repair shall be uniform with no irregularities. Repair of damage by the Contractor beyond the work area shall be approved by the governing agencies having jurisdiction over the work prior to commencing the work.

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049027 02822 - 1 PCTS No. 13997

S-902

SECTION 02822

CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES

PART 1 GENERAL

A. This project is being performance on Miami Dade Aviation Department (MDAD) property, fences concerns should be subject to the requirements of MDAD SECTION F-162 CHAIN LINK FENCES (Refer to MDAD Special Requirements Section F-162 included as APPENDIX B)

PART 2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. The chain link fence shall be paid for at the unit price bid times the linear feet furnishing, replacing, and/or installing. The payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials and for all preparation, erection, and installation of these materials, equipment, processes, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the work.

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049334 02900 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

SECTION 02900

LANDSCAPING

PART 1 GENERAL

A. This project is being performance on Miami Dade Aviation Department (MDAD) property, Landscaping Concerns should be subject to the requirements of MDAD SECTION T-904 SODDING, SEEDING AND FERTILIZING (Refer to MDAD Special Requirements Section T-904 included as APPENDIX B)

PART 2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. Sodding, seeding and fertilizing shall be paid for at the unit price bid times the numbers of squared yards of sodding, seeding and fertilizing added/replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, processes, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work.

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049334 03300 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

SECTION 03300

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE, REINFORCING AND FORMWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Work included: Provide all labor, materials, equipment, fabrication, incidentals, transportation, placing and supervision necessary to complete all cast-in-place concrete work, its finishing, and all related work called for by the Contract Drawings and/or Specifications, or reasonably inferable from either or both, as needed for a complete and proper installation.

B. Related work: Work affecting this Section includes, but is not limited to:

1. Shop Drawings-Per General Conditions and as specified herein. 2. Materials and storage thereof. 3. Reinforcing-Bar and fabric. 4. Accessories of every nature, including form tie system. 5. Formwork and removal thereof, including shoring and reshoring. 6. Concrete proportions and mixes. 7. Placing of concrete. 8. Admixtures. 9. Joints, metal joint screeds and joint fillers. 10. Finishes of all types. 11. Protection and curing. 12. Patching. 13. Laboratory Testing.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Unless otherwise indicated, all materials, workmanship and practices shall conform to the requirements of ACI 301-96 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings", except as modified by supplemental requirements hereinafter.

1.03 STANDARDS

A. ACI 301-10 Specifications for Structural Concrete. B. ACI 318-11 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. C. Florida Building Code, latest edition. D. ACI 117-10 Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and

Materials.

ER No. S049334 03300 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Materials for Concrete:

1. Cement shall conform to the following: Portland Cement ASTM C150, normal, type I or type II. Provide domestic cement of one type and from same source for entire project.

2. Mineral Admixtures:

a. Fly Ash: Shall conform to ASTM C 618. 20% maximum of total

cementitious weight. b. Ground Blast Furnace Slag: Shall conform to ASTM C 989-93. 30%

maximum of total cementitious weight.

3. Chemical Admixtures: The following admixtures are permitted, but require written approval from the Engineer:

a. Air Entraining Admixture: Comply with ASTM C260. "Specifications

for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. b. Water Reducing Admixture: Comply with ASTM C494 "Specifications

for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete, Type A and compatible with air entraining admixture.

c. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: Comply with ASTM C494, "Specifications for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete, Type D, and compatible with air entraining admixture.

d. High Range Water Reducing Admixture: Comply with ASTM C494, "Specifications for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete, Type F or G, and compatible with air entraining admixture. (Including superplasticizer to reduce water content.)

e. Admixtures containing added calcium chloride are not permitted.

4. Aggregates: Shall conform to ASTM C 33 and shall be quarried/mined in fresh water. Aggregates from salt water or brackish water are not permitted. Manufactured sand and screenings are not permitted. Fine aggregate shall be silica (Quartz) sand. Coarse aggregate size shall not exceed:

Concrete member Size

a. Walls 3/4" 67# b. Beams or structural slabs not on ground 3/4" 67# c. Columns and all other concrete 1" 57# d. Drilling concrete pad or slabs on ground 1" 57#

5. In sanitary sewage applications, where called for in the plans and/or

specifications an antimicrobial admixture as specified below shall be

ER No. S049334 03300 - 3 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

utilized:

a. An antimicrobial agent, ConMICShield®, or approved equal, shall be used to render the concrete uninhabitable for bacteria growth.

b. Contractor shall mix the liquid antimicrobial additive with the total water content of the concrete mix design in a proportion of 1 gallon per cubic yard. In the case of repairs to damaged concrete a proportion of 2 gallons per cubic yard shall be utilized.

c. In some instances all of the concrete in the structure in will receive the additive and in other instances only a portion of the concrete will receive the additive. Hence, the Contractor shall apply the additive only as directed in the specific instance.

d. Contractor shall submit a letter of certification to the Department, stating that the correct amount and correct mixing procedure was followed for all antimicrobial concrete.

e. ConMICShield® antimicrobial additive shall be as manufactured by ConMICShield® Technologies, Inc.; 541 Tenth Street NW #233, Atlanta, GA 30318; Phone: (877)543-2094.

B. Portland cement and reinforcing steel: Comply with ACI 301-10 and, with all modifications and supplements thereto listed in Part 3 of this specifications.

C. Burlap mats: Conform to AASHTO Specification M182. (Burleen non-staining

mats.)

D. Epoxy bonding agent: A two (2) component, solvent free, moisture insensitive structural epoxy adhesive conforming to ASTM C881-13 Type II, Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod, as manufactured by Sika Corp., Concresive 1090 Liquid by Master Builders or approved equal.

E. Anchor bolts, nuts and washers: Conform to ASTM A449-10, hot-dip galvanized. F. Dovetail slots: Galvanized steel, 22 gauge, 1"x 1", with 5/8" throat, fiber filled. G. Forms:

1. Plywood Forms: PS-1, B-B Concrete Form, Class I, exterior type, mill

oiled and edge sealed. Thickness shall be as required to support concrete at the rate placed, but not less than 3/4".

2. Steel Forms: Uncoated steel, 3/16"-inch minimum thickness, fabricated to close tolerances, protected only by the specified release agent, braced so as not to dent, bend or dimple under wet concrete loads, vibrator impact and tool impact. Maintain steel forms in rust free condition by use of steel wool and light grinding, followed by coats of the specified release agent. Forms should be adjustable to be brought into true alignment without steps or ridges.

ER No. S049334 03300 - 4 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

H. Form release agent:

1. For plywood forms use a natural non-petroleum base, non-staining and non-retarding release agent that will effectively prevent absorption of moisture and prevent bond with concrete, and leaves the concrete with a paintable surface.

2. For steel forms, use an approved material that will not stain, color or otherwise affect the finish of the concrete. Form coating shall not be detectable on finished surfaces.

3. Round column forms: Provide seamless fiber forms with the three plies nearest to the interior surface of the form deckled or scarfed and overlapped to minimize spiral gaps or seams on the column surface.

I. Form Ties: Steel rod type with integral waterstops and cones, and with ends or

end fasteners that can be removed without spalling the concrete and which leave a hole equal in depth to the required reinforcement clearance, but not less than 2 inches from the formed face of the concrete. Wire tie, banding wire and wood spreaders will not be permitted.

J. Form Inserts:

1. Bevel or chamfer strips: Wood or non-staining plastic, 3/4" wide on each

leg at exposed edges of concrete members, unless otherwise noted on plans.

2. Tongue and Groove Joint Forms: Minimum 24 gauge with steel stakes and splice plates. Forms shall be designed for joints not to receive a poured seal.

3. Pipe hangers and other utility supports: AISI Type 316 stainless steel.

K. Non-Shrink Grout: Non-shrink, non-metallic grout conforming to ASTM C 1107-13 Grade B or Grade C only. Grout must meet ASTM C 1107-13 at a temperature range of 50 F to 90 F at a flowable consistency.

L. Grout for Surface Repair and Bond Coat:

1. For repair, one part Portland cement to two parts fine sand, and a 50%of

water and 50% Acryl 60 or equal (Thoroseal or Acryl Set Bonding Agent by Master Builders) to produce a stiff mortar.

2. For bond coat, one part Portland cement to one part sand, and a 50% of water and 50% Acryl 60 or equal (Thoroseal or Acryl Set Bonding Agent) to produce a slurry mix.

M. Moisture Barrier: Kraft paper and glass reinforcing fibers sandwiched between 2

layers of polyethylene film with a permeance rating of maximum 0.1 as per ASTM E-96-00, Procedure A.

N. Preformed Expansion Joint Filler: Non-extruding type, self expanding cork, 3/4",

1", and 1½" cork (not to be used for sidewalks), conforming to plans or as otherwise noted on drawings, conforming to the requirements of ASTM D1752 -04a (2013), Type II, and compatible with joint sealant compound.

ER No. S049334 03300 - 5 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

O. Joint Sealant Compound: Non-sag, 2 component, solvent free, moisture

insensitive, flexible, epoxy resin conforming to the requirements ASTM C920-14 Type M, Grade NS. Additionally, the sealant must be recommended by the manufacturer to perform under continuous immersion in water.

P. Polyurethane Elastomeric Sealant: Sikaflex-2c, NS/SL or approved equal.

Provide a 2-component, premium-grade, polyurethane-based, elastomeric sealant. It is principally a chemical cure in a non-sag and self-leveling consistency. Sealant shall meet ASTM C-920-14 and Federal Specifications TT-S-00227E.

1. Joint Movement: +50%.

Q. Waterstops:

1. Volclay Waterstop-RX or approved equal. Flexible strip of bentonite

waterproofing compound in coiled form.

a. Chemical Composition:

1) Butyl Rubber-Hydrocarbon: 24.9% by weight; ASTM D-297. 2) Bentonite: 75 % by weight; SS-S-210-A. 3) Volatile Matter: Below 1 %; ASTM D-6. 4) Waterstop shall not contain any asbestos fibers or asphaltics.

b. Physical Properties:

1) Specific Gravity: 1.57; ASTM D-71. 2) Application Temperature Range: 5-125 F. 3) Flash Point: 365; ASTM D 93-97. 4) Accelerated Aging: Maintained 99% solids. 5) Dimensions: 1" x 3/4" x 16'-6"

2. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC): Conforming to the requirements of U.S. Army

Corps of Engineers Specification CRD-C-572 and of the following type:

a. Expansion Joints: 9-inches by 3/8-inch, ribbed center bulb. b. Construction Joint: 9-inches by 3/8-inch, flat ribbed. c. Only where specified on Plans at construction and expansion joints: 9-

inches by 3/8-inch, split ribbed. d. Install waterstops as shown as manufactured structures.

R. Fiber Reinforcement: Fiber reinforcement shall not be used in the concrete

unless ordered by the Engineer in writing. It shall consist of 100% virgin polypropylene fibrillated fiber-dosage of 2 lbs. per cubic foot.

1. Compressive Strength: 1 psi (.006895 M Pa), ASTM C-39. 2. Flexural Strength: 288 psi (2.0 M Pa) after 7 days, 390 psi (2.7 M Pa)

after 28 days; ASTM C-78.

ER No. S049334 03300 - 6 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

3. Splitting Tensile Strength: 194 psi (1.3 M Pa) after 7 days, and 290 psi (2.0 M Pa) after 28 days; ASTM C-496.

4. Source: Fibermesh Micro-Reinforcement System by Fibermesh Company, Division of Synthetic Industries, Inc. Or approved equal.

S. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete

and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Engineer.

T. A shrinkage reducing admixture (Teraguard) or equivalent at the rate of 2.2% by

weight of cement may be used in the concrete to meet the shrinkage limitations. U. To protect the concrete slab against the elements, the Engineer may direct the

Contractor to spray an evaporation retarder on the finished concrete slab immediately behind the cement finishing process at no additional cost to the Department. This is not a curing compound.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work.

3.02 SUPPLEMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. All phases of concrete construction, including materials formwork, and all other related procedures shall comply with the most stringent allowed tolerances of ACI-301 and ACI-117 Standards (Latest Edition) - Non compliance with these standards will cause full rejection of any work done.

B. Comply with ACI 301-10 and with all modifications and supplements thereto

listed herein. In addition to the ACI Standards on finished concrete, the Engineer will only approve quality finished concrete which in his opinion is ready to receive a grout finish, paint or liquid membrane.

C. The following modifications and supplements to ACI 301-10 shall also apply to

the work.

1. General

a. These specifications cover cast-in-place structural concrete for use in buildings and appurtenances, including foundations, curbs, sidewalks, concrete pavements and utility structures, water containment tanks, and piles.

b. Keep minimum two (2) copies of ACI 301-10 "Specifications for Structural Concrete" in field office at all times.

2. Proportioning and Design of Mixes:

ER No. S049334 03300 - 7 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

a. General: Proportion concrete to meet properties as specified.

Prepare mix designs for each type and strength of concrete. Submit with mix design the chemical admixture manufacturer’s statement that the admixture proposed complies with the requirements of this specification. Where concrete of different strengths are specified for the same location, the higher strength concrete shall be used. Concrete proportions shall be established on the basis of previous field experience, or laboratory trial batches as specified in ACI 301-96 Sections 4.2.2 & 4.2.3.

b. Classes of Concrete:

1) Structural concrete of normal weight for portions of the structure

that are required to be watertight containments or tremie concrete, the water/cementitious ratio shall not exceed 0.45 if exposure is to be to fresh water.

2) If the concrete is exposed to salt or brackish water, or if exposed to injurious concentrations of sulfate-containing solutions (1500 ppm or more of Sulfate in water) or other chemically aggressive solutions, use Type II cement with Rheobuild 1000 admixture by Master Builders, or approved equal; water/cementitious ratio shall not exceed 0.34.

3) Other Concrete: (This would be slabs-on-grade, concrete thrust blocks, and miscellaneous concrete). The water cementitious ratio shall not exceed 0.50 to 0.55.

4) Minimum f’c @ 28 days shall be 3000 PSI. 5) Minimum f’c @ 28 days shall be 4000 PSI with a Water/Cement

ratio of 0.45. see 1 above. 6) Minimum f’c @ 28 days shall be 7000 PSI with a Water/Cement

ratio of 0.34. see 2 above.

c. Slumps:

1) All structural concrete, pumped concrete and tremie concrete shall contain a High Range Water Reducing Admixture and be designed with a maximum water content of 270 pounds per cubic yard (32.36 gallons). The initial water slump prior to addition of the High Range Water Reducing Admixture shall be 2-inch maximum. Concrete at point of placement shall not exceed 10-inches. Concrete shall be non-segregating.

2) Slabs including slabs-on-grade, and all other concrete shall have a maximum water content of 287 pounds per cubic yard and have a 5-inch maximum slump with a water reducer, or water reducer and retarder admixture added (34.4 gallons).

3. Formwork

a. Earth cuts are not permitted for forms for vertical surfaces. Footings,

grade beams and slab edges shall be formed. Provide moisture

ER No. S049334 03300 - 8 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

barrier under all slabs on grade. Lap 6-inches and tape punctures. b. The contractor is responsible for the adequacy of forms and shoring

including placing, fill and equipment on roof, and for safe practice in their use and removal. Submit formwork calculations, and shop drawings including shoring and reshoring. In addition, the calculations and shop drawings for formwork, shoring, and reshoring, if required by the Engineer or Building Department, shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Florida.

c. Design forms for the loads and lateral pressures resulting from the placement and vibration of concrete and for design considerations, wind loads, allowable stresses, and other applicable requirements of the South Florida Building Code.

d. Provide form facing materials as required by the specified finish of the formed surface. Do not use facing material with raised grain, torn surfaces, worn edges, patches, dents or other defects. No form may be reused more than three times without the Department's approval. The maximum deflection permitted of facing materials reflected in concrete surfaces exposed to view is 1/240 of the span between structural members.

1) Forms shall be free from surface defects, tight to prevent

leakage and braced to keep its position and shape when filled with concrete. Adjacent edges and end panels and sections shall be held together to provide accurate alignment and prevent forming ridges, fins, offsets or similar type defects in finished concrete. It shall be tight to prevent loss of water, cement or fines during placing and vibrating concrete. The bottom of the forms placed in continuous straight even footings or slabs shall be watertight to prevent loss of water, cement and fines during placement and vibration of concrete, a gasket may be required by the Engineer under the forms to provide water tightness at the Contractor expense. The Contractor shall not proceed to place forms for concrete work adjacent to or on top of previous placed concrete without the Engineer's approval, if the stripped forms reveals columns, walls or beams are out of level or plumb or there are cold joints or other objectionable work in the opinion of the Engineer. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval, how he intends to correct or remove the defective work promptly at his expense. Contractor shall perform such corrections prior to proceeding to place concrete in the next Section.

e. Provide positive means of adjustment (wedges or jacks) of shores and

struts, and all settlement shall be taken up during concrete placing operation. Brace forms securely against lateral deflection. Do not anchor form bracing to poured concrete floors, or make holes in floor.

f. Provide temporary openings in columns and wall forms to limit the free fall of concrete to five (5) feet. Place such openings at no more than eight (8) feet apart to facilitate placing and consolidation of concrete. Elephant trunks may be used to vertical heights of fifteen

ER No. S049334 03300 - 9 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

(15) feet for tremie and other purposes, if approved by the Engineer. Provide temporary openings at the bottom of wall and column forms and elsewhere as necessary to facilitate cleaning and observation immediately before concrete is placed. Blow formwork entirely clean of all saw dust, dirt, or other items not specifically intended to be a part of the final concrete. Any evidence of non-intended items in the forms is considered sufficient cause to stop concreting operation and/or require removal of concrete placed in such contaminated forms.

g. Provide inserts, conduits, boxes, sleeves, anchors, ties, bolts, hangers, dowels, thimbles, nailers, grounds and other devices in coordination with other trades.

h. Set anchor bolts and other embedded items accurately and hold securely until concrete is placed and set. Anchor bolts shall be galvanized and of size and length as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Bolts not sized shall be 3/4-inch diameter.

i. Insert galvanized dovetail anchor slot in forms, in columns, beams and slabs completely around in-fill masonry panels. Coordinate with Section 04220 Unit Masonry, Part 3 Execution, 3.01.J.2.c. for spacing of dovetails.

j. Install wall spools, wall flanges and wall anchors before placing concrete. Do not weld, tie or otherwise connect the wall spools to the reinforcing steel.

k. Do not use pinch bars, wrecking bars or other metal tools against as-cast concrete to wedge forms loose; use only wooden wedges carefully and gradually. Driving shall be accomplished by light tapping.

l. The Contractor is responsible for the removal of forms and shores. Concrete shall be cured in accordance with ACI 308r-01.(Also see section 10 bellow) Do not remove forms or shores before the member has attained sufficient strength to support its weight and the loads imposed, nor sooner than listed below:

1) Wall forms: 24 hours. 2) Column forms: 24 hours. 3) Beam and girder side forms only (not bottom form): 24 hours. 4) Beam and Girder bottom forms: 7 days minimum unless

otherwise approved by the Engineer. 5) Slab forms: 14 days. 6) Arch centers: 7 days. 7) Pan joist forms: 4 days.

4. Reinforcement

a. Prior to fabrication, submit for review shop drawings showing all

fabrication dimensions, bar lists and location for placing of the reinforcing steel and accessories, including spacing of reinforcing, splices (lap, welded, Cadweld and/or mechanically threaded), grade of reinforcing and name of manufacturer. Note all deviations from the Contract Drawings and use the same designation mark as shown on

ER No. S049334 03300 - 10 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

the Contract Drawings where possible. b. Reinforcing bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed bars of USA

manufacturer. c. Welded wire fabric: ASTM A185, galvanized. d. Metal bar supports: CRSI MSP-1, Chapter 3, Class 2, Type B

stainless steel protected bar supports. e. Coupler Splice Devices: Cadweld, tension couplers capable of

developing the ultimate strength of the bar. f. Reinforcing steel upon which unauthorized welding has been done,

shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Department.

g. Place reinforcing bars to the most stringent tolerances indicated in ACI 301 and ACI 117 (Latest Edition). Tolerances specified in those standards shall govern over any other reference code or standard.

h. All reinforcement at time concrete is placed, shall be free of mud, oil or other materials that may affect or reduce the bond. Reinforcing with rust or mill scale will not be accepted without cleaning and/or brushing to remove scale and rust.

i. Support rebar and mesh reinforcing for slabs on grade 1½ inches from top of slab on masonry blocks not less than 4 sq. in., having a compressive strength equal to or greater than the specified strength of the concrete being placed. Space blocks at no more than 4 feet apart each way for rebars, and no more than 3 feet apart for mesh reinforcement.

j. Support reinforcing off from formwork for columns, walls and beams with stainless steel protected bar supports. Support slab reinforcing on #5 bars, or larger, spaced at no more than 48 inches on center. Space individual high chairs no more than 48 inches apart and support bars shall not exceed 24 inches past outermost chairs.

k. Overlap welded wire fabric in such a manner that the overlap measured between outermost cross wires of each fabric sheet is not less than the spacing of the cross wires plus 2 inches or 6 inches, whichever is greater. Do not extend fabric through expansion and/or contraction joints, unless otherwise noted on the Contract Drawings.

l. The minimum clear distance between parallel bars, both vertical and horizontally, shall not be less than the nominal diameter of the bars, or less than 1½ times the maximum size of the aggregate, or 1-inch in beams, or 1½ inches in columns, whichever is greater. Where reinforcement in beams is placed in two or more layers, the upper layer shall be placed directly above the bars in the bottom layer. Misplacement, misalignment or improper length of dowels shall be sufficient cause to require removal and reconstruction of affected work.

m. Unless allowed by the Engineer, bending of reinforcing partially embedded in concrete is not permitted. When permitted, bending shall be in accordance with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.

5. Joints and Embedded Items.

a. Provide premolded expansion joint filler strips of proper width and

ER No. S049334 03300 - 11 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

length as specified in the Contract Drawings. Place ½" expansion joint fillers every 20 feet in straight runs of walkways or sidewalks, at right angle turns and wherever concrete butts into vertical surfaces, unless otherwise noted on the Contract Drawings.

b. Provide waterstops in all construction joints, unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Drawings.

c. Join all waterstops at all intersections so that a continuous seal is provided. Center the waterstop in the joint. Hold water stop positively in correct position. In the event of damage to the waterstop, repair the water stop in an acceptable manner. Vibrate concrete to obtain impervious concrete in the vicinity of all joints.

d. Install waterstop in accordance with instructions of the manufacturer. Prior to use of the waterstop material in the field, submit to the Engineer for approval a sample of each size and shape to be used. Fabricate sample so that the material and workmanship represent in all respects the fittings to be furnished under this Specification.

e. Place all sleeves, inserts, anchors, and other embedded items prior to placing concrete. Anchors and bolts cast in concrete shall be hot dip galvanized or stainless steel. Where permitted by the Engineer, concrete expansion bolts shall be stainless steel and of the wedge anchor type. Take all necessary precautions to prevent embedded items from being displaced, broken or deformed during concreting operation. Protect drains from intrusion of concrete.

6. Placing:

a. Equipment for mixing and transporting concrete must be clean. Forms

shall be thoroughly clean and damp, and reinforcing shall be secured in place. Runaways for transporting concrete shall not rest on reinforcing. When concrete is placed against earth, sprinkle sufficiently before placing.

b. Deposit of concrete in forms no longer than ninety (90) minutes after the initial design water has been added to the cement and aggregates. Concrete which can not be so placed shall not be used and shall be wasted. No additional water shall be added. No retempering with water is permitted.

c. In addition to the requirements of ASTM C94, the concrete delivery tickets shall indicate the cement content and water/cement ratio.

d. During hot weather, proper attention shall be given to ingredients, production methods, handling, placing, protection and curing. Comply with ACI 305R "Hot Weather Concreting" recommendations.

e. Do not place concrete in forms unless the water level is below the concrete to be placed, even if it is necessary to maintain the dewatering, or under rain.

f. Do not place concrete under water except for tremie concrete as called for on the Contract Drawings. Submit for approval plan and details of means and methods for installation of seal tremie concrete prior to commencement of work. Seal concrete which subsequently fails to perform, shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to the Department.

ER No. S049334 03300 - 12 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

g. Place seal concrete under water in the space in which it is to remain, by means of a tremie, a closed-bottom dump bucket of not less than one cubic yard capacity, or other approved method, and do not disturb after it is deposited. Deposit all seal concrete in one continuous pour. Do not place concrete in running water. Design all formwork, to retain concrete under water, to be watertight. Submit shop drawings for the design of formwork and excavation sheeting signed and sealed by a Florida Registered Professional Engineer.

h. The tremie shall consist of a tube having a minimum inside diameter of ten (10) inches, and shall be constructed of sections having tight joints. No aluminum parts which have contact with the concrete will be permitted. The discharge end shall be entirely seated at all times and the tremie tube kept full to the bottom of the hopper. When a batch is dumped into the hopper, the tremie shall be slightly raised (but not out of the concrete at the bottom) until the batch discharges to the bottom of the hopper, after which the flow shall be stopped by lowering the tremie. The means of supporting the tremie shall be such as to permit the free movement of the discharge end over the entire top surface of the work, and shall permit it being lowered rapidly when necessary to choke off or retard the flow. The flow shall preferably be continuous and in no case shall be interrupted until the work is completed. Exercise special care to maintain still water at the point of deposit.

i. When the concrete is placed by means of a bottom dump bucket, the bucket shall be lowered gradually and carefully until it rests upon the concrete already placed. The bucket shall then be raised very slowly during the discharge travel; the intent being to maintain, as nearly as possible, still water at the point of discharge and to avoid agitating the mixture. Aluminum buckets will not be permitted.

j. Do not commence pumping, to dewater a sealed cofferdam, until the seal has set sufficiently to withstand the hydrostatic pressure, and in no case earlier than 72 hours after placement of concrete.

k. Notify Engineer a minimum of 24 hours prior to concreting and request a specific time for observation of reinforcing and formwork for portions of concrete work to be placed. No observation will made by the Engineer until rebar installation for all work to be done and all formwork has been completed and approved by the Contractor's field superintendent. Do not order concrete until all correction and additions indicated by the Engineer have been made. Should the Engineer's observation reveal that work is improperly prepared and an additional observation will be required, he will so inform the Contractor and all above requirements shall also govern.

7. Repair of Surface Defects:

a. Repair all concrete surface defects, which includes, but not limited to

cracks, tie holes (no plastic cones), uneven holes, honey combs, rough frame work and other objectionable conditions deemed unacceptable to the Engineer immediately after form removal. This repair work is to be done for all concrete expose surfaces, liquid applied surface or painted surfaces in or out of the water. Repair all

ER No. S049334 03300 - 13 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

cracks and defects in the concrete floors, beams, joists, columns, and other structural members, roof and walls, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, that may occur up to one year after acceptance of work regardless of the cause. Test unformed, surfaces such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and verify placement tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness. Repair unformed surfaces that contain surface defects which affect durability of concrete. Surface defects, as such, include cracking, cracks which penetrate to reinforcement or completely through non-reinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, pop-outs, honeycomb, rock pockets and other objectionable and rough conditions.

b. Proprietary compounds for adhesion or as patching ingredients may be used, if approved by the Engineer. All structural repair of surface defects to be made require the approval of the Engineer, as to the method and procedure. Approval of the completed work must be obtained from the Engineer.

8. Finishing of Formed Surfaces.

a. Apply rough form finish to exterior walls below grade not exposed to

water. b. Apply smooth form finish to exterior and interior walls and columns

exposed to water. c. Apply smooth form finish to interior walls and underside of floors,

stairs and slabs. d. In addition to the smooth form finish, apply a grout cleaned finish to

concrete walls and surfaces exposed to public view and underside of formed floors, stairs or slabs.

e. Apply a rubber float grout mix to properly prepared concrete surface, only when approved by the Engineer. Mix shall have one part Portland cement to two parts fine sand in a 50% water and 50% Acryl #60 (Thoroseal or Acryl Set) mix or Acryl Set by Master Builders. Make a 10' by 10' sample on the concrete wall for the approval of the Engineer. Finished surface shall be a non dusting hard finish, when scratched with a ¼" metal edge.

f. Finish concrete surface, interior or exterior, below or above water shall include all:

1) Exposed concrete. 2) Grout finished concrete. 3) Painted surface concrete. 4) Liquid membrane finished concrete shall comply with

manufacturer’s requirements. 5) The entire surface of finished concrete shall have a smooth

uniform surface, there shall be no offsets, visually bulges, or wavering in the finished surfaces. The joints must be accurately aligned, they can not be uneven or in or out, a higher and lower, there shall be no fins, projection or unevenness between forms.

6) If after stripping the forms the Engineer determines that the

ER No. S049334 03300 - 14 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

finished concrete does not comply with any or all of the above requirements, the Contractor shall submit his proposal in writing to the Engineer as to his methods of correcting the work at no added cost to the Department, which shall include, but not limited to all grinding of fins, projections, unevenness between joints, form high spots and uneven spots.

7) In addition to all other requirements, concrete surfaces exposed to public view, irrespective of size, area or location shall be completely clean and free of: (1) Stains of any nature, (2) Parts of forms or other wood of any nature, (3) laitance, (4) "Run-downs" of leaked water from secondary pours, (5) Nails, (6) Strips, (7) Ties and (8) all other extraneous, deleterious materials and/or substances which may affect the finished appearance and condition of exposed concrete. Surfaces not meeting the above requirements are to be repaired and treated at no additional cost to the Department.

9. Slabs

a. Unless otherwise noted on the Contract Drawings, place strips

alternately at maximum 20 feet center-to-center and to align with column centerline. Do not place adjacent strips until elapse of twenty four hours after first strip is placed. Place slabs on grade by the "strip-cast" method. Method to be reviewed by the Engineer. Provide saw-cut joints at maximum 20 feet center-to-center and to align with column center lines within four hours of final finishing.

b. Provide doweled construction joints where shown on the Contract Drawings.

c. Provide a hard steel troweled finish, free from trowel marks and irregularities, to slabs and floors.

d. Provide a light hair-broom finish to exterior slabs and floors exposed to public view. Leave hair-broom lines parallel to direction of the slab drainage.

e. Provide a stiff bristle broom finish to slabs and floors with slopes greater than 10 percent. Leave broom lines parallel to slope drainage.

f. Finish exposed edges of slabs, floors and tops of walls with a ¼-inch radius edge unless a chamfer is called for on the Contract Drawings.

10. Curing and Protection

a. Comply with ACI 305 "Hot Weather Concreting", Chapter 4, with the

supplements and modifications to ACI 301 listed herein. b. Only concrete water curing for not less than 7 days (24 hours/day

continuously) will be accepted; Burlene mats shall be used in curing. Water cure by ponding or continuous sprinkling covering complete surface with minimum runoff. The application of water to wall may be interrupted for grout cleaning only over the areas being cleaned at the time, and the concrete surfaces shall not be permitted to become dry during such interruption.

c. Begin all water curing as soon as concrete is set and concrete will not

ER No. S049334 03300 - 15 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

be damaged. Keep concrete and wall forms wet the first 24 hours. Remove forms as indicated in Formwork, Section 3.02-C.4, and continue with 7 day water curing. Recoat damaged surfaces subject to heavy or surfaces damaged by construction procedures within 3 hours of damage. Method of repair shall be approved by the Engineer.

11. Testing

a. Testing laboratory will be selected and paid for by the Department.

Send results of all test to the Department and to the Contractor. The Contractor shall notify the Testing laboratory at least 24 hours before each concrete placing.

b. Obtain and mold 3 specimens for each fifty (50) cu. yds., or fraction thereof, of each class of concrete placed each day or as directed by the Engineer.

c. Cure specimens from each sample in accordance with ASTM C31. Record in test report any deviations from this Standard.

d. Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C39. Test one specimen at twenty eight (28) days for acceptance and, one specimen at three (3) days and seven (7) days respectively, for information. If one specimen in a test manifests evidence of improper sampling, molding or testing, it shall be discarded and the strength of the remaining cylinders shall be considered the test result.

e. Contractors Superintendent shall color code on a set of structural drawings the extent of days work and date to conform to cylinders test.

f. Perform slump test at discharge of mixer, one for each strength test in

accordance with ASTM C143. In the event slump is excessive, testing laboratory will immediately notify the Contractor's superintendent and the Engineer's representative on site. The Contractor shall then reject all concrete with excessive slump and/or deposit time.

g. Drying Shrinkage Test: A drying shrinkage test shall be conducted on the preliminary trial batch with the maximum water-cementitious materials ratio used to qualify each proposed concrete mix design using the concrete materials, including admixtures, that are proposed for the project. Three test specimens shall be prepared for each test. Drying shrinkage specimens shall be 4 x 4 x 11 inch prisms with an effective gauge length of 10 inches fabricated, cured, dried, and measured in accordance with ASTM C 157 except with the following modifications:

1) Specimens shall be removed from the molds at an age of 23

hours ± 1 hour after trial batching, shall be placed immediately in water at 73° F ± 3°F for at least 30 minutes, and shall be measured within 30 minutes thereafter to determine original length and then submerged in lime-saturated water as specified in ASTM C157. Measurement to determine expansion

ER No. S049334 03300 - 16 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

expressed as a percentage of original length shall be taken at age 7 days. The length at 7 days shall be the base length for drying shrinkage calculations (“0" days drying age). Specimens then shall be stored immediately in a humidity controlled room maintained at 73° F ± 3°F and 50% ± 4% relative humidity for the remainder of the test. Measurements to determine shrinkage expressed as percentage of base length shall be reported separately for 7, 14, and 21 days ±4 hours of drying from “0" day after 7 days of moist curing.

2) Drying shrinkage deformation for each specimen shall be computed as the difference between the base length (at “0" days drying age) and the length after drying at each test age. Results of the shrinkage test shall be reported to the nearest 0.001 percent. If drying shrinkage of any specimen deviates from the average for that test age more than 0.004 percent, the results for that specimen shall be disregarded.

3) The average drying shrinkage of each set of test specimens cast in the laboratory from a trial batch as measured at the 21 days drying age shall not exceed 0.036 percent and 0.042 percent at the 28-day drying stage for all concrete.

a) The maximum concrete shrinkage for specimens cast in the field

shall not exceed the trial batch maximum shrinkage requirement by more than 25 percent.

b) If the required shrinkage limitation is not met during construction, the Contractor shall take any or all of the following actions at no additional cost to the Owner, for securing the specified shrinkage requirements. These actions may include changing the source or aggregates, cement and/or admixtures, including Tetra Guard AS 20 or approved equal; reducing water content; washing of aggregate to reduce fines; increasing the number of construction joints; modifying the curing requirements; or other actions designed to minimize shrinkage or the effects of shrinkage.

4) Alkali-aggregate reactivity potential shall be determined in

accordance with Appendix XI of ASTM C 33. Aggregates shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C 289 and C295 to determine potential reactivity. Aggregates which do not indicate a potential for alkali reactivity or reactive constituents may be used without further testing. Aggregates which indicate a potential for alkali reactivity shall be further tested in accordance with ASTM C227 or C1105, as appropriate, using a cement containing less than 0.6 percent alkalies. At the discretion of the Engineer, testing in addition to that indicated in Appendix XI of ASTM C33 may be performed on potentially reactive aggregates. Nonreactive aggregates shall be imported if, in the opinion of the Engineer, local aggregates exhibit unacceptable potential reactivity.

12. Evaluation And Acceptance of Concrete.

ER No. S049334 03300 - 17 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

a. If tests are insufficient or inadequate, test and evaluate by core tests.

Failure of any concrete cylinder to meet specified requirements shall be deemed as non-complying and costs of additional tests to determine the adequacy or inadequacy shall be borne by the Contractor. Concrete rejected for any reason is to be removed and replaced, including labor, forms and reinforcing, to meet specifications at no additional cost to the Department and no additional time extension.

13. Additional Requirements.

a. Submit shop drawings as required per General Conditions and

elsewhere in these specifications. Prime Contractor shall check and approve all shopdrawings prior to submission. Do not fabricate any item requiring shopdrawings until approval of shopdrawings has been granted by the Department. Partial shopdrawings are not accepted, submit drawings for complete submittal.

b. Provide precast or cast-in-place reinforced concrete lintels at all masonry openings and sills at all windows. Reinforce to suit loads and span. Provide minimum 8" bearing at each end and, pour integral with columns where opening abuts columns.

c. Sidewalks in R.O.W.: Provide poured-in-place 4" thick concrete slab, 3000 psi concrete, with continuous 8" deep thickened slab edges. Isolate walks from vertical surfaces with ½" expansion joint material. Provide ½" expansion bituminous joint material flush with top of concrete slabs at 20 feet on center and tooled joints at 5 feet on center. Tool all open edges to a smooth radius and all edges adjacent to the forms.

END OF SECTION

 

ER No. S049334 03375 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902 

SECTION 03375

FLOWABLE FILL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section specifies the requirements for flowable fill used for trenches, support for pipe structures, culverts, utility cuts and other works where cavities exist and where firm support is needed for pavements and structural elements. Flowable fill may also be used to fill water and sewer lines, and fuel tanks placed out of service, and at other locations approved by the Engineer of Record.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

The materials used shall conform with the requirements specified in Division III of the F.D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition, and herein. Specific references are as follows:

A. Portland Cement (Types I, II or III).................................................Section 921.

B. Fly Ash, Slag and other Pozzolanic Materials

for Portland Cement Concrete . .....................................................Section 929.

C. Fine Aggregate (Sand)* ...............................................................Section 902.

D. Water ............................................................................................Section 923.

*Any clean sand with 100% passing 3/8" sieve and not more than 10% passing with 200 mesh may be used.

2.02 MIX PROPORTIONS

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for producing a flowable mixture using these guidelines and by adjusting his mixture design as called for by circumstances or as may be directed by the Engineer of Record.

B. Excavatable flowable fill material shall be proportioned to produce a 28-day compressive strength of 100 psi.

C. General mix quantities are as follows:

Components Pounds per Cubic Yard

Cement 50-100*

 

ER No. S049334 03375 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902 

Fly Ash or Granulated 0-600 Blast Furnace Slag

Fine Sand 2,750

(adjust to yield one cubic yard of flowable fill)

Water 500

(Maximum)

* The percentage of cement may be increased above these limits only when early strength is required and future removal is unlikely.

D. Weights for fine aggregate and water shall be adjusted according to cementious

content. The mix proportions shall be adjusted for removability, pumpability and flowability. If required, strength test data shall be provided prior to batching.

E. If required by the Engineer of Record, the flowability can be measured by

afflux time determined in accordance with ASTM C 939 and shall be 30 seconds ± 5 seconds as measured on mortar passing the No. 4 sieve. The equipment required to perform this test shall be provided by the Contractor.

2.03 APPROVED MIXES OF "EXCAVATABLE FLOWABLE FILL"

FDOT - Approved Design Mixes for Dade County

Plant Mix Number

Tarmac 04-FF-65 Rinker Materials Corp. 04-FF-52 Central Concrete Supermix Inc. 06-FF-41 Cemex 06-FF-48

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PRODUCTION AND PLACING

A. Flowable fill shall be produced and delivered using concrete construction equipment. Placing flowable fill shall be done by chute, pumping or other methods approved by the Engineer of Record.

3.02 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

A. The flowable fill shall be placed to the designated fill line without vibration or other means of compaction. Placement shall be avoided during inclement weather, e.g. rain or ambient temperatures below 40 degrees F. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent any damages caused by the hydraulic pressure of the fill during placement prior to

 

ER No. S049334 03375 - 3 PCTS No. 12348

S-902 

hardening. Also, necessary means to confine the material within the designated space shall be provided by the Contractor.

3.03 ACCEPTANCE

A. The flowable fill shall be proportioned and placed as specified herein. In general, the strength desired is the maximum hardness that can be excavated at a later dated using conventional excavating equipment. No curing protection is required.

B. The fill shall be left undisturbed until material obtains sufficient strength.

Sufficient strength is 250 psi penetration resistance as measured using a hand held penetrometer. The penetrometer shall be provided by the Contractor.

C. All flowable fill areas subject to traffic loads must have a durable riding

surface. D. An approved type of accelerator may be approved for the placement of "Flowable

Fill" in traffic areas when submitted to the Department for D.O.T. approval.

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049334 03400 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

SECTION 03400

PRECAST CONCRETE

PART 1. GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. The work under this section includes the design, casting, delivery, erection and shoring of a precast concrete emergency overflow structure as shown on the Project Drawings.

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

B. Section 01340 - Shop Drawings.

1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of these Specifications all work hereunder shall conform to the applicable requirements of the referenced portions of the following documents, to the extent that the requirements therein are not in conflict with the provisions of this Section:

1. Florida Building Code, latest edition. 2. ACI 318-89, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 3. PCI MNL 116, Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of

Precast Concrete Products. 4. ASTM A416, Specification for Uncoated Seven-Wire Stress-Relieved Steel

Strand for Prestressed Concrete.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator shall be a recognized prestressed concrete manufacturer with minimum five (5) years experience in the manufacture and erection of similar units and whose design, fabrication and erection operations are supervised by a Florida Registered Professional Engineer.

B. PCI Design Standard: Comply with recommendations of PCI MNL-120 "PCI Design Handbook--Precast and Prestressed Concrete" applicable to types of structural precast concrete units indicated.

C. PCI Quality-Control Standard: Comply with requirements of PCI MNL-116 "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Precast and Prestressed Concrete Products," including manufacturing and testing procedures, quality-control recommendations, and camber and dimensional tolerances for types of units required.

ER No. S049334 03400 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

1.05 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall submit shop and erection drawings for approval, showing concrete design strength; unit dimensions; unit weights; size, number, location and stress in prestressing strands; size, number and location of reinforcing bars including reinforcing for erection and handling stresses; concrete cover over reinforcing and strands; bearing and anchorage details; concrete finish; curing method; erection marks; hoist points and shoring points.

B. Design Calculations: The Contractor shall submit for approval, neat, legible and complete design calculations prior to fabrication. Calculations shall be by a Florida Registered Professional Engineer whose seal shall appear on calculation sheets and shop drawings.

1. Calculations shall include predicted in-place cambers without superimposed loads, with superimposed dead loads and with superimposed dead loads and live loads.

2. Details of the weir and interior coatings of the emergency overflow structure.

3. Include bearing and anchorage details including those in the precast sections and those in the job cast concrete structure.

C. Certificates: The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's test certificates on prestressing strands and reinforcing.

D. Concrete Cylinder Tests: The Contractor shall submit copies of cylinder break reports by an approved commercial test laboratory, made from each casting for this project to verify that concrete has attained minimum ultimate prestressed transfer strength specified.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver precast concrete units to Project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure continuity of installation. Store units at Project site to prevent cracking, distorting, warping, staining, or other physical damage, and so that markings are visible.

B. Lift and support units only at designated lifting or supporting points as shown on final shop drawings.

C. Deliver anchorage items that are to be embedded in other construction before starting such work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for installation.

PART 2. PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

ER No. S049334 03400 - 3 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

A. Concrete: Minimum 7 day ultimate compressive strength of 4000 p.s.i. Type II cement. Higher strength will be permitted to suit manufacturer’s design. In other respects, concrete shall comply with requirements of Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

B. Prestressing Strands: High strength 7 wire strand conforming with ASTM A416-74. Elongation test conforming with ASTM A270-75a with minimum elongation at rupture of 3.5% in 24 inches. Tests need not be made if certification of conformance with specifications is provided by manufacturer. Use strand of U.S. manufacture.

C. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, grade 60.

D. Forms: Provide smooth units true to size, shape and detail with flat panes, sharp lines and arises, free from warp, twist, bow or similar distortions, spalling, broken edges, cracks or similar defects. Dimensional tolerances to be as provided in ACI 525 Standards Minimum Requirements For Thin Section Precast Concrete Construction.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. The emergency overflow structure shall be as manufactured by U.S. Precast Corp. Model No. 3-7.5, two product molds, with 4,000 psi concrete (28 days Type II Cement) and grade 40 steel.

B. General: Fabricate units accordance with approved shop drawings and approved design calculations. Conform with ACI Standard Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and the Prestressed Concrete Institute Standards. Fabricator shall design joists and beams in accordance with loads indicated on drawings. Camber under dead load or deflection under total load shall not exceed 1/360 of span.

C. Inserts: Install hanger inserts and sleeves in unit forms for mechanical and electrical items as provided under other sections and as shown on Drawings.

D. Curing: Top surface to receive water curing only.

E. Marking: Distinctively mark each unit with manufacturer's name and mark indicated on erection drawings.

F. Age: Units shall be minimum 10 days old before shipping or erection.

2.03 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANT

A. The joint sealing compound shall be Quik-Seal, a preformed, cold applied, ready to use plastic joint sealing compound as supplied by Quikset Utility Vaults, Santa Ana, California; Ram-Nick by K.T. Snyder Company; or approved equal.

2.04 NON-SHRINK GROUT

ER No. S049334 03400 - 4 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

A. Non-shrink grout shall be as specified in the Section entitled "Grout".

2.05 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Precast concrete units shall be made by an experienced manufacturer and shall be constructed as shown on the Drawings and specified herein and shall be free of defects, checks and cracks. Care shall be taken in the mixing of materials, casting, curing and shipping to avoid any of the above.

A. The Contractor shall notify the Department a minimum of 24 hours prior to casting and when the units have been fabricated and await the Department's consent prior to shipping to the site.

B. The Department may elect to examine the units at the casting yard or upon arrival of same at the site. The Department shall have the option of rejecting any or all of the precast work if it does not meet with requirements shown on the Drawings or specified herein. All rejected work shall be replaced at the expense of the Contractor.

PART 3. EXECUTION

3.01 ERECTION

C. Erection to be by manufacturer and supervised by manufacturer's Florida Registered Professional Engineer or his authorized representative. Handle and install units with precision, in conformance with drawings, details and erection drawings.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Required pads, plates and reinforcing bars shall be furnished for casting and anchorage in the adjoining work. The precast concrete units shall be installed in a workmanlike manner with the units tight and at right angles to the supporting beams or walls. The units shall be aligned and leveled in accordance with the procedures recommended by the manufacturer. Units shall be grouted by a mixture of not less than one part cement to three parts fine sand, care being taken to see that joints are filled. Damp grout that may have seeped through shall be removed before it hardens.

B. All openings in the precast units shall be made by the Contractor and are the responsibility of the Contractor. Where details for an opening are not shown on the Drawings, the opening shall be made in accordance with the recommendation of the manufacturer. When an opening causes a loss in carrying capacity of the unit, the adjacent units shall be designed to carry the additional dead and superimposed load transferred from the unit with the opening. The Contractor shall provide saddle headers as required.

C. Extreme care shall be used to avoid damaging or soiling concrete as no repairing

ER No. S049334 03400 - 5 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

or cutting will be permitted. Damaged units shall be replaced at the expense of the Contractor. Wooden hammers shall be used, with pinch bars being used on unexposed parts only.

D. Grouting Connections and Joints: After precast concrete units have been placed and secured, grout open spaces at keyways, connections, and joints.

3.03 CLEANING AND REPAIRS

A. Cleaning: Clean exposed surfaces of units of stains to a uniform appearance. Do not use caustic or acid cleaners.

B. Repairs: Repair nicks or chips in exposed areas.

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049334 03600 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

SECTION 03600

GROUT

PART 1. GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. The work included in this Section consists of grouting the various items listed hereinafter and indicated on the Drawings.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's literature shall be submitted for review on the following items.

1. Nonshrink grout data shall include grout properties, mixing, surface preparation and installation instructions.

1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Grouting materials shall be delivered and stored in unbroken containers with seals and labels intact as packaged by the manufacturer.

PART 2. PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Five Star Special Grout 150, Sauereisen F-100 Level Fill, Master Builders Masterflow 713, Euclid NS Grout, or equal pre-mixed type.

B. Nonshrink Metallic Grout: Master Builders Embeco 636 Grout pre-mixed type, or equal.

C. Epoxy Grout: Five Star epoxy grout by U.S. Grout Corp., or equal.

PART 3. PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. All bonding surfaces shall be clean and dust and oil free. Grout shall be mixed and applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

ER No. S049334 03600 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

B. Grout Mix proportions (for grout to fill cores in reinforced masonry walls)

1. One part portland cement, Type I 2. 2-1/4 parts damp, loose sand. 3. Parts shot gravel (3/8'' maximum). 4. Mix to conform to ASTM C476-83 with a minimum compressive strength of

2500 psi at 28 days, have an 8" minimum and 10" maximum slump. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Nonshrink Grout:

1. Nonshrink, nonmetallic grout shall be used for grouting precast concrete wall panel connections, column base plates, anchor bolts, reinforcing bars, pipe sleeves, machinery supports and pump base plates.

2. Grout shall be mixed as close to the work area as possible and transported quickly to its final position in a manner which will not permit segregation of materials.

3. Nonshrink grout shall be cured with water saturated burlap for at least three days or with an application of Super Rez Seal cure and seal compound applied immediately after grout placement.

4. Machinery set on grout pads shall not be operated until the grout has cured for at least 24 hours.

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049334 04100 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

SECTION 04100

MORTAR FOR MASONRY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Mortar shall conform to the property or proportion requirements of ASTM C270-89. Non-load bearing and load-bearing concrete masonry shall be laid in mortar type M.

1.02 STANDARDS

A. National Concrete Masonry Association Specifications for the Design and Construction of Load Bearing Concrete Masonry.

B. American National Standard Building Code requirements for reinforced masonry.

C. National Concrete Masonry Association, T.E.K. Series.

D. American Society for Testing and Materials, ASTM.

E. South Florida Building Code.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS

A. 01410 - "Testing and Testing Laboratory Services."

B. 03300 - "Cast-In-Place Concrete, Reinforcing and Formwork."

C. 04150 - "Joint Reinforcement."

D. 04220 - "Unit Masonry."

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340 - Shop drawings, Product Data and Samples. Include design mix, required environmental conditions, and admixture limitations.

B. Reports: Submit reports on mortar indicating conformance of mortar to property requirements of ASTM C270, "Mortar for Unit Masonry."

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to the requirements of South Florida Building Code.

ER No. S049334 04100 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

B. Perform work in accordance with American Concrete Institute (ACI), ACI 530, Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures, and ACI 530.1, Specifications for Masonry Structures.

C. The provisions of ACI 530 and 530.1, are to be followed as a minimum, however, the ACI requirements, shall not supersede the specific requirements of South Florida Building Code, Chapter 27.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600 - Material and Equipment Shipment, Handling, Storage, and Protection.

B. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, and foreign matter.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Portland cement: ASTM C150-89, Type I.

B. Masonry cement: ASTM C91-89, Type II, white or gray.

C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207-79(1988), Type S.

D. Sand: ASTM C144-89, sharp, natural sand mined in fresh water, hard durable grains, free of soft, flaky particles, salt, alkalis and organic material. Salt water sand strictly prohibited.

E. Water: Potable.

F. Waterproofing additive: Omicron mortar-proofing as manufactured by the Master Builders Co.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 MIXES

A. Mortar for Masonry Walls and Partitions: Cement mortar mix for all unit masonry work shall be according to ASTM C270-89, Type M, 2500 psi minimum compressive strength at 28 days.

B. Mortar For Glass Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, Type S, using the Property specification.

C. Mortar Mix proportions:

ER No. S049334 04100 - 3 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

1. One part portland cement. 2. One quarter part hydrated lime. 3. 3 to 4 parts of damp loose sand. 4. Water: Sufficient for workable mix. Retempering not permitted. 5. Waterproofing additive: Add to mix for all exterior walls. Follow

manufacturer's recommendations.

D. Grout Mix proportions (for grout to fill cores in reinforced masonry walls).

1. One part portland cement, Type I 2. 2-1/4 parts damp, loose sand. 3. 2 Parts shot gravel (3/8'' maximum). 4. Mix to conform to ASTM C476-83 with a minimum compressive strength

of 2500 psi at 28 days, have an 8" minimum and 10" maximum slump.

E. Colors: Natural.

F. Mixing:

1. Measurement of materials shall be such that the specified proportions are controlled and accurately maintained.

2. Initially, sand and cement shall be thoroughly dry mixed, hydrated lime then added to the mix and then water to obtain a proper working consistency. Materials shall be evenly distributed and dry as good workability will allow.

3. Workability or consistency of mortar on the board shall be sufficiently wet to be worked under the trowel. Water for tempering shall be available on the scaffold at all times.

4. Mortar which has begun to set or has stood for more than one hour shall be discarded and in no event shall an unbalanced or stale mix be retempered or used.

5. Mix all cementitious materials and sand in mechanical batch mixer for minimum of 5 minutes. Adjust consistency of mortar to satisfaction of mason but add only as much water as is compatible with convenience in using mortar. If mortar begins to stiffen from evaporation or from absorption of part of mixing water, retemper mortar immediately by adding water, and remix mortar to restore it's workability. Re-temper only within two hours of mixing.

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049334 05120 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

SECTION 05120

STRUCTURAL STEEL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Structural steel members.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Painting - Section 09900.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following for review and approval:

1. Shop drawings and erection drawings with indexes for structural steel. 2. Shop paint manufacturer's data. 3. Welder’s qualifications. 4. Torque wrench calibration equipment. 5. Electrode data. 6. Mill tests. 7. Shop quality control program. 8. Erection procedures. 9. Connection design computations.

1.04 STANDARDS

A. Comply with the following standards and standard specifications unless indicated or specified otherwise.

1. The “Florida Building Code", Dade County Edition, (FBC). 2. The "Manual of Steel Construction", "American Institute of Steel

Construction, Inc." (AISC) Latest Edition, including:

a. Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings.

b. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. c. Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 bolts.

3. "American Welding Society" (AWS) - Structural Welding Code, AWS D1.1. 4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

a. ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Structural Steel. b. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for High Strength Bolts for

Structural Steel Joints, including Suitable Nuts and Plain Hardened

ER No. S049334 05120 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

Washers. c. ASTM A490 - Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered

Alloy for Structural Steel Joints. d. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Externally

Threaded Standard Fasteners. e. ASTM A572 - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy

Columbium - Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality. f. Other ASTM Standard Specifications enumerated in the

"Standards" of this paragraph; use Standard Specification in effect as of date of bid.

B. Where the provisions of AWS are in conflict with AISC, the provisions of AISC will control.

1.05 TOLERANCES

A. The tolerances for framing tolerances in Section 7 of the "Code of Standard Practice" is modified as follows:

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ROLLED SHAPES

A. Provide rolled shapes of all weights in accordance with ASTM A572 Grade 50, unless specifically indicated or specified otherwise.

2.02 ANCHOR BOLTS

A. ASTM A307 with regular series hexagonal head nuts, unless otherwise indicated.

2.03 NUTS AND BOLTS EXCEPT ANCHOR BOLTS

A. ASTM A325 except where specifically indicated to be ASTM A490. Washers as required. Bolts including washers and nuts connecting hot dipped galvanized shapes shall be galvanized where exposed.

2.04 ELECTRODES

A. According with requirements of E70 or F7 series, as appropriate.

2.05 SHOP PAINT

A. Oil paint, with rust inhibitive pigment, compatible with sprayed-on fireproofing (07253) and finish coats (09900).

2.06 PIPE

A. Pipe shall comply with ASTM A501, Fy = 36KSI or ASTM A53,Types E or S,

ER No. S049334 05120 - 3 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

Grade B, Fy = 35KSI.

2.07 STRUCTURAL TUBING

A. Structural tubing to comply with ASTM A500, Grade B, Fy = 46KSI.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE HEREIN

A. Comply with AISC specifications and the "Standards" of referred to herein for the fabrication and erection.

3.02 CONNECTIONS

A. Shop connections shall be welded or bolted at the option of the Contractor, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Field connections shall be bolted except where specifically indicated to be welded. Field moment connections may be welded.

C. Bolts shall be ASTM A325, friction type, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Connections shall be as generally indicated where the complete connection is shown.

E. Connections not detailed will be designed by the Contractor for the controlling stresses indicated utilizing AISC requirements.

F. Minimum connection is two 3/4 inch diameter ASTM A325 bolts or equivalent in weld, (15.5K).

G. For framed connections in non-composite construction and for beams without concentrated loads, where reactions are not indicated, design the connection for one-half of the total uniform load capacity of the beam shown in "Tables for Allowable Loads on Beams," AISC.

H. Where moment connection or continuous framing is indicated, design connections for the moment indicated, but not less than 50% of the moment capacity, however, where the design moment is not given, design the connection for 100% of the moment capacity. All moment connections shall be Type l, rigid frame.

I. Columns shall be detailed as indicated, bearing surfaces shall be finished (planed).

J. Moment connections, shop or field, shall not have bolts thru the top flange plates (because of interference with the metal decking).

ER No. S049334 05120 - 4 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

K. Stiffened seats unless indicated are prohibited unless the Contractor verifies that architectural clearances are maintained and that interferences with any and all ele-ments of the building will not occur.

L. "Nelson" type studs for decking are provided in Section 05310.

3.03 SHOP CLEANING

A. Clean all steel to the requirements of SSPC-SP2.

3.04 SHOP PAINTING

A. Shop paint all steel except steel intended to be encased in concrete and steel to be hot dipped galvanized.

3.05 ERECTION MARKS

A. Column marks shall be the column number assigned on the structural drawings supplemented by tier or level number.

B. Beam marks shall be prefixed by floor or level number.

3.06 HOT DIP GALVANIZE AFTER FABRICATION

A. Hot dip galvanize after fabrication according to ASTM A123, ASTM A385 and ASTM A386, all steel exposed to the weather. Erect those members with galvanized A325 bolts. Seal weld all members to be hot dipped galvanized.

3.07 CAMBER

A. Shop or mill camber all beams indicated.

3.08 TESTING

A. The Owner may elect to inspect the Work in the shop or in the field or both by non-destructive means as specified herein. The Contractor will make no claim for extra work or delay using as a basis the inspection or non-inspection of the Work by the Owner.

B. Welding Inspection:

1. The Inspector designated by the Owner will assume the duties and responsibilities of the "Inspector" specified in Chapter Six of AWS D1.1.

2. Acceptance Criteria:

a. Visual: AWS D1.1 Paragraph 3.7 and 8.15. b. Radiographic, ultrasonic, magnetic particle and dye penetrant:

AWS D1.1 paragraph 8.15. c. Where more than one type of testing is used, acceptance criteria

ER No. S049334 05120 - 5 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

are passing all testing procedures used.

3. The Inspector will spot inspect by ultra sonic means one hundred percent (one spot per weld) of all tension groove welds and 50% of all compression groove welds shop and field. Where the metal thickness is less than 5/16", radiographic spot testing shall be used.

4. The Inspector will inspect by visual rules all welds. 5. The Inspector may use radiographic means where ultrasonic testing is not

feasible. 6. The Inspector may supplement any of the above testing with dye

penetrate, magnetic, radiographic or ultra sonic means. 7. The Contractor shall be responsible for all associated costs of the

inspections including handling, surface preparation and repair of discontinuities.

C. The Contractor shall provide ladders or other means of access to the joints in the field.

D. Bolting Inspection: The Inspector will test the bolts in the shop and in the field by methods specified in "Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049334 05550 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

SECTION 05550

CASTINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This section specifies castings for use in this project, including manhole frames and covers, and both water and sewer valve boxes and covers. It also establishes casting requirements, including tolerances, on all castings to be furnished and installed under this project.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 02536 - Precast Manholes & Covers

1.03 REFERENCES

A. Unless otherwise indicated, all materials, workmanship and practices shall be in accordance with the current edition of the ASTM A48, "Gray Iron Castings", Class 30.

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing of products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. Non-domestic castings shall conform with all marking and other requirements contained in federal and state statutes.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Shop drawings shall be furnished for all castings supplied and said drawings shall include certified dimensions and weights of all components. Dimensions shall conform to Department Standard Detail requirements.

B. Finish casting dimensions shall be held to the following tolerances: Up to 4 inches, ±1/32 inch; 4 to 8 inches, ±3/64 inch; 8 to 12 inches, ±1/16 inch; 12 to 24 inches ±1/8 inch; above 24 inches, add the appropriate (minimum) value from those given above to ±1/8 inch. Note that this shall not affect the requirement that mating surfaces shall be machined and shall bear for their full length. Components shall be interchangeable with new and existing units without exceeding the tolerance specified above.

ER No. S049334 05550 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

C. Weight of castings supplied shall not vary more than ±5 percent from the certified weight supplied by the Contractor as a part of his shop drawings.

D. The foundry's name (and if not domestically produced, foundry's name and country) shall be cast in the bottom of each lid. Body and lid or frame and cover shall be manufactured by the same foundry. Manufacture of the various components comprising one set, such as for example; a valve box and lid, by different manufacturers is expressly forbidden.

E. Note that name cast into the bottom of the lid shall be the name of the actual foundry doing the casting. Name of an importing, purchasing or fabricating (from components) firm will not be acceptable. Methods of attaching this information other than casting are not acceptable.

F. With the shop drawings of each component, submit the name, address and county of the foundry producing the component. Further, this foundry shall not be changed during the course of the Contract without written previous notification of and written permission from the Chief, Engineering Division, Miami-Dade Water and Sewer Department.

G. Each shipment of castings provided by the Contractor shall be accompanied by a certification specifically stating that the materials of that shipment comply with all requirements of this Specification, specifically including dimensions and tolerances, materials of manufacture, weights of components, marking and foundry of origin. This certification shall be signed, dated and sealed by a registered professional engineer licensed to practice in state where the materials are cast or if not of domestic manufacture in the state where the supplying firm is located. One original of this certification shall be shipped with the materials and one original shall be sent to Supervisor, Specifications Unit, Miami-Dade Water and Sewer Department, P.O. Box 330316, Miami, Florida 33233-0316. Shipments sent without the certification as required above may not be accepted.

H. Contractor's should be aware that it is the intent of the Department to periodically check materials supplied for conformance to these specifications to include materials testing, dimensions and tolerances, component weights, marking, finish and fit, and such other matters as are necessary to assure supply of products meeting our requirements. Random testing of materials supplied will be at Department expense if passed. Any retesting due to material not passing tests will be at the supplier's expense.

2.02 CASTINGS AND MATERIAL, GENERAL

A. General materials used in the manufacture of the castings shall conform to ASTM Standard A48, "Gray Iron Castings", latest edition, for Class 30 iron. Manhole and valve box covers shall have a roadway type surface, machined mating surface and shall be non-rocking.

B. Castings shall be furnished unpainted with shotblasted finish.

ER No. S049334 05550 - 3 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

C. Castings shall be as manufactured by U.S.F. Fabrication, Inc., Neenah Foundry, or approved equal.

2.03 MANHOLE FRAMES AND COVERS

A. Manhole frames and covers shall be Department Type "A" with roadway cover, U.S.F.F. No. 310 or approved equal. (See Miami Dade Water and Sewer Department's Standard Detail SS 4.0) The covers shall be cast labeled "Sanitary Sewer".

2.04 VALVE BOXES AND COVERS – SEWER

A. Valve boxes and covers for sewer applications shall be Department No. 53, in accordance with the Standard Details. Valve box covers shall be cast labeled with the letter "S".

2.05 VALVE BOXES AND COVERS – WATER

A. Valve boxes and covers for water applications shall be Department Nos. 2 and 3, in accordance with the Standard Details. Valve box covers shall be cast labeled with the letter "W".

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Castings with cracks or other defects shall not be installed in the work.

B. The use of sloped asphaltic concrete ramp rings will not be permitted.

C. The Contractor shall provide all barricades, signs and flashing warning lights necessary to warn pedestrians and motorists of the construction along the entire route of the project.

D. Frames and covers or valve boxes and covers shall be set accurately to grade to conform to the finished grade of the adjacent areas.

E. Castings level without tipping, to correct elevations.

F. Manhole frames and covers shall be with a minimum of 3 and a maximum of 5 courses of brick provided as a leveling course.

G. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to assure that castings are set to match existing and/or proposed finish paving grades.

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049334 09900 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

SECTION 09900

PAINTING

PART 1. GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, material, tools, ladders, scaffolding, appurtenances and equipment required to complete all painting for the entire project, including painting of aerial crossings and painting required during pump station construction.

B. All painting shall be done by skilled workmen, in accordance with the best practice of the trade, who will be required to do a first class job in every respect. Wherever “specialty paint" or other painter's material is mentioned herein by trade name or by manufacturer's name for a specific location, material, surface, or service condition, it is mentioned as a standard of comparison only and it is not intended that products by other manufacturers for like purposes may not be used if approved by the Department.

C. Paint and finish interior and exterior exposed items, walls, below grade foundations, miscellaneous metal, posts, pipes, fittings, valves, equipment, and all other work obviously required to be painted unless otherwise specified herein or on the Drawings.

D. "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems, materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. The Contractor shall use the coating protective system as defined herein, as is applicable to the particular surface. Some of the surfaces defined herein may not be used for this project. . Submit with shop drawings the system class classification proposed in an explicit and clean form.

E. The following items will not be painted or painted over:

1. Code-requiring labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual, and equipment identification, performance rating, name or nomenclature plates.

2. Moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Traffic stripes on paving. 4. Aluminum guardrails, walkways, windows, door, and gratings. 5. Stainless steel angles, tube, pipe, etc. 6. Products with polished chrome, aluminum, nickel or stainless steel

finish. 7. Flexible couplings, lubricated bearing surfaces, insulation and metal and

ER No. S049334 09900 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

plastic pipe interiors. 8. Plastic switch plates and receptacle plates. 9. Signs and nameplates. 10. Finish hardware. 11. Top and inside concrete surfaces of the parapet.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. All painting material brought on the job shall be in the original unopened containers bearing the manufacturer's label and shall be mixed or thinned and applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Any painting material brought to the job in opened containers shall be rejected.

B. Provide the best quality grade of the various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by approved paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying the manufacturer's identification as a standard, best-grade product will not be acceptable.

C. Provide undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits.

D. Undercoat and finish coat paints shall be compatible.

E. Painting shall be accomplished by experienced painters specializing in industrial painting familiar with all aspects of surface preparations and applications required for this project.

F. Regardless of any dry film thickness recommended by the manufacturer, all paint must completely cover the surface, to the satisfaction of the Department, in such form that the undersurface does not show through.

1.03 REGULATIONS, REFERENCES AND STANDARDS

A. All painting work shall conform to the following (latest edition):

1. South Florida Building Code (SFBC). 2. Code of Federal Regulations (CRF):

a. 29 CFR Part 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Standards (OSHA).

b. 29 CFR Part 1926, Occupational Safety and Health Standards (OSHA), Construction Industry Standards.

3. National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE). 4. Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (PDCA).

1.04 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE

ER No. S049334 09900 - 3 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

A. Deliver all materials to the job site in original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label.

1. Provide labels on each container with the following information:

a. Name or title of material. b. Federal Specification number (if applicable). c. Manufacturer's name. d. Manufacturer's stock number and color. e. Generic type. f. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents. g. Application instructions.

2. Containers shall be clearly marked to indicate any hazards connected with the use of the paint and steps which should be taken to prevent injury to those handling the product.

B. All containers shall be handled and stored in such a manner as to prevent damage or loss of labels or containers.

C. The Contractor shall designate areas for storage and mixing of all painting materials. Such area shall be kept clean and neat and every precaution taken to prevent all danger of fire. Comply with the requirements of pertinent codes and fire regulations. Proper containers outside of the building shall be provided by the Contractor and used for painting wastes. No drains or plumbing fixtures shall be used for this purpose.

D. Used rags shall be removed every night and every precaution taken against spontaneous combustion. Oily rags and papers shall not be left in the area overnight unless placed in covered metal cans.

1.05 JOB CONDITIONS & ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations as to environmental conditions under which coatings and coating systems can be applied.

B. Do not paint in areas where dust is being generated.

C. Be responsible for the safety of Contractor's Employees, and provide adequate ventilation, safety masks, explosion proof equipment, and all other items necessary for this purpose.

D. All work shall be carefully protected while painting is going on, using suitable cover cloths where necessary. Any work defaced or damaged by the painters shall be made good by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for cleaning all accidentally spilled materials such as paint, varnish, plaster, stucco and concrete from the structures and equipment, and shall leave the work in complete and perfect condition in every detail.

ER No. S049334 09900 - 4 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

E. The Contractor shall assure himself that the surfaces are in proper condition to receive paint and shall guarantee paint against peeling and discoloration due to faulty application or workmanship, in accordance with the terms of the Maintenance Bond.

PART 2. PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Where any surface is acid etched, it shall be water flushed and left until perfectly dry before any paint is applied.

B. Compatibility between shop coats and field coats shall be the Contractor's responsibility

C. Finish colors and tints, other than specified, shall be as approved by the Department and shall conform with the Department's current color scheme. The Contractor shall tint each coat differently to assist the Department in checking work progress and to help in the elimination of holidays.

D. All work shall be carefully protected while painting is going on, using suitable cover cloths where necessary. The Contractor shall be responsible for cleaning all accidentally spilled materials such as paint, shellac, varnish, plaster, stucco and concrete from the structures and equipment, and shall leave the work in complete and perfect condition in every detail. The Contractor shall assure himself that the surfaces are in proper condition to receive paint and shall guarantee paint against peeling and discoloration due to faulty application or workmanship.

2.02 MATERIALS

E. All paint shall be manufactured by one of the following and shall be their highest grade of paint:

1. Sherwin Williams, Cleveland, OH. 2. Somay Product, Inc., Miami, FL. 3. Ameron Protective Coatings, Brea, CA. 4. Pratt and Lambert, Inc., Buffalo, NY. 5. Rustoleum Corp., Evanston, IL. 6. Thoro Systems, Miami, FL. 7. Tnemec Coatings, Kansas City, MO. 8. Requests for approval of other paint manufacturers and materials other

than specified shall be submitted to the Department for approval.

F. The following coating systems list a product by name to establish a standard of quality; other products of the same generic types may be submitted to the Department for approval. When other than the specified coating system is proposed, the Contractor shall submit on a typewritten list giving the proposed

ER No. S049334 09900 - 5 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

coatings, brand, trade name, generic type and catalog number of the proposed system.

G. Paint used in successive field coats shall be produced by the same manufacturer. Paint used in the first field coat over shop painted or previously painted surfaces shall cause no wrinkling, lifting, or other damage to underlying paint and should cover completely the previous color.

H. Emulsion and alkyd paints shall contain a mildewcide and both the paint and mildewcide shall conform to OSHA and Federal requirements.

I. Finish coats containing lead shall not be allowed. Oil shall be pure boiled linseed oil.

J. Rags shall be clean painters' rags, completely sterilized.

K. Precast sanitary sewer manholes shall be coated on the exterior and coated or lined on the interior as specified in Section 02536, "Precast Manholes & Covers".

2.03 PAINTING, PIPING AND PUMP STATION PROJECTS

L. Painting for piping or pump station projects shall be as specified, and as listed below, using the materials specified, or approved equals:

AREA NEUTRALIZE OR PASSIVATE

PRIME FINISH

Exposed exterior concrete stucco and masonry. (Paint shall extend a minimum of 6 inches below finished grade where grass or natural ground abuts surface.)

None None 2 coats, Somay No. 630, Exterior, Antique Ivory 3867

Exposed interior concrete ceiling, walls, equipment bases in dry well.

10% solution of muriatic acid.

None 3 coats of Kop-Coat Ponkote 300 enamel.

Exposed interior metal work, other than gratings, ladders or not specifically mentioned below.

Kop-Coat Passivator No. 40

One coat Rustbond Penetrating Sealer SG by Carboline

2 coats of Kop-Coat Ponkote 300 enamel.

ER No. S049334 09900 - 6 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

AREA NEUTRALIZE OR PASSIVATE

PRIME FINISH

All interior concrete surfaces of the wet well.

Lined or coated in accordance with Section UC-570.

Exterior surfaces of wet well and manholes, wet well and manholes, which must be coated prior to installation.

Concrete must be clean and thoroughly dry.

None 2 coats of Carboline Bitumastic 300-M, each coat having a minimum dry film thickness of 8 mils.

All interior concrete surfaces of new manholes.

Lined or coated in accordance with Section 02536.

Steel and cast iron piping, valves, supports and appurtenances other than those specified above.

Kop-Coat 40 Passivator, if galvanized. Kop-Coat Inertol Tar Stop Primer, if tar coated. Sandblast if needed.

2 coats Rustbond Penetrating Sealer SG by Carboline

Somay 237 Enamel or Sherwin Williams Industrial Enamel 354 Series.

Emergency connection support brackets, and suction piping in the wet well.

None None 2 coats of Carboline

Bitumastic

Black steel pipe and pipe embedded in concrete.

None None 1 coat of Carboline Bitumastic

(b) above ground None 2 coats Rustbond Penetrating Sealer SG by Carboline

Somay 237 Enamel or Sherwin Williams Industrial Enamel 354 Series.

Exposed interior Kop-Coat 40 2 coats Somay 237

ER No. S049334 09900 - 7 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

AREA NEUTRALIZE OR PASSIVATE

PRIME FINISH

metal work, except aluminum, stainless steel, and other items specifically mentioned below.

Passivator, if Passivator, if galvanized. Kop-Coat Inertol Tar Stop Primer, if tar coated. Sandblast if needed.

Rustbond Penetrating Sealer SG by Carboline

Enamel or Sherwin Williams Industrial Enamel 354 Series.

Aluminum surfaces in contact with steel (except stainless steel) concrete or grout

None, except metal must be clean, dry and free from oil, dust or other foreign material

None 2 Coats of Carboline

Aluminum surfaces other than above.

None None None

Galvanized metal Per paint manufacturer's recommendation.

Carboline 340 Gold Primer.

Carboline Rustarmor 500.

2.04 MISCELLANEOUS PAINT APPLICATIONS

M. Paint all exposed surfaces scheduled for painting whether or not colors are designated in schedules, except where the natural finish of material is obviously intended and specifically noted as a surface not be painted. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint these the same as adjacent similar materials or areas. If color or finish is not designated, the Department will select these from standard colors available for the materials systems as specified.

N. Color Selection: Paint colors and tints shall be as selected by the engineer to conform to the color scheme of the project. All coding, banding, legends, etc., for exposed interior and exterior piping is as follows:

EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS PAINT COLOR COLOR

NUMBER

Alum or Polymers Silver

Ammonia Purple S585

Carbon Dioxide Orange J498

Chlorine Gas Medium Yellow J698

Chlorine Solution Medium Yellow with Blue Bands

J698-A181

ER No. S049334 09900 - 8 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS PAINT COLOR COLOR

NUMBER

Chlorine Liquid Medium Yellow with Red Bands

J698-0508

Centrate Medium Green 0336

Condensate Charcoal Gray

Compressed Air Doeskin 1217 Dangerous or Caution Areas Medium Yellow J698

Drains Charcoal Gray

Electrical Conduit Black C900

Electrical Conduit (Above 220 Volts)

Black with Red Bands

C900-0508

Electrical Motors and Blowers

Light Gray 0746

Flushing Water Light Brown

Fluoride Red 0508

Fuel Oil Royal Blue A183

Fuel Oil Return Royal Blue with Red Bands

A183-0508

Gas White 0800

Potable Water Jade Green 2383-0336

Potable Water (Hot) Jade Green with Red Bands

2383-0508 or 0336-0314

Process or Treated Water

Light Brown

Pumps Light Gray 0746

Steel Misc. Items Angles, Supports, etc.

Charcoal Gray

Sewage Piping Dark Brown G241

Sewer Plants and Stations (Structures and Trims)

Eye-Rest Green 2369

Sewage Pumping Stations

Antique Ivory 0895

ER No. S049334 09900 - 9 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS PAINT COLOR COLOR

NUMBER

(Inside Walls)

Sludge (In Water) Ivory "WSL" 0855

Sludge (Sewage) Light Buff or Brown White Stencil "SL"

Note: Carboline/Somay Colors from Master Color Chart

PART 3. EXECUTION

3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. In addition to the aforementioned preparations, the Contractor shall be required to remove all dirt, rust, scale, splinters, loose particles, disintegrated paint, grease, oil and other deleterious substances from all surfaces which are to be coated.

B. Hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items in contact with painted surfaces and not to be painted shall be removed, masked, or otherwise protected prior to surface preparation and painting operations.

C. Before the structure is painted, representatives of the Contractor and the Department shall inspect the interior of the wet well, the influent and the pump suction piping and all accessible piping. Any foreign matter shall be removed and all interior surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned by means of scrubbing and hosing.

D. Before commencing work, the painter must make certain that surfaces to be covered are in perfect condition. Should the painter find such surfaces impossible of acceptance, he shall report such fact to the Contractor who shall immediately correct the deficiencies. The application of paint shall be held as an acceptance of the surfaces and working conditions and the painter will be held responsible for the results reasonably expected from the materials and processes specified.

E. Program the cleaning and painting so contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly-painted surfaces.

F. Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete, concrete block, cement plaster and cement-fiber board to be painted by removing all efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and by roughening as required to remove glaze.

G. Clean ferrous substances, which are not galvanized or shop coated, of oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or

ER No. S049334 09900 - 10 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

mechanical cleaning. All welds, blisters, etc., shall be ground and sanded smooth. All pits and dents shall be filled and all imperfections shall be corrected so as to provide a smooth surface for painting.

H. Surface profile as obtained from sandblasting shall be as recommended by the coating manufacturer.

I. Galvanized surfaces shall be treated with a metal passivator prior to painting. Exposed cast iron pipe, fittings and valves, where coal tar coated shall have all heavy spots thinned down by rubbing with kerosene and shall receive two coats of shellac before any finish coats are applied.

J. Where material or equipment is shop-primed, all bad spots shall be cleaned and touched up with the recommended primer before the finish coats are applied. Bright aluminum surfaces and all small items of equipment with factory finish in good condition, shall not be painted. Name and data plates on equipment shall not be painted over under any condition.

3.02 MATERIALS PREPARATION

A. Mix and prepare painting materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and directions, stirring materials before and during application to maintain a mixture of uniform density, free of film, dirt and other foreign materials.

B. No thinners shall be used except those specifically mentioned and only in such quantity as directed by the manufacturer in his instructions. If thinning is used, sufficient additional coats shall be applied to assure the required dry film thickness is achieved. The manufacturer's recommended thinner or cleanup solvent shall be used for all clean-up. Application by brush, spray, airless spray or roller shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for optimum performance and appearance. However, spray methods shall only be used if specifically permitted by the Engineer in writing

3.03 PAINT APPLICATION, GENERAL

A. All painting shall be done by skilled and experienced craftsmen and shall be of highest quality workmanship.

B. Apply paint in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for the type of material being applied.

C. Surface to be painted shall be dry and clean.

D. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through the final coat of paint or if in the opinion of the Department, the paint film is of a non-uniform finish, color and appearance.

E. Paint shall be applied in a neat manner with finished surfaces free of runs,

ER No. S049334 09900 - 11 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

sags, ridges, laps and brush marks. Each coat shall be applied in a manner that will produce an even film of uniform and proper thickness.

F. Paint surfaces behind moveable equipment the same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

G. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match the exposed surfaces.

H. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as the exterior faces, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.

J. Omit the first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop-primed and touch-up painted, unless otherwise specified.

K. Retouching Existing Painting Surfaces: Existing painted surfaces damaged by the modification work or other operations of the Contractor shall be retouched to conform to the above coating systems and blend in with the new and existing work. Damaged surfaces shall be repainted with not less than 2 coats, and other existing surfaces that are listed shall be repainted with the coating system specified.

L. The prime and intermediate coats as specified for the various coating systems may be applied in the shop by the manufacturer. The shop coats shall be of the type specified and shall be compatible with the field coat or coats. Such Items as pumps, motors, equipment, electrical panels, etc. shall be given at least one touch up coat with the intermediate coat material and one complete finish coat in the field.

3.04 APPLICATIONS RESTRICTIONS

A. Application of materials shall be done only on properly prepared surfaces as herein specified, and all exterior painting shall be done only in dry weather. Any surface coating damaged by moisture or rain shall be removed and redone as directed by the Department.

3.05 MINIMUM COATING THICKNESS

A. Coatings shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Apply a prime coat to material which is required to be painted or finished, and which has not been prime coated by others.

C. Recoat primed and sealed walls and ceilings where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no

ER No. S049334 09900 - 12 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

3.06 FINISHES

A. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.

B. Complete Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint work not in compliance with specific requirements.

3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. All completed surfaces will be checked by the Department, and the Contractor shall provide the necessary properly calibrated gauges. All nonferrous surfaces shall be checked for number of coats and thickness by use of a Tooke gauge. All ferrous surfaces shall be checked for film thickness by use of an Elcometer or Micro-Test magnetic dry film gauge properly calibrated. In addition, submerged tank linings and metals shall be tested for freedom from holidays and pinholes by use of a Tinker-Rasor or K-D Bird Dog Holiday Detector. All defects shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Department.

3.08 PROTECTION

A. All other surfaces shall be protected while painting equipment, piping, etc., using suitable cover cloths were necessary. Protection of movable objects, equipment, fittings, and accessories shall be provided throughout the painting operation. Remove all electric plates, surface hardware, etc., before painting, protect and replace when completed. Mask all machinery nameplates and all machined parts not to receive paint. Lay drop cloths in all areas where painting is being done to adequately protect flooring and other work from all damage.

3.09 CLEANING

A. The Contractor shall perform the work under this Section while keeping the premises free from accumulation of debris and rubbish and shall remove all scaffolding, paint cloths, paint, and brushes from the building when completed.

B. Cleaning: All paint brushed, splattered, spilled or splashed on any surface not specified to be painted shall be removed.

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049334 15050 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

SECTION 15050

BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1. GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Drawings and Specifications: The Drawings and Specifications shall be considered as complementary, one to the other, so that materials and work indicated, called for, or implied by the one and not by the other shall be supplied and installed as though specifically called for by both. The Drawings are to be considered diagrammatic, not necessarily showing in detail or to scale all of the equipment or minor items. In the event of discrepancies between the Drawings and the Specifications, or between either of these and any regulations or ordinances governing mechanical work, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in ample time to permit revisions.

1.02 SITE INVESTIGATION

A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to visit the site of the work and become familiar with all available information regarding the location of existing facilities. Failure of the Contractor to fully inform himself of all existing conditions will not be cause for additional compensation.

1.03 FEES, PERMITS, AND INSPECTIONS

A. The Contractor shall obtain all permits for work under this contract and shall pay all expenses in conjunction therewith. He shall also procure and deliver to the Engineer all certificates issued by the authorities having jurisdiction.

B. The work will be inspected by the Engineer during the course of construction. Provide for inspection by others having jurisdiction during the proper phases.

1.04 NEW EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. All equipment and materials used in this installation shall be new, of the best quality and, unless otherwise noted, shall be standard catalog items of the various manufacturers.

1.05 STANDARDS

A. The codes and standards covering mechanical work include, but are not limited to:

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM). 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).

ER No. S049334 15050 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

4. American Welding Society (AWS). 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 7. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers

(ASHRAE). 8. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF). 9. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association

(SMACNA). 10. Florida Building Code (FBC). 11. Codes, Regulations, Ordinances, etc., of the State, County, and/or

Municipality, in which the construction is located, and any political division having jurisdiction over this work.

B. These codes, society and association recommendations constitute minimum requirements and no reductions from design requirements will be permitted, even if allowed by the applicable codes, without expressed written permission of the Engineer. References are to the editions current at time of bidding.

1.06 SPACE AND ACCESS

A. All equipment shall fit the allotted space and shall leave reasonable access room for servicing and repairs. Greater space and room required by substituted equipment shall be provided by the Contractor and at his expense.

1.07 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. All cutting and patching necessary for the work shall be performed by the Contractor. Where interferences occur, and departures from indicated arrangements are required, the Contractor shall coordinate the mechanical work with the other trades involved and make a determination as to changed locations and elevations of the ductwork and/or piping and shall obtain approval from the Engineer for the proposed changes.

1.08 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

A. In addition to the components specified and shown on the Drawings and necessary for the specified performance, the Contractor shall incorporate in the design and show on the shop drawings all the safety features required by the current codes and regulations, including but not limited to those of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, and Amendments thereto.

1.09 DRIVES AND BELT GUARDS

A. The Contractor shall provide for each V-belt drive or rotating shaft a protective guard which shall be constructed around an angle iron frame, securely bolted to the floor or apparatus. The guard shall completely enclose drives and pulleys and be constructed to comply with all safety requirements. Hinged access doors not less than 6-inches x 6-inches shall be provided for access to motor and fan shaft for test purposes. For double inlet fans, the belt guard shall be arranged so as not to restrict the air flow into the fan inlet. Guards shall not interfere with

ER No. S049334 15050 - 3 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

lubrication of equipment.

1.10 BALANCING PUMPS AND MOTORS

A. All pump and motor units shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Unless otherwise specified, the vibration allowance in the units shall not exceed the upper limits as established by the Hydraulic Institute Standards.

1.11 ELECTRICAL WORK

A. The Contractor shall furnish all electrical and control equipment associated with mechanical work including electrical controls, switches, contactors and starters for all equipment items requiring same. All work shall conform in all respects to the requirements of the applicable articles of Division 16.

1.12 METAL FASTENERS

A. Unless otherwise indicated, metal fasteners and related parts shall be of aluminum or stainless steel and shall be of adequate strength for the purpose intended.

1.13 PREVENTION OF ELECTROLYSIS

A. Where the contact of dissimilar metals may cause electrolysis and where aluminum will contact concrete, mortar or plaster, the contact surface of the metals shall be separated using lot less than one coat of zinc chromate primer and one heavy coat of aluminum pigmented asphalt paint on each surface; or where deemed necessary by the Engineer, not less than one course of asphalt saturated cotton fabric cemented to both metals with flashing cement, shall be used. Finished works shall be cleaned and excess cement removed.

1.14 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. The Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Engineer, detailed and dimensioned shop drawings showing the construction of the proposed facility and installation of all equipment complete in every respect. Each drawing shall be indexed and/or referenced to the Contract Drawings and Specifications. No work upon the manufacture or fabrication of any equipment shall be performed until the Engineer's approval has been obtained. Certified pump curves shall indicate actual test performance of units furnished. The Contractor shall submit, with the certified pump shop drawings, layout drawings showing exact installation, piping and foundation details for the pumping units being submitted. The various Sections in the Specifications specify additional requirements for shop drawings with which the Contractor shall comply. Shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of Section 01340.

1.15 FACTORY TESTS

A. When equipment is required to be factory tested, the results of the tests shall be

ER No. S049334 15050 - 4 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

submitted to the Engineer and approval of the test results shall be obtained before shipment of the equipment.

1.16 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Before final acceptance, Record Drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer in performance with the provisions of Section 01720.

1.17 CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENTS

A. Upon completion of work, the Contractor shall clean, oil and grease fans, motors compressors, pumps, and other running equipment and apparatus and mechanisms which the installs and shall make certain such apparatus and mechanisms are in proper working order and ready for test.

1.18 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. Instructions on the operation and maintenance of the equipment furnished shall be provided in accordance with the provisions of Section 01730.

1.19 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTIES

A. The Contractor shall guarantee all work, materials, equipment, etc. against defects for a period of one year from the date of the final acceptance, that all the equipment has the capacity specified and that it will operate without excess noise or vibration caused by improper installation. In addition to the guarantee, the Contractor shall provide the performance warranties as specified for the equipment in the various sections.

1.20 LUBRICANTS

A. The Contractor shall provide a one year supply of all types of lubricants required for the various types of equipment furnished and installed under this Contract. Lubricants shall be in metal containers suitably labeled.

PART 2. PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3. EXECUTION

Not Used END OF SECTION

SECTION 15060

PIPING AND FITTINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE:

A. This section describes materials for and fabrication of ductile-iron pipe and fittings for force mains. The work included in this section consists of furnishing all material, equipment, craft labor and performing all operations necessary for the supply of all piping, fittings and accessories within the limits of work, as shown on the drawings and specified herein.

B. Where references are made to other standards or codes, unless specific date references are indicated the latest edition of said standard or code shall govern.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:

A. Section 33 05 01.01 (WASD SECTION 15010) - Basic Mechanical Requirements

B. All sections specifying various types of valves.

1.3 PIPING LAYOUT AND DESIGN CRITERIA:

A. Field verify dimensions prior to preparation of layout and shop drawings. Obtain the following information from the drawings and specifications:

1. Elevation of the pipe centerline and of the completed ground.2. Alignment of the pipeline.3. Field test hydraulic gradient elevation (HGL).4. Nominal internal diameter, ID.5. Design internal pressure class or HGL6. Joint types.

B. Obtain shop drawing approval prior to fabrication of piping. All items not specifically mentioned in the Specifications or noted on the approved Plans, but which are reasonably necessary to for a complete, functional, and satisfactory installation shall be included.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Submittal Procedures.

B. Action Submittals:

1. Provide an affidavit of compliance with standards referenced in thisspecification, e.g., AWWA C151, AWWA C153, etc. Affidavit shall state that

ER No. S049334 15060 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

inspections and specified tests have been made and that results thereby comply with requirements of Article Source Quality Control.

2. Submit copy of report of pressure tests for qualifying the designs of all sizesand types of pipe and fittings that are being used in the project. Thepressure test shall demonstrate that the mini- mum safety factor describedin relevant standard is met. Submittal shall include sworn certificates thatpipe and fittings have been manufactured, tested, and inspected inaccordance with this and all applicable Specifications.

3. Submit piping layout profile drawings showing location and dimensions ofpipe and fittings; submit after equipment and valve dimensions have beenreceived from the Owner. Include laying lengths of valves, meters, in-linepumps, and other equipment determining piping dimensions. Label ornumber each fitting or piece of pipe. Piping having identical design pressureclass, laying lengths, and bell-and-spigot dimensions that is to be placed inlong straight reaches of alignment may have the same identifying label ornumber.

a. Provide the following information:b. Lining thickness.c. Wall thickness.d. Material test data for this project.e. Show deflections at push-on and mechanical joints.f. Submit joint and fitting details and manufacturer’s data sheets.

4. Fully detailed drawings of all fittings proposed shall be supplied by themanufacturer with his bid. The tabulated nominal weight of each size andtype of fitting shall also be supplied by the manufacturer for all itemsproposed. This weight shall be that of the bare casting prior to application ofany lining or coating.

5. Details of proposed restrained joints including allowable deflection after thejoint is assembled.

6. Information regarding proposed joint testing device for assembled pipe.

C. Informational Submittals

1. Submit calculations and test data proving that the proposed restrained jointarrangement for re- strained joint pipe can transmit the required forces witha minimum safety factor of 1.5.

2. Submit copy of manufacturer's quality control check of pipe material andproduction. Include hydrostatic test records and acceptance test records.For each acceptance test, submit a stress- strain diagram showing yieldstrength, yield point, tensile strength, elongation, and reduction in area.Provide specimen test section dimensions and speed and method used todetermine speed of testing, method used for rounding of test results, andreasons for replacement specimens, if any. Submit ring-bending test of pipeof the same diameter and pressure class as the pipe required for thisproject to prove ring-bending stress at 48 ksi results in a factor of safety of2.0.

3. For Ductile Iron Pipe and fittings, submit certificate that cement for ceramiclining complies with ASTM C116, designating type.

4. Submit test report on physical properties of rubber compound used in the

ER No. S049334 15060 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

gaskets. 5. Submit test reports and certifications for ceramic epoxy lining as specified

herein. Submit applicators qualifications. Submit manufacturer’s written recommendations for application and repair of coating.

6. Submit drawing or manufacturer's data sheet showing flange facing,including design of facing serrations.

7. Submit weld procedure specification, procedure qualification record, andwelder's qualifications prior to any welding to ductile-iron pipe or fittings.

8. Recommended procedure for installing pipe into casings.9. Field Hydrostatic Testing Plan: Submit at least 15 days prior to testing and

at minimum, include the following:

a. Testing dates.b. Piping systems and section(s) to be tested.c. Method of isolation.d. Method of conveying water from source to system being tested.e. Calculation of maximum allowable leakage for piping section(s) to be

tested.

10. Certifications of Calibration: Approved testing laboratory certificate ifpressure gauge for hydrostatic test has been previously used. If pressuregauge is new, no certificate is required.

11. Test documentation form and results.12. Ceramic Lining Manufacturer Information:

a. Published surface preparation and application directions.b. Material qualification testing and certification of test results.c. Recoatability and repair directions.d. Details for lining at flanged and push-on joints.e. Certificate of Proper Installation.f. Certification letter stating that applicator is approved for application of

the specified products.

13. Shop lining applicator’s quality control program, including, but not limited to:

a. Environmental test methods and frequency.b. Metal surface temperature and profile measurement procedure and

frequency.c. Dry film thickness and holiday testing procedures.d. Record keeping form.

14. Lining and pipe or fitting manufacturer’s joint Certificate of ProperInstallation for ceramic epoxy lining.

15. Instruction manual for joint testing device for use in assembled piping.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. During shipping, delivery and installation of pipe and accessories, handle in a manner that is incompliance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, and employ procedures that ensure delivery of an undamaged operable product

ER No. S049334 15060 - 3 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

B. Exercise particular care not to damage coatings by limiting exposure or physical contact with other materials, objects, or the environment.

1.6 INSPECTION

A. The Owner's Representative will inspect materials, production, and testing of pipes, fittings, and special pieces at manufacturer's plant.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Pipe manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 registered or provide the services of an independent inspection agency.

B. Prior to start of manufacturing, manufacturer not meeting or having ISO registration requirements shall submit name of at least two independent inspection agencies for approval.

1. Independent inspection agency shall be responsible, on a daily basis, forsample monitoring of chemical and mechanical tests, sample visualinspection of quality assurance tests performed on in-process pipe andfittings, and sample visual and dimensional inspection on finished products.

C. Foundries supplying materials shall maintain their metallurgical records for a minimum period of two years after fabrication and firms not doing so may be found in default.

D. All pipe, fittings and other materials supplied under this contract shall be subject to inspection while still on the delivery truck. It is the sole responsibility of the vendor and supplier to make prior contact with the Storekeeper or the Construction Management section and provide a minimum of 48-hours prior notice of delivery. When so notified, the Department will make arrangements for inspection of the material upon arrival or within a reasonable time thereafter. Material shall not be unloaded with- out inspections taking place either prior to or, if necessary for examination, during the unloading procedure. The Department will not be responsible for any delays or additional costs created by non- compliance with the requirement for prior notification or the requirement for thorough inspection.

E. Materials shall be delivered in complete compliance with the AWWA Standards as modified herein, without damage, and shall match or exceed the quality of any samples supplied. The Department absolutely reserves the right to require samples of any material supplied and to perform whatever tests considered by the Engineer, whose decision shall be final, to be in the Department’s best interest on said samples. Where such tests are of a destructive nature, the sample, if it passes the test will be paid for (at cost as shown by invoice) by the Department. Samples failing will be immediately replaced with suitable material at the supplier’s/contractor’s expense. Samples required prior to order as a condition for purchase or as a materials submittal for approval will be at the supplier’s/contractor’s expense but, if approved and not used for destructive tests, may be used in the work with permission from the Engineer.

F. Materials found to be defective, not in strict compliance with the quality standards of samples supplied or these specifications shall be immediately

ER No. S049334 15060 - 4 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

returned to the vendor at his expense. If defects are dis- covered at a later time, the vendor shall be required to remove said items and shall bare all costs for so doing together with any replacement costs. Rejection of items may subject the vendor to liquidated and/or actual damages as specified elsewhere herein.

G. Foundries supplying materials shall maintain their metallurgical records for a minimum period of two years after fabrication and firms not doing so may be found in default.

H. Flaws which provide cause for rejection include;

1. Incorrect metallurgy or metallurgy which cannot be verified to the completesatisfaction of the Engineer;

2. Foundry identification/location, size, pressure and material identificationinformation lost, removed, non-existent, or not visible when assembled;

3. Not in complete compliance with all applicable AWWA Standards asmodified herein and/or these specifications;

4. Not in compliance with NSF5. Not in compliance with approved shop drawings;6. Out of roundness in excess of AWWA requirements;7. Dimensional differences in excess of AWWA requirements;8. Rough exterior coating;9. Chipped, cracked, scratched or otherwise damaged interior or exterior

coatings or linings;10. Interior or exterior coatings which are too thin;11. Coatings too thick to allow proper assembly; coatings too thick to allow

proper grip by restraining gaskets or other restraining elements;12. Pin holes or honey combing of pipe;13. Weld spatter or excess metal in gasket grooves or the whole of the bell

area;14. Bell areas which are distorted or otherwise improperly cast;15. Spigots which are out of round, not of proper dimension, or not beveled to

an extent that will allow easy assembly of the pipe joint;16. Gaskets which are defective or of the wrong material;17. Lack of joint materials;18. Improper or defective joint materials;19. Bolting of the wrong material or size;20. Electro galvanizing or other exterior plating when hot-dip galvanizing is

required;21. Incorrect, flawed or damaged interior coating or lining;22. Lack or non-submittal of all required certifications;23. Non-timely submission of certifications; incorrect/incomplete certifications or

certifications lacking the signature, date and seal of a professional engineerwhen so required;

24. Flanges which are too thin, not a right angles to the pipe centerline, orotherwise distorted;

25. The above listed items together with all other flaws or defects which in theopinion of the Engineer, whose decision shall be final, adversely affect theassembly and/or function of the piping system as intended.

ER No. S049334 15060 - 5 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS: DUCTILE IRON

A. GENERAL

1. As used herein, "ANSI" denotes the American National Standards Institute,"AWWA" denotes the American Water Works Association, and "ASTM"denotes the American Society for Testing and Materials.

2. All pipe and fittings to be furnished hereunder shall conform to thereferenced ANSI and/or AWWA Standard as modified herein, as appearingin the following sections.

3. All markings required on pipe and fittings, shall be permanent and clearlylegible and located such that they will not be hidden or destroyed whenassembled into the intended system. Plainly mark each length of straightpipe and each fitting at the bell end to identify the design pressure class,the wall thickness, and the date of manufacture, and the proper location ofthe pipe item by reference to the layout schedule. Mark the spigot end ofrestrained joint pipe to show clearly the required depth of insertion into thebell.

B. DUCTILE IRON PIPE

1. All pipes shall be ductile iron pipe conforming to ANSI/AWWA StandardC151/A21.51-09, "Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water". AWWAC151/A21.51, and AWWA C111/A21.11.

2. Ductile Iron Pipe shall be centrifugally cast, grade 60-42-10 iron.3. Ductile iron pipe shall be manufactured, lined, coated, and tested

domestically in the United States of America.4. Ductile iron fittings shall be manufactured, lined, coated, and tested

domestically or for fittings produced outside of the United States of Americathey shall bear the name or a tag of the domestic manufacturer supplyingthe pipe.

5. Pipe manufacturer shall certify source manufacturing facility has beenproducing ductile iron pipe of the specified diameters, pressure, dimensionsand standards for a period of not less than 10 years.

6. Ductile iron pipe and fitting shall be supplied by a single manufacturer.a. Mixing of components and sources is not permitted.b. Fittings from outside the United States of America shall be produced in

a facility with a minimum of 5 years’ documented experiencemanufacturing, coating, testing, and delivery of size and type specifiedto projects in the United States of America.

7. Pipe shall be new and recently manufactured. Refurbished pipe shall not beprovided. Pipe shall be delivered lined and coated as specified.

8. The pipe thickness and outside diameter of pipe for sanitary sewer andwater usage shall conform to Tables 1 and 2 (for push-on and mechanicaljoint pipe, respectively) of ANSI/AWWA Standard C151/A21.51-09 for thefollowing sizes. The pressure class specified is the minimum permitted:

ER No. S049334 15060 - 6 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

Size Pressure Class 4-inch through 12-inch 350 14-inch through 20-inch 250 24-inch 200 30-inch through 54-inch 150

9. For restrained joint pipe, the thickness of the pipe barrel remaining aftergrooves are cut, if required in the design of restrained end joints,shall not be less than the nominal wall thickness of equal sizednon-restrained joint pipe as shown above.

10. Minimum wall thickness for pipe having threaded flanges shall beSpecial Class 53 or Pressure Class 350.

11. Pressure rating of 6-inch pipe used for offset air valve shall beClass 53 as required for the grooved flexible coupling.

12. Minimum pipe wall thickness required for corporation stops andtapped outlets shall be in accordance with Table A.1 ofANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51-09 for three full threads for designpressures up to 250 psi and four full threads for designpressures over 250 to 350 psi.

13. For flanged ductile-iron pipe with integrally cast flanges or threadedflanges, the nominal wall thickness of the pipe barrel shall be as specified inSection 3.3, "Joints and Accessories" under "Flanged Joints", herein below.

14. Minimum wall thicknesses for pipe having grooved-end joints shall be asshown in the following table:

DI Pipe and Fitting Sizes (inches)

Grooved End Joint Wall Thickness*

16 and smaller Special Class 53

18 Special Class 54

20 Special Class 55

24 to 36 Special Class 56

42 and larger Special Class 53 or Pressure Class 350

*Special Class and Pressure Class per AWWA C151-09.

15. Each piece of pipe shall be marked as required in Subsection 4.7 of AWWAC151-09. Letters and numerals on pipe sizes 12-inch and smallershall be not less than 3/8-inch.

16. The Water and Sewer Department absolutely reserves the right to requirethe use of "thickness" class pipe or higher pressure class pipe inapplications where in the opinion of the Engineer (i.e. the Chief,Engineering Division, M-D WASD or his representative) such use is in thebest interest of the Department. The Engineer's decision in this regard shallbe final.

17. A sufficient quantity of non-toxic vegetable soap lubricant shall be suppliedwith each shipment of pipe. The soap lubricant shall be suitable

ER No. S049334 15060 - 7 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

for use in subaqueous trench conditions. 18. Single gasket push-on pipe shall be shipped in standard 18-foot

or 20-foot lengths, but not both. Restrained single-gasket push-on joint pipe shall be shipped in standard 18 or 20-foot lengthsas specified above or fabricated lengths as noted in each order.At least two lengths of each size of single gasket push-on pipefurnished under each order shall be tested with circumferentialgauges to ensure that the pipe may be cut at any point along itslength and have an outside diameter which will be within themanufacturer's standard design dimensions and tolerances forplain pipe. These lengths shall be identified with an easilydistinguished, painted marking, longitudinally along the fulllength of the pipe.

19. The proper number of gaskets, bolts, nuts and all necessary jointmaterial, plus one extra gasket for every 10 joints or fraction thereof,shall be furnished with each order. The gaskets and joint accessories shallbe shipped in suitable protection containers.

C. FITTINGS

1. Fittings Conforming to ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.11-12 (Water & Sewer Use)

a. Restrained push-on joint fittings shall be cast ductile iron for use withductile-iron pipe as specified above. Standard mechanical joint, push-onjoint and flanged joint fittings shall also be ductile iron for use withductile-iron pipe as specified above. Cast ductile-iron fittings in the 3-inch through 24-inch size range shall be pressure rated at 350 psi,minimum; (except flange-joint fittings shall be rated at 250 psi,minimum); and in the 30-inch through 54-inch-inch size range shall bepressure rated at 250 psi, minimum. All fittings with mechanical joints,flange joints and push-on joints shall conform to ANSI/AWWA StandardC110/A21.10-12, "Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings ". In addition,fittings with mechanical joints and push-on joints shall conform toANSI/AWWA Standard C111/A21.11-12, "Rubber-Gasket Joints forDuctile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings".

b. The weight of fittings shall be as given in ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.11-12for ductile-iron fittings. The weight of mechanical joint fittings shall beas established in Tables 4 through 13. The weight of flanged jointfittings shall as established in Tables 14 through 21.

2. Fittings Conforming to ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53-11 (Water & Sewer Use)

a. All fittings shall be cast ductile-iron for use with ductile-iron pipe asspecified above. Fittings in the 3- inch through 24-inch size range shallbe pressure rated at 350 psi, minimum; 30-inch through 48-inch sizerange shall be pressure rated at 250 psi, minimum; and in the 54-inchthrough 64-inch size range shall be pressure rated at 150 psi, minimum(except for those fittings such as plugs, caps, and sleeves which are normallyrated at a higher pressure). No flanged fittings or mixtures of flanged with otherend type fittings will be allowed in the range of 3-inch through 48-inch. All fittings

ER No. S049334 15060 - 8 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

with mechanical joints, flange joints and push-on joints shall conform to ANSI/AWWA Standard C153/A21.53-11, "Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings ". In addition, fittings with mechanical joints and push-on joints shall conform to ANSI/AWWA Standard C111/A21.11-12, “Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings" except as otherwise allowed in C153. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile-iron only.

b. The weight of a fitting supplied under the contract shall not be less thanninety-five (95) percent of the tabulated nominal weight supplied by themanufacturer’s catalog literature for that fitting. Further, the weight offittings supplied shall not be more than five (5) percent above the sametabulated nominal weight.

D. JOINTS AND ACCESSORIES

1. Deflection at joints shall not exceed one-half (1/2) of the smallest allowabledeflection recommended by either AWWA or the pipe manufacturer.

2. Joints in below-ground piping shall be flexible push-on or Mechanical joints,except where flanged joints are required to connect to valves, meters, andother equipment. Provide unrestrained buried joints except whererestrained joints are specifically shown in the drawings. Joints inaboveground or submerged piping or piping located in vaults and structuresshall be grooved end or flanged.

3. Restrained joints for piping 6 inches and larger shall be American Cast Iron Pipe"Lok-Ring" or "Flex- Ring," U.S. Pipe "TR-Flex," or equal. Weldments forrestrained joints shall be tested by the liquid penetrant method per ASTME165. Restrained joints for field closures shall be “Megalug” by EBAA Iron.

E. Push-On Type Joints (Single Gasket and Single Gasket with Gasket Restraint)

1. Push-on joints shall conform to ANSI/AWWA Standard C111/A21.11-12,except that the gaskets for pipe and fittings shall be neoprene unlessotherwise specified.

2. The required number of gaskets for each push-on joint pipe plus one extrafor every 50 joints or fraction thereof, shall be furnished with each order.The gaskets shall be shipped in suitable protective containers. All singlegasket pipe shall be as manufactured by United States Pipe and FoundryCompany (Tyton), by the American Cast Iron Pipe Company (AmarilloFastite), by McWane, Inc. (Mix of Tyton and Fastite), Tyler/Union (Tyton) orapproved equal.

3. Push-on joints together with both their regular and gasket-restraint gasketsshall be of the design, dimensions and tolerances of either those providedby American Cast Iron Pipe Company (Amarillo Fastite/Fast-Grip) or thoseprovided by United States Pipe and Foundry Company (Tyton/Field Lok).No other designs will be acceptable.

4. The pressure rating shall be stamped on the restrained gasket. Therestrained gasket and joint restraining system shall conform toANSI/AWWA Standard C111/A21.11-12 (with neoprene required for sewer)rated at the following:

ER No. S049334 15060 - 9 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

Size Pressure Rating (Minimum) 4-inch through 12-inch 350 14-inch through 20-inch 250 24-inch 200 30-inch through 54-inch 150

5. The restrained gasket shall be manufactured a color other than black toallow for visual inspection of the pipeline. The restrained gasket color shallbe consistent throughout the system and shall be inherent within therubber, not painted.

F. Mechanical Joints

1. Mechanical joints for fittings shall conform to ANSI/AWWA StandardC111/A21.11-12, except that the gaskets for each fitting under Groups D and D1shall be neoprene. Bolt holes for mechanical joints shall be equally spaced, andshall straddle the vertical centerline. Tee head bolts and hexagonal nuts for allmechanical joints in fittings shall be of high strength low-alloy steel withcomposition, dimensions and threading as specified in ANSI/AWWA StandardC111/A21.11-12. Glands shall be of ductile-iron construction for ductile ironfittings, and cast gray iron or ductile iron for cast gray-iron fittings.

2. The proper number of gaskets, glands, bolts and nuts, all conforming toANSI/AWWA Standard C111/A21.11-12, plus one extra gasket for every 10joints or fraction thereof, shall be furnished with each order. The gaskets andjoint accessories shall be shipped in suitable protective containers. Followerglands held in place with set screws will not be acceptable. Segmentedglands will not be acceptable.

G. Mechanical Joint Megalug-Type Restraining Systems

1. In any mechanical joint or push on joint underground piping systemrestrained glands may be utilized for underground pipeline only wherespecifically shown on the drawings. The ASTM A536 ductile iron casting ofthe restrained gland shall be bonded powder coated. The wedge andwedge assembly shall have a bonded liquid polymer coating applied forcorrosion protection. The gland shall utilize torque limiting twist off wedgeactuation screws.

2. Foreign and domestic manufactured restrained glands are allowed forpipelines 24-inches and below unless otherwise required by theDepartment due to Federal or State funded projects which require domesticmanufacture. In sizes 30, 36, 42 and 48-inch the prior written permission ofthe Engineer is required to use non-domestic manufactured restrainingglands. The country of origin shall be clearly identified on the restraininggland and shop drawing.

3. The Department absolutely reserves the right to require other forms ofrestraint where in the opinion of the Engineer the use of this form ofrestraint is not in the best interest of the Department and his decision shallbe final. Use of this type of restraint is restricted to underground mechanicaljoint or push- on joint applications and in general may not be used above

ER No. S049334 15060 - 10 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

grade or as a substitute for flanged joints. 4. The Megalug restraint systems manufactured by EBAA Iron Sales,

Eastland Texas, will be considered the standard of quality for comparisonpurposes and if the Department has any doubts as to the durability, qualityor ability to restrain of a proffered substitute, the entity offering thesubstitute shall bear the entire burden of proving this equality to thecomplete satisfaction of the Engineer. Other manufacturers producing thistype of restraint system shall submit data with their shop drawings showingthat their restraint system has been in the marketplace for a minimum ofthree years in this country.

5. Each thrust-resistant mechanical joint or push on joint made up with thistype of restraint and the pipe and fitting of which it is a part, shall bedesigned to withstand an axial thrust from an internal pipeline pressure of atleast 150 psi at bulkhead conditions without reduction because of its positionin the pipeline nor for support from external thrust blocks.

6. This type of joint restraint shall not be used above grade except aspreviously specified nor shall it be used as a carrier pipe within a casing.This type of restraint shall not be used with tape wrapped pipe or with toogreat a coating thickness on the exterior of the pipe.

H. Restrained Push-on Joints (Single Gasket Non-Gasket Restrained)

1. Restrained joints in pipe and fittings shall be of the single gasket push-ontype, and shall conform to all applicable provisions of ANSI/AWWAStandard C111/A21.11-12, except that gaskets for pipe and fittings shall beneoprene, where so specified, and the following requirements:

2. Thickness of the pipe barrel remaining at grooves cut, if required in thedesign of restrained end joints, shall not be less than the nominal wallthickness of equal sized non-restrained pipe as specified in Section 3.1 above.

3. Restrained joints using field welding, set screws, or gaskets with expandingmetal inserts are not acceptable.

4. The restraining components, when not cast integrally with the pipe and fittings,shall be ductile iron or a high strength non-corrosive alloy steel.

5. Tee head bolts and hexagonal nuts for all restrained joints in pipe and fittingsshall be of high strength low-alloy steel with composition, dimensions andthreading as specified in ANSI/AWWA Standard C111/A21.11-12, except thatthe length of the bolts shall meet the requirements for the restrained jointdesign.

6. The proper number of gaskets, bolts, nuts and all necessary joint material, plusone extra gasket for every 10 joints or fraction thereof, shall be furnished witheach order. The gaskets and joint accessories shall be shipped in suitableprotection containers.

7. Each thrust-resistant joint and the pipe and fitting of which it is a part, shallbe designed to withstand the axial thrust from an internal pipeline pressure ofat least 150 psi at bulkhead conditions without reduction because of its positionin the pipeline nor for support from external thrust blocks.

8. Restrained push-on joint pipe and fittings shall be capable of being deflectedafter assembly. During deflection, all components in the restrained system shallbe in contact to provide an equal force on all contact areas.

9. When restrained spigot ends are ordered for items of Group A, thecorresponding bell ends of the pipe to be restrained (also within Group A),shall be furnished with the required matching restraining features at no

ER No. S049334 15060 - 11 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

additional cost other than the price bid per foot of pipe.

I. Flanged Joints

1. Connecting pieces with one end flanged and the other end either plain-endor mechanical joint, shall conform to ANSI/AWWA Standard C110/A21.10-12. Joint material for both the flanged end and the mechanical jointaccessories for connecting pieces with a mechanical joint end shall be furnished as specified.

2. Other types of flanged fittings, and flanged pipe, shall conform to the followingrequirements unless otherwise stated in the order:

3. Flanged fittings shall conform to ANSI/AWWA Standard C110/A21.10-12, asspecified hereinabove.

4. Flanged ductile-iron pipe with integrally cast flanges shall be manufacturedin accordance with ANSI/AWWA Standard C151/A21.51-09, and withprovisions contained hereinabove for centrifugally cast ductile iron pipe,and shall be furnished with ANSI Standard Class 125 flanges, plainfaced and drilled, conforming to ANSI Standard B16.1, "Cast Iron PipeFlanges and Flanged Fittings", latest revision. Hollow back flanges are notacceptable.

5. Flanged ductile-iron pipe with threaded flanges shall be manufactured inaccordance with ANSI/AWWA Standard C115/A21.15-11, "Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe With Ductile-Iron or Grey-Iron Threaded Flanges", and shall berated for a working pressure of 250 psi, minimum. The nominal thickness offlanged ductile-iron pipe, 6-inch and larger, shall not be less than thoseshown in Table 1 of ANSI/AWWA Standard C115/A21.15-11. The nominalthickness of 4-inch flanged ductile-iron pipe shall be Class 54 (min.)conforming to Tables 3 and 4 of ANSI/ Standard C151/A21.51-09. Flangesshall be solid-back.

6. The pipe shall be furnished with ANSI Standard Class 125 flanges, plain facedand drilled, conforming to ANSI Standard B16.1, latest revision. Hollow backflanges and grey-iron flanges shall not be acceptable for use as threadedflanges. Threaded flanges shall be individually fitted and machine tightened onthe threaded pipe by the manufacturer, and shall not be interchangeable in thefield.

7. Flanges shall be back-faced parallel to the face of flange. Prior to assembly ofthe flange onto the pipe, apply a thread compound to the threads to provide aleak-free connection. There shall be zero leakage through the threads at ahydrostatic test pressure of 250 psi without the use of the gasket. Pipelengths shall be as ordered. Removal of flanges, cutting and re-threadingthe pipe, and re-installing the flanges will not be permitted in any case.Where a raised face flange connects to a flat-faced flange, remove theraised face of the flange.

8. All flanges on ductile-iron pipe and fittings shall be of ductile iron, class 70-50-5 in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10. All joint materials forflanged pipe and fittings, shall be supplied with all pipe or fittings ordered.Bolts and nuts shall comply with all requirements of Appendix Section A.1of ANSI/AWWA Standard C115/A21.15-11 except that both shall bestainless steel. Bolts shall be of sufficient length to fully engage all threadsin the nut. Unless ring gaskets are specified, gaskets shall be full-faced,

ER No. S049334 15060 - 12 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

and gaskets shall be of 1/8-inch thickness. Gaskets shall fully conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA Standard C115/A21.15-11 Appendix Section A.2 except that gaskets shall be SBR for water and neoprene for sewer usages.

J. Grooved-end Fittings and Couplings

1. Grooved-end fittings shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10-12 withgrooved ends conforming to ANSI/AWWA C606-11, radius cut rigid joints.Fitting material shall conform to ASTM A48, Class 30; ASTM A126, ClassB; or ASTM A536, Grade 65-42-10. Wall thickness of ductile-iron (ASTMA536) fittings shall conform to AWWA C110 or C153; wall thickness of cast-iron fittings shall conform to AWWA C110. Fittings and couplings shall befurnished by the same manufacturer.

2. Grooved-end pipe couplings shall be ductile iron, ASTM A536 (Grade 65-45-12). Gaskets shall be Buna-N and shall conform to ASTM D2000. Bolts inexposed service shall conform to ASTM A183, 110,000-psi tensile strength.Bolts in buried or submerged service shall be ASTM A193, Grade B8, andClass 2.

3. Couplings for pipe 24 inches and smaller shall conform to AWWA C606 forflexible radius ductile-iron pipe, except where rigid radius couplings arerequired to connect to fittings. Couplings for pipe sizes 30 and 36 inchesshall be in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's published literaturefor tolerances and dimensions for flexible and rigid radius cut joints.Couplings shall be Victaulic Style 31, Gustin- Bacon No. 500, or equal.

4. Couplings for pipe larger than 36 inches shall conform to AWWA C606 forshouldered end pipe. Couplings shall be Victaulic Style 44 or equal.

5. Grooved-end adapter flanges for piping 24 inches and smaller having anoperating pressure of 150 psi and less shall be Victaulic Style 341 or 342 orequal. Flange dimensions shall conform to ASME B16.1, Class 125.

6. Grooved-end transition couplings for connecting ductile-iron pipe 12 inchesand smaller to steel pipe shall be Victaulic Style 307 or equal.

K. Outlets and Nozzles

1. Provide outlets three quarters of an inch and smaller by direct tappingDuctile Iron Pipe in accordance with AWWA C600-10, Section 4.8. Provideoutlets larger than three quarters of an inch up to 2 inches by tapping thepipe and attaching a service clamp. or use a threaded welded-on boss. Usestainless steel clamps for exposed piping. For outlets larger than 2 inches,use a tee with a flanged outlet. For outlets larger than 2 inches in buriedpiping, use a tee with a restrained joint outlet.

L. Ductile-Iron Pipe Weldments

1. All welding to ductile-iron pipe, such as for bosses, joint restraint, and jointbond cables, shall be done at the place of manufacture of the pipe. Performwelding by skilled welders experienced in the method and materials to beused. Welders shall be qualified under the standard qualification proceduresof the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, WeldingQualifications.

ER No. S049334 15060 - 13 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

2. Welds shall be of uniform composition, neat, smooth, full strength, and ductile.Completely grind out porosity and cracks, trapped welding flux, and other defectsin the welds in such a manner that will permit proper and complete repair bywelding.

3. Material for fittings with welded-on bosses shall have a Charpy notch impactvalue of minimum 10 ft- lbs under the conditions defined in ANSI/AWWAC151/A21.51-09. Test completed welds by the liquid penetrant method perASTM E165.

4. Completed welds shall be inspected at the place of manufacture by the liquidpenetrant method. Conform to the requirements specified in ASTM E165,Method A, Type I or Type II. The materials used shall be water washableand nonflammable.

M. LININGS AND COATINGS Polyethylene Encasement

1. For non-submerged applications, all Ductile Iron Pipe and fittings shall bewrapped with V-Bio Polyethylene Enhanced Encasement in accordancewith AWWA C600 and ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5, Standard forPolyethylene Encasement of Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems. Film low-density,polyethylene film and shall be 8 mils thick. Color shall be Blue for PotableWater, Purple for Recycled water, and green for sanitary sewage service.Alternatively, or if specified, polyethylene encasement for use with ductileiron pipe systems shall consist of three layers of co-extruded linear lowdensity polyethylene (LLDPE), fused into a single thickness of not less thaneight mils. The inside surface of the polyethylene wrap to be in contact withthe pipe exterior shall be infused with a blend of antimicrobial biocide tomitigate microbiologically influenced corrosion and a volatile corrosioninhibitor to control galvanic corrosion. Product: V-Bio or equal.

2. Polyethylene encasement for ductile-iron pipe shall be supplied as a flattube meeting the dimensions of Table 1 in AWWA C105 and shall besupplied by the ductile-iron pipe manufacturer.

3. Plastic adhesive tape shall consist of polyolefin backing and adhesivewhich bonds to common pipeline coatings including polyethylene. Products:Canusa Wrapid Tape; Tapecoat 35; Polyken 934; AA Thread Seal Tape,Inc.; or equal.

4. Install the polyethylene to completely encase the pipe and fittings to providea watertight corrosion barrier. Continuously secure overlaps and ends ofsheet and tube with polyethylene tape. Make circumferential seams withtwo or more complete wraps, with no exposed edges. Tape longitudinalseams and longitudinal overlaps, extending tape beyond and beneathcircumferential seams. Wrap bell- spigot interfaces, restrained jointcomponents, and other irregular surfaces with wax tape or moldablesealant prior to placing polyethylene encasement. Minimize voids beneathpolyethylene.

5. Place circumferential or spiral wraps of polyethylene tape at 2-foot intervalsalong the barrel of the pipe to minimize the space between the pipe and thepolyethylene. Overlap adjoining polyethylene tube coatings a minimum of 1foot and wrap prior to placing concrete anchors, collars, supports, or thrustblocks. Hand-wrap the polyethylene sheet, apply two complete wraps withno exposed edges to provide a watertight corrosion barrier, and secure inplace with 2-inch-wide plastic adhesive tape. Repair polyethylene material

ER No. S049334 15060 - 14 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

that is damaged during installation. Use polyethylene sheet, place over damaged or torn area, and secure in place with 2-inch-wide plastic adhesive tape.

6. Repair polyethylene encasement at all service connections in accordancewith AWWA C600-10, Section 4.8.

N. Ductile Iron Zinc Coating

1. The exterior of ductile iron pipe shall be coated with a layer of arc-sprayedzinc per ISO 8179. The mass of the zinc applied shall be 200 g/m2 of pipesurface area. A finishing layer topcoat shall be applied to the zinc. Themean dry film thickness of the finishing layer shall not be less than 3 milswith a local minimum not less than 2 mils. The coating system shallconform in every respect to ISO 8179-1, Ductile iron pipes - External zinc-based coating - Part 1: Metallic zinc with finishing layer.

O. Asphaltic Top Coating

1. All Ductile Iron pipe and fittings shall be outside top-coated with anasphaltic material applied by means of the airless spray method. Theexterior coating shall comply with ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51-09 for thistype of coating, shall be smooth without pinholes, thin, bare or overly thickareas. Smoothness shall be such that when hand rubbed, no “sand paper”feeling will be experienced and such that the spigot area will readily slidethrough the gasket without pulling, tearing, rolling or otherwise disturbingthe sealing capabilities of the gasket. Spigot ends shall be beveled prior tocoating to an extent that will permit ready insertion of the spigot through thegasket area.

P. Ceramic Epoxy Lining

1. Ductile Iron Pipe and fittings where so specified shall be lined with ceramicepoxy.

2. Ceramic epoxy shall contain pigmentation to resist ultraviolet exposureunder the same conditions.

3. All ductile iron pipe and fittings for which ceramic epoxy lining is to beapplied shall be delivered to the application facility without asphalt, cementlining or other lining on the interior surface or the first 6 inches on thespigot end of the pipe exterior.

4. Ceramic epoxy material shall be a high-build multi-component Amine curedNovalac epoxy, Protecto 401, by Vulcan Painters, Inc. of Bessemer, AL35021 or Department-approved equal.

5. Ceramic epoxy material shall meet the following criteria and shall beaccompanied by certification of the following test results:

a. A permeability rating of 0.00 when tested according to Method A ofASTM E96-00 "Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials",Procedure A with a test duration of 30 days.

b. The following test must be run on coupons from factory lined ductile ironpipe:

ER No. S049334 15060 - 15 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

6. ASTM B117 Salt Spray (scribed panel) - Results to equal no more than0.5mm undercutting after one year.

7. ASTM G95 Cathodic Disbondment 1.5 volts @ 77 degrees F. Results toequal no more than 0.5mm undercutting after 30 days.

8. Immersion Testing rating using ASTM D714-87 (1994).

a. 20% Sulfuric Acid - No effect after one year.b. 25% Sodium Hydroxide - No effect after one year.c. 160° F. Distilled Water - No effect after one year.d. 120° F. Tap Water (scribed panel) - 0.0 undercutting after one year with

no effect.

Q. A statement from the manufacturer attesting to the fact that at least 20% of the volume of the lining contains ceramic quartz pigment.

R. A statement concerning recoat ability and repair to the lining.

1. Ceramic Epoxy Application

a. The lining shall be applied by a competent firm with a successful historyof applying linings to the interior of ductile iron pipe and fittings.

b. Surface Preparation. Prior to abrasive blasting, the entire area whichwill receive the protective compound shall be inspected for oil, grease,etc. Any areas where oil, grease or any substance is present which canbe removed by solvent shall be solvent cleaned using the guidelinesoutlined in SSPC-1 Solvent Cleaning. After the surface has been madefree of grease, oil or other substances, all areas to receive theprotective compounds shall be abrasive blasted using compressed airnozzles with sand or grit abrasive media. The entire surface to be linedshall be struck with the blast media so that all rust, loose oxides, etc.,are removed from the surface. Only slight stains and tightly adheringannealing oxide may be left on the surface. Any area where rustreappears before coating must be re-blasted to remove all rust.

c. Lining Application. After the surface preparation and within 8 hours ofsurface preparation, apply to the interior of pipe and fittings a minimumforty (40) mils dry film thickness of the protective lining. No lining shalltake place when the substrate or ambient temperature is below 40degrees Fahrenheit. The surface also shall be dry and dust free. Ifflange ends are included in the Project, the linings shall not be used onthe face of the flange; however, full face gaskets must be used toprotect the ends of the pipe. The 40-mil system shall not be applied inthe gasket grooves.

d. Coating of Gasket and Spigot Ends. Coat the gasket area and exteriorof the spigot end for 6 inches back from the end of the spigot with six (6)mils minimum, ten (10) mils maximum of Protecto Joint Compound. Thiscoating shall be applied by brush to ensure complete coverage. Careshall be taken that the coating is smooth without excess buildup in thegasket groove or on the spigot end. All material for the gasket grooveand spigot end shall be applied after the application of the lining asspecified in the preceding paragraph.

ER No. S049334 15060 - 16 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

e. Number of Coats. The number of coats of lining material applied shallbe as recommended by the lining manufacturer. However, in no caseshall this material be applied above the dry thickness per coatrecommended by the lining manufacturer in printed literature. The timebetween coats shall never exceed that time recommended by the liningmaterial manufacturer. No material shall be used for lining which is notindefinitely recoated able with itself without roughening the surface.

f. Touch-Up and Repair. Protecto Joint Compound shall be used fortouch-up or repair. Procedures shall be in accordance withmanufacturer's recommendations.

2. INSPECTION AND CERTIFICATION

a. Inspection

3. All ceramic epoxy lined ductile iron pipe and fitting linings shall bechecked for thickness using a magnetic film thickness gauge. Thethickness testing shall be done using the method outlined in SSPC-PC-2Film Thickness Rating. Re-line any pipe whose lining is below thespecified minimum thickness.

4. The interior lining of all pipe and fittings shall be tested for pinholes with anondestructive 2,500 volt test. Re-line any pipe not passing the test.

5. Each pipe joint and fitting shall be marked with the date of application ofthe lining system and with its numerical sequence of application on thedate.

S. Procedures for Sealing Cut Ends and Repairing Field Damaged Areas

1. Remove burrs caused by field cutting of ends or handling damage andsmooth out the edge of the lining if rough.

2. Remove all traces of oil, grease, asphalt, dust, dirt, etc.3. Areas of loose or damaged lining associated with field cutting the pipe shall

be repaired, if approved by the Engineer, as recommended by the pipemanufacturer. The damaged area shall be stripped back by chiseling orscraping about 1 to 2 inches into the well-adhered lining before patching.

4. The exposed metal and the 1 to 2-inch lining overlap shall be roughened with acoarse grade of emery cloth (#40 grit), rasp or small chisel. Avoid wirebrushing or similar buffing which would make the surface too smooth forgood adhesion.

5. With the area to be sealed or repaired absolutely, clean and suitablyroughened, apply a coat of Protecto Joint Compound by brush inaccordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory Tests:

1. General:

a. Tests shall be performed on pipe with metal thickness equal to that specified.

ER No. S049334 15060 - 17 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

b. Only pipe that passes leak test shall be shipped.

2. Hydrostatic Proof Test:

a. All Pipe: Perform at 500 psi for a minimum duration of 5 seconds.b. Pipe 30 Inches and Larger: Additionally test to 75 percent of minimum yield strength

during test duration.c. After welded outlets are installed, hydrostatically test pipe as specified herein.d. Record each test cycle on a strip chart.e. Each test cycle for 30 inch and larger pipe shall be marked by pipe number.f. Inspect each pipe during testing for leaks.g. Pipe which shows evidence of leaks shall be scrapped.h. Repair welding of leaks is not permitted.

3. Perform a 15 psi air test on welded-on outlet pipe.4. Pipe ends (spigot end, bell and socket) shall be gauged with suitable

gauges at sufficiently frequent intervals to ensure compliance to standarddimensions of AWWA C151/A21.51.

a. In addition, each socket and spigot shall be inspected in a well lighted area for injurious defects which could affect the joint performance.

b. Remove defects by cutting of pipe ends.c. Pipe with injurious defects in the bell shall be scrapped.d. Manufacturer shall have a recommended ovality tolerance for pipes 18 inches inch and

larger.e. Each end of each 18 inch and larger pipe shall be measured and

approved by manufacturer’s quality assurance inspector to meettolerances.

5. Submit a certified inspection report from the independent agency ofwitnessed tests within 10 days of the inspection.

a. Test results shall show restrained joints in the sizes specified have beensuccessfully tested to at least twice the specified pressure rating of thejoint without leakage or failure.

6. Perform factory tests in accordance with AWWA C104/A21.4,C110/A21.10, C111/A21.11, C115/A21.15, C151/A21.51, C153/A21.53,and C606.

B. Owner’s Inspection:

1. Owner or designated representative may visit manufacturing facility toinspect pipe in production and testing in accordance with AWWAC151/A21.51.

2.3 PIPE DESIGN DATA

ER No. S049334 15060 - 18 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

Type 54-inch Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings

Application Sewage

Standards

AWWA C150/A21.50, Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe; AWWA C151/A21.51, Ductile-Iron Pipe. Centrifugally Cast, for Water; and AWWA C111/A21.11, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. AWWA M41.

Pipe Material Centrifugally cast, grade 60-42-10 iron.

Rated Pressure 150 psi

Surge Allowance (above Rated Pressure) 100 psi

Field Test Pressure (at high point) 100 psi

Restraint Design 100 psi with Factor of Safety = 1.5

Dead Load Overburden as shown on the Plans but not less than five (5) feet, with water level at ground level and dry soil weight of 120 lbs. per cubic foot.

Live Load HS-20 including Impact and check situation of two trucks passing.

Bedding Type 4 (per AWWA M41)

Joints Single gasket unrestrained push-on gasketed joints, flanged, or restrained.

Lining Ceramic epoxy

Coating Asphaltic top coat over arc-sprayed zinc, (if required)

External Wrap V-Bio Polyethylene Enhanced Encasement

Tabulated Layout Schedule

Required but no pressure zone information is required. Submit with Shop Drawings.

Design Verification Submission of Manufacturer's Signed and Sealed Structural Design Calculations is required with Shop Drawings.

Gaskets Neoprene or EPDM

Details, Specials/Fittings Furnished by Manufacturer

ER No. S049334 15060 - 19 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 General:

A. Furnish and maintain all barricades and flashing warning lights necessary to warn of the construction throughout the Project.

B. Pipe and fittings shall at all times be handled with great care to avoid damage. Exercise particular care not to injure pipe coatings. In loading and unloading, they shall be lifted with cranes or hoists or slid or rolled on skidways in obstructions.

C. Ductile Pipe joints shall be field tested after installation to confirm that the gaskets are in place. One apparatus to test the joint shall be furnished by the pipe manufacturer and instructions furnished for its use.

D. All work shall be performed by skilled workmen experienced in pipeline construction.

E. All pipe and fittings shall be adequately supported by clamps, brackets, straps, concrete sup- ports, rollers or other devices as shown and/or specified. Supports or hangers shall be spaced so that maximum deflection between supports or hangers shall not exceed 0.050 inch for pipe filled with liquid, but shall not be further than 6 feet apart, whichever is closer, unless otherwise shown. All pipe supports shall be secured to structures by approved inserts or expansion shields and bolts.

F. All pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned internally before being installed. All pipes, except oxygen service, air and gas, shall be flushed with water and swabbed to assure removal of all foreign matter before installation. Air and gas piping shall be tapped with a hammer to loosen scale or other foreign matter that might be within the pipe, and then thoroughly blown with a high pressure air hose. Furnish and maintain suitable air compressor.

G. Whenever possible, the pipe shall be installed with minimum 48-inches of cover. Deviations shall not be installed without written approval by the Owner.

H. At all horizontal or vertical pipe deviation, install both restrained pipe and thrust blocks. Joints may only be opened to adjust alignment by half of the AWWA or manufacturer's recommended opening (which is smaller).

I. Tie Rods: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, the size and number of tie rods for a joint or installation shall be as recommended by the manufacturer's design chart for a working pressure of 150 psi. Tie rods shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.2 EXCAVATION FOR PIPING

A. Make all excavation necessary for the construction of the pipelines, connections, valves and appurtenances, to the lines and grades shown on the Plans.

ER No. S049334 15060 - 20 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

B. Excavate the trench at least 6 inches below pipe laying grade as shown on the Plans. Install sheeting and shoring for the protection of workers in trenches, and where it is necessary for pipe installation and property protection or required by the Trench Safety Act. The disposal of water removed from an excavation shall be in a manner which will not create a hazard, or be detrimental to the public health or to public or private property.

C. Obtain all necessary permits approving the location and proposed method of disposal before discharging water from any excavation into any portion of the public right-of-way or into any existing drainage structure or facility. Furnish and maintain all construction signs required.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPE, FITTINGS AND VALVES

A. General:

1. The design Drawings are in some cases diagrammatic. They may not showevery bend, off-set, elbow or other fitting which may be required in thepiping for installation in the space allotted . Install gravity lines at uniformgrade to low point after field verification of low point invert.

2. The centerline of the pipe shall not vary by more than 2 inches from thelocation shown on the Plans and the top of the pipe shall not vary by morethan 2 inches from the established grade, except at points where thistolerance must be changed to clear obstructions, or make connections.

3. Limit onsite pipe storage to a maximum of one week. Use unloading andinstallation procedures that avoid cracking of the lining. If necessary, useplastic sheet bulkheads to close pipe ends and keep cement-mortar liningmoist. Deliver the pipe alongside the pipe laying access road over whichthe pipe trailer-tractors can travel under their own power. Place the pipe inthe order in which it is to be installed and secure it from rolling. Sandbagsmay be used to support the pipe in the ditch but no pipe shall be laid onblocks, except by the written permission of the Engineer of Record. Do notmove pipe by inserting any devices or pieces of equipment into the pipebarrel. Field repair linings damaged by unloading or installation procedures.Flanged joints, mechanical joints and push-on joints in cast iron pipe andfittings may be made under water.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF DUCTILE IRON PIPE

A. Install Ductile Iron Pipe in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C600-10 “Installation of Ductile- iron Mains and Their Appurtenances”, and the following. All bends, tees, and plugs, unless otherwise specified, shall be backed with concrete to undisturbed ground. Provision shall be made to prevent concrete from adhering to plugs or bolts by wrapping in polyethylene sheet complying with ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5-05.

1. Bolts, nuts and rubber gaskets for use in flanged and mechanical jointsshall be stored under cover. During laying operations, do not place tools,clothing, or other materials in the pipe Gaskets shall not be exposed toheat, light or any petroleum products, shall be kept clean and shall not behandled with greasy or dirty hands. When pipe laying is not in progress,

ER No. S049334 15060 - 21 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

close the ends of the installed pipe by a child- and vermin-proof plug. 2. Assemble Flanged joints in accordance with the written recommendations

of the pipe manufacturer. Before making up flanged joints in cast iron pipeand fittings, the back of each flange under the bolt heads, and the face ofeach flange shall have all lumps, blisters and excess bituminous coatingremoved and shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and dry. Cut the bore ofthe gaskets such that the gaskets do not protrude into the pipe when the flangebolts are tightened.

3. Before laying the ductile iron pipe, all lumps, blisters and excess asphalticcoating shall be removed from the bell and spigot ends of each pipe andthe outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell wire brushed and wipedclean and dry. The entire gasket groove area shall be free of bumps or anyforeign matter which might displace the gasket. The cleaned spigot andgasket shall not be allowed to touch the trench walls or trench bottom atany time. Vegetable soap lubricant shall be applied in accordance with thepipe manufacturer's recommendations, to aid in making the joint. Exercisecaution to prevent damage to the gasket or the adherence of grease orparticles of sand or dirt. Deflections shall be made only after the joint hasbeen assembled.

4. Cutting of ductile iron pipe for inserting valves, fittings, etc., shall be donewith a mechanical pipe saw in a neat and workmanlike manner withoutdamage to the pipe, the lining, or the coating.

5. Unless otherwise directed, ductile iron pipe shall be laid with the bell endsfacing in the direction of laying; and for lines on an appreciable slope, thebells shall, at the discretion of the Engineer, face upgrade. Small angularchanges (less than 2.5 degrees) in horizontal alignment defined in thedrawings by a point of inflection (PI) with no accompanying curve data shallbe approximated as a curve by deflecting an equal amount of equal lengthpipe segments to create a curve equally distributed on both sides of thegiven PI. Accomplish a larger (greater than or equal to 2.5 degrees) changein horizontal alignment where a curve is not called for in the drawingsthrough the use of an elbow placed at the station of the PI shown in thedrawings. Small angular changes (less than 2.5 degrees) in vertical alignmentmay be accomplished by the use of pulled joints. For larger vertical deflections,place an elbow at the station and elevation of the vertical PI shown in thedrawings.

6. Push-on and mechanical joints in ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be made inaccordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations except asotherwise specified herein. Joints between push-on and mechanical jointpipe and/or fittings shall be made in accord- ance with AWWA StandardSpecifications, "Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains andAppurtenances," C600-10, except that deflection at joints shall not exceedone-half of the manufacturer's recommended allowable deflection, or one-half of the allowable deflection specified in AWWA C600-10, whichever isthe lesser amount.

7. Flanged joints shall be used only where indicated on the Plans. Beforemaking up flanged joints in the pipeline, the back of each flange under thebolt heads and the face of each flange shall have all lumps, blisters andexcess bituminous coating removed and shall be wire brushed and wipedclean and dry. Flange faces shall be kept clean and dry when making upthe joint, and the workmen shall exercise caution to prevent damage to the

ER No. S049334 15060 - 22 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

gasket or the adherence of grease or particles of sand or dirt. Bolts and nuts shall be tightened by opposites in order to keep flange faces square with each other, and to insure that bolt stresses are evenly distributed.

8. Bolts and nuts in flanged and mechanical joints shall be tightened inaccordance with the written recommendations of the pipe manufacturer for a leak-free joint. Exercise caution to prevent overstress. Torque wrenches shall be used until, in the opinion of the Engineer, the workmen have become accustomed to the proper amount of pressure to apply on standard wrenches.

B. Joint Pipe:

1. Threaded Pipe: Ream all pipe after cutting and before threading. Use non-hardening pipe compound "Tite-Seal" or approved equal, on male threadsonly.

2. Provide nipples of same material and weight as pipe used. Provide extrastrong nipples when length of unthreaded part of nipple is less than 1-1/2".

3. Provide reducing fittings rather than bushings where changes in pipe sizesoccur.

4. Provide dielectric unions or flanges between copper and steel piping andbetween brass- ware and steel. Do not use steel and copper piping in thesame system without such isolation.

C. Pipe Protection:

1. Paint all un-insulated metal (ductile iron or steel) piping underground withtwo coats of asphaltic paint.

2. Wrap soil pipe that touches metal or is exposed to masonry with a layer of 6mil polyethylene.

3. Spirally wrap all pipe lines embedded in concrete with two layers of 30 lb.felt prior to placing the concrete.

4. Coat all exposed threads on galvanized steel pipe after assembly with twocoats of zinc chromate.

D. Cleaning and Testing: All of the piping installed under this project shall be tested as follows and as directed by the Engineer.

1. With exceptions as noted below, all ductile iron piping installed under thisContract shall be cleaned and tested according to Paragraph I herein belowin this Section:

a. Only potable water piping shall be disinfected.b. No leakage shall be permitted for flanged piping.c. No leakage shall be permitted for any type of above ground piping.

2. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere herein, all galvanized steel pressurepiping shall be tested at 100 psig. No leakage will be permitted.

E. Installation of Aboveground and Exposed Piping

1. Aboveground and exposed pipe fittings, valves and accessories shall be

ER No. S049334 15060 - 23 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

installed as shown or indicated on the Drawings. 2. Piping shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the job site

and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing, properlyclearing all equipment access are- as and openings. Changes in sizes shallbe made with appropriate reducing fittings rather than bushings. Pipeconnections shall be made in accordance with the details shown andmanufacturer's recommendations. Open ends of pipe lines shall be properlycapped or plugged during installation to keep dirt and other foreign materialout of the system. Pipe supports and hangers shall be provided whereindicated and as required to insure adequate support of the piping.

3. Welded connections shall be made in conformity with the requirements ofAWWA Standard C 206 and shall be done only by qualified welders. TheEngineer may, at his option, re- quire certificates that welders employed onthe work are qualified in conformity with the requirements of this standardand/or sample welds to verify the qualifications of the welders. Beforetesting, field welded joints shall be coated with the same material as usedfor coating its pipe in accordance with the requirements of AWWA.

4. Flanged joints shall be made up by installing the gasket between theflanges. The threads of the bolts and the faces of the gaskets shall becoated with a suitable lubricant immediately before installation.

5. Joints using Dresser couplings shall be made up as recommended by themanufacturer.

6. Use of perforated band iron (plumber's strap), wire or chain as pipe hangerswill not be acceptable. Supports for pipe less than 1-1/2 inches nominalsize shall not be more than 8-feet on centers and pipe 2-inches nominalsize and larger shall be supported at not more than 10-feet on centers,unless otherwise indicated. Supports for PVC pipe shall be spaced one-halfthe distance specified above unless otherwise indicated. Any noticeablesagging shall be corrected by the addition of extra supports at theContractor's expense.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. All water mains shall be flushed to remove all sand, debris, rock and other foreign matter. Dispose of the flushing water without causing a nuisance or property damage.

B. Pressure and Leakage Testing: Hydrostatically test all pressure pipe. Test Ductile Iron Pipe mains in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C600-10 once all backfill is in place and fully compacted, and after all thrust blocks have cured to their design strength. Do not test against closed valves. All pumps, piping and gauges shall be furnished, installed and operated by the Contractor and all such equipment and devices and their installation shall be approved by the Engineer. Pump shall be of a non-pulsating type suitable for this application and gauge accuracy certification may be required at the Engineer of Record's discretion. All pressure and leakage testing shall be done in the presence of a representative of the Department as a condition precedent to the approval and acceptance of the system.

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049334 15060 - 24 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

ER No. S049334 15100 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

SECTION 15100

VALVES, GENERAL

PART 1. GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. The Contractor shall provide all tools, supplies, materials, equipment, and labor necessary for furnishing, installing, adjusting, and testing of all valves and appurtenant work, complete and operable. For buried valves, the Contractor shall furnish and install valve boxes to grade, with covers, extensions, and position indicators.

B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all valves and valve operators called out in the various Sections of these Specifications except where otherwise specified. Valves and operators in particular locations may require a combination of units, sensors, limit switches, and controls specified in other sections of these Specifications.

C. All valves specified herein shall be furnished with an affidavit from the manufacturer(s) certifying that the valves furnished comply with the applicable provisions of the AWWA specifications, as modified herein. That they were factory tested in accordance with the AWWA Standard Leakage and Hydrostatic Tests as modified herein, with a certified test report furnished to the Department for each valve.

D. In addition to installation, adjusting and testing of valves in general, this section contain specifications for the following types of valves::

1. Automatic Air Release Valves and Flushing Valve Outlets.

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Piping, General.

B. Painting.

C. Equipment General Provisions.

D. Valve (by type) Specification Sections.

1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS

A. Codes:

1. All codes, as referenced herein, are specified in Section entitled "Reference Standards." As used herein, "ANSI" denotes the American National Standards Institute; "AWWA", the American Water Works

ER No. S049334 15100 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

Association; and "ASTM", the American Society for Testing and Materials.

B. Commercial Standards:

1. ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800.

2. ANSI B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Steel Nickel Alloy and Other Special Alloys.

3. ANSI/ASME Bl.20.1 General Purpose Pipe Threads (Inch). 4. ANSI/ASME B31.1 Power Piping. 5. ASTM A 36 Specification for Structural Steel. 6. ASTM A 48 Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 7. ASTM A 126 Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves,

Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. 8. ASTM A 536 Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 9. ASTM B 61 Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings. 10. ASTM B 62 Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce

Metal Castings. 11. ASTM B 148 Specification for Aluminum-Bronze Castings. 12. ASTM B 584 Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for

General Applications. 13. ANSI/AWWA C500 Gate Valves for Water and Sewerage Systems. 14. AWWA C550 Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and

Hydrants.

1.04 MANUFACTURER

A. All valves shall be the product of domestic manufacturing firms which have been engaged in the production of valves for not less than five (5) years.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Valve Testing: The Contractor is advised that he is required to furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary to pressure test each valve furnished by himself or the Department, bi-directionally, prior to installation, to the satisfaction of the Engineer of Record. If the valves are available, the tests shall be performed prior to the start of construction. Otherwise, the tests shall be performed as soon as the valves are available to afford the maximum time for any corrective work required. The Contractor shall include all costs for this requirement under the appropriate Proposal Item(s), no other compensation will be provided.

B. Bronze Parts: Unless otherwise specified, all interior bronze parts of valves shall conform to the requirements of ASTM B 62.

C. Provide valves that have the manufacturer's name and valve rating cast in body.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawing: Shop drawings of all valves and operators including associated wiring diagrams and electrical data, shall be furnished as specified in Section

ER No. S049334 15100 - 3 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

01340, entitled "Submittals".

B. Approved Drawings: The Engineer of Record's drawings, which constitute an integral part of this Contract, indicate the general layout of the complete system. Field verification of scale dimensions on plans is directed since actual locations, distances and levels will be governed by actual field conditions. The Contractor shall also review architectural, structural, and mechanical plans and shall adjust his work to conform to all conditions indicated thereon. Discrepancies shown on different plans, or between plans and actual field conditions, or between plans and specifications, shall promptly be brought to the attention of the Engineer of Record, for a decision. All items not specifically mentioned in the specifications or noted on the drawings, but which can be reasonably assumed as necessary to make a complete working installation shall be included.

PART 2. PRODUCTS

2.01 VALVES

A. General: The Contractor shall furnish all valves, gates, valve operating units, stem extensions, operators and other accessories as shown or specified. All valves and gates shall be new and of current manufacture. All non-buried valves, 6-inch and larger, shall have operators with position indicators. Where buried, these valves shall be provided with valve boxes, covers and valve extensions. Valves mounted higher than 6-feet above working level shall be provided with chain operators. All valves shall have a minimum design pressure rating of 150 psi unless otherwise specified elsewhere herein.

B. Cast iron parts of valves shall meet the requirements of ASTM A126, "Standard Specifications for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings, Class 'B'." Flanged ends shall be flat-faced and have bolt circle and bolt patterns conforming to ANSI B16.1 Class 125.

C. All castings shall be clean and sound, without defects of any kind and no plugging, welding or repairing of defects will be permitted. All bolt heads and nuts shall be hexagonal conforming to ANSI B18.2. Gaskets shall be full-face and made of synthetic elastomers in conformance with ANSI B16.21 suitable for the service characteristics, especially chemical compatibility and temperature. Non-ferrous alloys of various types shall be used for parts of valves as specified. Where no definite specification is given, the material shall be the recognized acceptable standard for that particular application.

D. All buried valves shall be provided with cast-iron valve boxes unless otherwise indicated. The boxes shall conform with Department Standards and be installed perpendicularly, centered around and covering the upper portions of the valve operator. The top of each valve box shall be placed flush with finish grade unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Valve boxes shall be as specified elsewhere in this Section.

E. All buried valves and other valves located below a concrete operating deck or

ER No. S049334 15100 - 4 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

level, specified or noted to be key operated, shall have an operator to finish grade or deck level, non-rising stem, a 2-inch square AWWA nut with skirt, and cover or box and cover, as may be required.

F. Valve Flanges: The flanges of valves shall be in accordance with Section 15060, "Piping and Fittings".

G. Gate Valve Stems: Gate valve stems shall be of bronze in accordance with AWWA C515, containing not more than 5 percent of zinc nor more than 2 percent of aluminum.

H. Protective Coating: Except where otherwise specified, ferrous surfaces, exclusive of stainless steel surfaces, in the fluid passages of all valves 4-inch and larger shall receive an epoxy coating in accordance with AWWA C550. Flange faces of valves shall not be epoxy coated. The valve manufacturer, shall certify in writing that such coating has been applied and tested in the manufacturing plant prior to shipment, in accordance with these Specifications. Exterior coating shall be asphalt varnish conforming to Federal Specification TT-C-494A.

I. Valve Labeling: A label shall be provided on all shut-off valves exclusive of hose bibs and chlorine cylinder valves. The label shall be of 1/16-inch brass or stainless steel, minimum 2 inches by 4 inches in size, and shall be permanently attached to the valve or on the wall adjacent to the valve or as indicated by the Department.

2.02 VALVE OPERATORS

A. General

1. All butterfly valves, plug valves over 8-inch size and gate valves installed horizontally shall be furnished with geared operators, provided by the manufacturer. All valves of a particular size and pressure rating by a given manufacturer shall be supplied with the same operator. No variation will be permitted during the contract. All valve operators, regardless of type, shall be installed, adjusted, and tested by the valve manufacturer at the manufacturing plant. Operator orientation shall be verified with the Department prior to fabrication. If this requirement is not met, changes to orientation shall be made at no cost the Department.

2. All operators shall turn counter-clockwise to open. Operators shall have the open direction clearly and permanently marked. Field adjustment and testing of the operators and valves to ensure proper installation and operation shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

B. Manual Operators 1. All manual operators shall be equipped with AWWA square nuts,

handwheels or chain drives as appropriate. Some small (6-inch or less) valves may be lever operated if so specified elsewhere herein. Where buried, the valves shall have extensions with square nuts or floor stands as indicated on the Drawings

2. Operation of valves and gates shall be designed so that the effort required

ER No. S049334 15100 - 5 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

to operate the handwheel, lever or chain shall not exceed 40 pounds applied at the extremity of the wheel or lever. The handwheels on valves 14 inches and smaller shall not be less than 8 inches in diameter, and on valves larger than 14 inches the handwheel shall not be less than 12 inches in diameter.

2.03 VALVE BOXES

A. Cast iron valve boxes shall be provided for all valves installed underground. All valves boxes shall be No. 2 or 3 (for water) and No. 52 or 53 (for sewer) in accordance with Department Standards.

2.04 AUTOMATIC AIR RELEASE VALVES AND FLUSHING VALVE OUTLETS

A. The automatic air release valve and flushing valve assemblies shall be installed in accordance with the details shown in the Standard Details appended at the rear of the Specifications.

B. Taps into ductile iron pipe for air release and flushing valve assemblies shall be AWWA Tapered thread only, and the Contractor shall provide suitable equipment for this purpose as approved by the Engineer. After the tap has been made, and the corporation stop installed into the pipe, the inside of the pipe around the stop and the exposed exterior surfaces of the stop shall be heavily coated with Kop-Coats Bitumastic Super Tank Solution or approved equal.

C. The installation of the flushing valve outlet shall include excavation; cutting,

threading and installing pipe and fittings; tapping the ductile iron plug; furnishing and installing angle valve; cutting and placing cast iron riser pipe complete with valve boxes and cover, set in concrete; backfilling and compaction; and all other appurtenance items and work.

D. Sewage automatic air-release valves shall be of the type that automatically

releases accumulated air, gas or vapor under pressure during system operation and shall be of the size shown on the approved Plans or Standard Details. The internal mechanism shall be the compound lever type to permit the valve to open under pressure to vent pockets of entrapped air, gas or vapor as they accumulate. The compound mechanism shall be activated by a stainless steel concave float to lift the Buna-N needle or orifice button to control the air release orifice. Linkage shall be stainless steel. The air release valves shall be designed for a maximum working pressure of 150 psi. The valves shall be supplied with a 2-inch bronze isolation shut-off ball valve, 1-inch blow-off valve and a 2-inch quick-disconnect backflushing connection with shut off valve. The valve shall have a cast iron body and cover, stainless steel internal mechanisms and teflon coated inner lining.

E. Automatic air release valves (for sewage) shall be Val-Matic Model 48S, A.R.I. D-

025P or approved equal

PART 3. EXECUTION

ER No. S049334 15100 - 6 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General: All work shall be performed by skilled workmen experienced in similar installations. All valves shall be adequately supported by clamps, brackets, straps, concrete supports or other devices as shown or specified. All supports shall be secured to structures by approved inserts or expansion shields and bolts.

B. All valves shall be thoroughly cleaned internally before being installed. Installation of valves shall be done in accordance with construction methods specified in "Pipes and Fittings" Section of these Specifications.

C. Install valves as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Install valves so that they are easily accessible for operation, visual inspection and preventive maintenance.

E. Location of valves and chain operators: Install valves so as to be accessible for operation and free from interferences when operated. Position so that leakage will not contact any electrical equipment that may be located below.

F. The installation of all underground valves shall include a valve box and riser in accordance with the Details shown on the Plans or in the Standard Details for the various sizes and types of valves to be installed. Riser pipes and valve boxes shall be carefully centered and set flush with the finished grade if in paving, or with the top of the ground if out of paved areas. All valve boxes shall be held in position with concrete as shown on the Plans or in the Standard Details.

G. Upon completion of the Project, but prior to final acceptance, the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer, shall fully open each valve installed by him, except at connections to existing Department mains. For valves 16-inch and larger, the Contractor, shall count the number of turns required to operate each valve from a completely closed to a fully opened position, and shall paint the number on the bottom of the valve box lid or manhole cover. Valves at connections to existing Department mains shall only be operated by Department forces.

END OF SECTION

ER No. S049334 15125 - 1 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

SECTION 15125

PLUG VALVES

PART 1. GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install plug valves, complete and operable, as shown and specified herein, appurtenances, operators, and accessories.

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Section 15100, “Valves, General.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The plug valve manufacturer shall have a line of parts available to support the plug valve furnished to the Department. Manufacturers with a history of unsatisfactory performance or discontinuing spare parts shall be disapproved.

PART 2. PRODUCTS

2.01 PLUG VALVE

A. The plug valves shall be of the non-lubricated eccentric type, with resilient faced plugs, and shall be designed for a minimum working water pressure of at least 150 psi for valves through 36-inch and a minimum working water pressure of 100 psi for valves 42 IN and larger. Plug valves 24-inch and larger shall be full opening with 100 percent rectangular port area. Plug valves larger than 8-inch shall be designed for operation in a horizontal pipeline, with the valve shaft in a horizontal position and the operating shaft in a vertical position. The plug valves shall be as manufactured by DeZurik, Inc. or approved equal, and shall be the standard product of a manufacturer which has produced and sold such equipment for a period of at least five (5) years. Valves shall be suitable for buried, submerged service.

B. Flanged valves shall have ends plain-faced and drilled conforming to ANSI Standard B16.1, "Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings", Class 125. Bolt holes in the flanges shall be equally spaced and shall straddle the vertical and horizontal centerlines. All joint materials for flanged valves will be furnished by others.

C. Mechanical joint valves shall have ends complying with ANSI/AWWA Standard C111/A21.11. "Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings". Mechanical joint gaskets, glands, tee-head bolts and hex nuts shall be included with the valve. Segmented glands or follower glands held in place by set screws will not be acceptable. Bolt holes in flanges of the mechanical joint shall be equally spaced and shall straddle the vertical centerline. Gaskets shall be

ER No. S049334 15125 - 2 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

shipped separately in suitable protective containers. Valves shall have neoprene gaskets.

D. Plug valve body and plug shall be cast iron conforming to the requirements of ASTM Standard A126, “Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings”, Class B, and all nuts, bolts, springs, washers, and similar component items exposed to the operating fluid shall be AISI Type 316 stainless steel. Resilient plug facing shall be of neoprene.

E. Plug valves shall be furnished with a corrosion-resistant seat consisting of a welded-in overlay of high nickel content on all surfaces contacting the plug face and shall comply with ANSI/AWWA Standard C507, "Ball Valves, 6 In. Through 48 In. (150 mm Through 1200 mm)", Section 3.2.

F. Plug valves shall be furnished with replaceable, sleeve-type AISI Type 316 stainless steel bearings in the upper and lower journals, and shall comply with ANSI/AWWA Standard C507, Section 3.2.

G. Plug valve shaft seals shall be designed for replaceable, manually adjustable, multiple ring "V" or "U" type packing of Buna-N or neoprene. The valves shall be of the bolted-bonnet type and shall comply with ANSI/AWWA Standard C507.

H. Plug valves shall have stops at the fully-opened and fully-closed positions.

I. Plug valves shall be designed for drip-tight shut-off in wet service applications at pressure differentials up the full rating of the valve with pressure in either direction. Plug valves shall be provided with a manual operator sized to suit the maximum differential pressure across the valves. Minimum plug valve operator output torques shall equal or exceed the values specified in the following table:

PLUG VALVE SIZE

REQUIRED ACTUATOR 100 PSI

OUTPUT TORQUE 150 PSI

12" 1,063 FT-LBS 1,438 FT-LBS 18” 3,300 FT-LBS 4,500 FT-LBS 24" (100%) 10,000 FT-LBS 12,790 FT-LBS 30" (100%) 15,875 FT-LBS 19,550 FT-LBS 36" (100%) 27,000 FT-LBS 38,750 FT-LBS 42" (100%) 45,000 FT-LBS 63,195 FT-LBS 48" (100%) 45,000 FT-LBS 63,195 FT-LBS 54" (100%) 65,000 FT-LBS 92,860 FT-LBS 60" (100%) 65,000 FT-LBS 92,860 FT-LBS

J. Manufacturer shall supply operators producing larger output torque values if so required by their valves, but in no case shall operator output torque be less than that shown for the particular valve size and pressure.

K. In addition, the operator shall be capable of withstanding an input torque of 300 ft.lbs. on the operating nuts or a pull of 200 pounds on the handwheel without

ER No. S049334 15125 - 3 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

damage to operator components between the input and the stops. Operators on valves 30-inch and larger shall also be equipped with an AWWA input shaft stop.

L. All external ferrous items, except cast iron, shall be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM Standard A123, "Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products", or ASTM Standard A153, "Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware", or stainless steel

M. Manual operators for valves 8-inch and smaller shall be lever actuated.

N. Manual operators for valves 10-inch to 24-inch shall be totally enclosed traveling-nut or worm gear type, permanently lubricated, suitable for buried and/or submerged conditions.

O. Manual operators for valves 30-inch and larger shall be totally enclosed worm gear operators, permanently lubricated, suitable for buried and submerged operation, and shall in accordance with ANSI/AWWA Standard C504, with AWWA input shaft stop. The following are approved operators for plug valves 30-inches and larger:

1. Limitorque Type HBC 2. Rotork Model IW-RL-MD-RAWl.

P. Manual operators shall be provided with completely enclosed mounting brackets or adapters. The operators shall be equipped with adjustable stops to prevent overtravel in both the open and closed position with standard 2-inch square operating nuts with skirts as listed elsewhere herein, or with handwheel if for above ground service. All plug valves shall open by turning the operating nut or handwheel counterclockwise. Orient operators with horizontal plug shafts such that the plug rotates upward upon opening.

Q. All operator components between the operating nut and the adjustable stops shall be designed to withstand, without damage, an input torque of 300 ft. lbs.

R. The exterior valve surfaces shall be shop painted with two coats of asphalt varnish conforming to Federal Specifications TT-C-434A.

S. Testing: Plug valves shall be tested in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C504, “AWWA Standard for Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves”, Section 5, Subsection 5.2. The performance test (Subsec. 5.2.1) and hydrostatic test (Subsec. 5.2.3) shall be performed as stated, however the leakage test (Subsec. 5.2.2) shall be performed bidirectionally; first on one side of the valve, and then on the other. The manufacturer shall furnish a certified test report with every valve stating that the valve has met the requirements of the tests.

PART 3. EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

ER No. S049334 15125 - 4 PCTS No. 12348

S-902

A. All valves shall be installed in accordance with provisions of Section 15100, "Valves, General." Care shall be taken that all valves are well supported.

B. The Contractor shall install valves with seats on the downstream side and unless shown otherwise, set valve (above 8-inch size) with the main axis of the plug horizontal.

C. Inspect a valve fully open and then tightly closed and test the various nuts and bolts for tightness before installation. Take special care to prevent any foreign matter from becoming lodged in or on the valve seat. Any valve that does not operate correctly shall be removed and replaced.

D. The installation of a buried eccentric plug valves shall include the installation of a concrete bearing pad and a ductile iron riser pipe, complete with valve box and cover, set in concrete. The valve operator shall be installed with the AWWA standard 2-in square operating nut supplied by the valve manufacturer, which shall be supported as previously specified and shown on the Plans.

E. After the coupling has been welded to the extension shaft, the weld shall be wire brushed and coated with a Bitumastic.

F. For all quarter-turn plug valves installed, the Contractor shall paint the underside of the valve box cover with red paint.

END OF SECTION